Numaris Reference VB33G PDF

S Y S T E M T E S T R E V I E W
Contents OK Function OK
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Operating Instructions
MAGNETOM
Numaris Reference
VB33G
b33g_e.book Page i Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
This manual is only meant for the personal use of Siemens service engineers.
Do not distribute any copy to the customer !
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Manufacturers note:
Products, that are bearing a CE mark fulll the provisions of the
Council Directive 93/42/EECof 14 June 1993 concerning medical
devices.
Siemens AG 1996
All rights reserved
Siemens AG, Medical Solutions
Henkestrae 127, D-91 052 Erlangen, Germany
Headquarters in
Berlin and Munich
Siemens AG, Wittelsbacher Platz 2, D-80 333 Mnchen, Germany
Order No. M2-050.621.03.11.02
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
AG 01.02
Manual Development & Design by CAPE
Erlangen
Translation by Ulrike Fear/Michael Spaventa
Siemens Medical Systems, Inc.
Iselin, N.J. USA
b33g_e.book Page ii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
NUMARIS REFERENCE iii
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Special information
(Revision 11)
This handbook is part of the multi-volume operating instructions
for the MAGNETOM MR systems.
System
Guide
Application
Guide
Working with
Numaris
MAGNETOM
Manual Set Numaris
Reference
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page iii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
SPECIAL INFORMATION
iv MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Revised chapters
Revision 02
Title page
Revision 03
Addendum MAGNETOM Open viva ................................................................ xix
Revision 04
Addendum MAGNETOM Vision plus, Impact plus, Impact Expert plus ........... xix
Revision 05
Title page
Revision 06
Title page
Revision 07
This handbook was completely revised to allow for a successful
integration of the changes made. All pages have been updated to
include the new revision number 07.
Revision 08
(only MAGNETOM Impact Expert/Impact Expert plus)
Title page
Revision 09
(only MAGNETOM Open/Open viva/Open viva #P)
Title page
b33g_e.book Page iv Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
NUMARIS REFERENCE v
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Revision 10
Title page
Table of contents
How to use this guide? .................................................................................... xxi
Changing Settings for Registration Functions................................................ A4
Entries in the patient list .............................................................................. A.15
Dynamic image numbering ......................................................................... A.39
A.6 Using patient data from the RIS list
Modifying the type of display....................................................................... C.68
Entries in the image list ............................................................................... D.13
Working with macros....................................................................................J.57
K.2 Starting programs
Transferring image les (Description of function)........................................ K.72
Index
Revision 11
Title page
Table of contents
B.10 Terminating the measurement
K.2 Starting programs
Index
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page v Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
b33g_e.book Page vi Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
NUMARIS REFERENCE vii
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Table of contents
How to use this guide........................................................ xxi
A Patient
Summaryof patient management andcallingimages..........................A2
ChangingSettings for RegistrationFunctions......................................A4
A.1 Selectingapatient
Descriptionof function.....................................................................A.12
Selectingfromthepatient list ...........................................................A.14
Selectingthepatient directly ............................................................A.17
Printingalist ....................................................................................A.19
A.2 Selectingthecurrent patient
A.3 Registeringanewpatient
Enteringpatient data ........................................................................A.32
Endingregistration ..........................................................................A.38
Dynamic imagenumbering...............................................................A.39
A.4 Preregisteringpatients
Enteringpatient data ........................................................................A.42
Conrmingpreregistration................................................................A.43
A.5 Renewingapatient for theexamination
Selectingaregisteredpatient............................................................A.52
Renewingpatient data......................................................................A.54
A.6 Usingpatient datafromtheRIS list
Potential dataowinaclinical informationsystem...........................A.62
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page vii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
viii MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overviewof theworklist....................................................................A.63
SettingParameters for Inquiries .......................................................A.66
Transferringpatient datafor MR-examination...................................A.69
A.7 Modifyingpatient data
Descriptionof function......................................................................A.72
Selectingthepatient andimagerange...............................................A.73
Performingmodications .................................................................A.74
A.8 Pagingthroughpatient lists
Selectingtheprevious patient ..........................................................A.82
Selectingthenext patient .................................................................A.83
B Measurement
Summaryof measurement functions...................................................B2
B.1 Selectingandmanagingthemeasurement protocol
Groupandprotocol list ....................................................................B.12
Managingprotocols youhavecreated...............................................B.14
Installingnewpulsesequences.........................................................B.18
B.2 Positioningslices
Descriptionof function......................................................................B.22
General information..........................................................................B.24
Aligningslices...................................................................................B.25
Settingslicegroups ..........................................................................B.28
Additional parameters.....................................................................B.210
Settingpresaturationslabs ............................................................B.211
Processingsliceobjects..................................................................B.212
B.3 Modifyingmeasurement parameters
Descriptionof function......................................................................B.32
General information..........................................................................B.34
Settingthepulseparameters ............................................................B.36
b33g_e.book Page viii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE ix
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Settingthesliceparameters .............................................................B.37
Free-valuesliceparameters ............................................................B.314
Settingthedataacquisition.............................................................B.318
Settingreconstructionandother parameters..................................B.324
Settingthetriggering .....................................................................B.326
Settingthelters ............................................................................B.328
Conguringcoils (not MAGNETOMOpen)......................................B.331
Settingtheautomatic adjustment ..................................................B.336
B.4 Reactivatingmeasurement protocols
Descriptionof function.....................................................................B.42
Selectingtheparameters ..................................................................B.45
Testingtheconsistency.....................................................................B.47
Displayingthemeasurement parameters..........................................B.48
B.5 Processingmeasurement jobs
Descriptionof function.....................................................................B.52
Processingthequeue.......................................................................B.54
B.6 Performingthemeasurement
Loadingandperformingthemeasurement.......................................B.62
B.7 Loadingthecurrent measurement protocol
Loadprocedure................................................................................B.72
B.8 Displayingthemeasurement protocol
Displayingthemeasurement parameters .........................................B.82
B.9 Startingthemeasurement
Measurement procedure...................................................................B.92
B.10 Terminatingthemeasurement
Actual procedure............................................................................B.102
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page ix Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
x MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.11 Settingthephysiological signal
Settingtheparameters....................................................................B.112
B.12 Presettingparameters for themeasurement functions
Presettingtheparameters...............................................................B.122
B.13 SAR check
Overviewof SAR.............................................................................B.132
B.14 Adjustment
Summaryof function......................................................................B.142
Global shim(MAP-Shim)................................................................B.143
3-Dshim.........................................................................................B.147
B.15 Interactiveshim
Settingthegradient offset currents or shimcurrents......................B.152
Changingthesignal display............................................................B.156
Managingshimles........................................................................B.159
B.16 Monitoringphysiological stimulation
(MAGNETOMVisiononly)
Limits (Thresholds) ........................................................................B.162
Displayingphysiological stimulationvalues....................................B.164
C Series
Summaryof theseries functions .........................................................C2
C.1 Selectingaseries of theactiveviewpatient
Selectingfromtheseries list ............................................................C.12
C.2 Creatingnewseries
Descriptionof function......................................................................C.22
Selectingfromtheseries list.............................................................C.24
Selectingfromtheimagelist.............................................................C.25
b33g_e.book Page x Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE xi
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Concludingthecreationof anewseries............................................C.26
CheckingtheDICOMconsistency.....................................................C.27
C.3 Sortingimages inseries
Selectingpatients andseries ............................................................C.32
Settingthesort mode ......................................................................C.34
Performingthesort .........................................................................C.36
C.4 Modifyingseries
Descriptionof function.....................................................................C.42
Performingmodications.................................................................C.44
C.5 Pagingthroughseries
Pagingdownthroughseries ............................................................C.52
Pagingupthroughseries .................................................................C.53
C.6 Displayingimagepositions onalocalizer image
Descriptionof function.....................................................................C.62
Selectingtheseries...........................................................................C.64
Selectingfrompostedseries ............................................................C.66
Modifyingthetypeof display............................................................C.68
D Image
Summaryof theimagefunctions.........................................................D2
D.1 Selectingimages of theactiveviewpatient
Selectingfromtheimagelist ............................................................D.12
D.2 Dynamic imagedisplay
Descriptionof function.....................................................................D.22
Fast imagepaging.............................................................................D.24
Cinemode........................................................................................D.26
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page xi Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
xii MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
D.3 Pagingthroughindividual images
Pagingdownthroughimages .......................................................... D.32
Pagingupthroughimages............................................................... D.33
E Evaluate
Summaryof theevaluationfunctions...................................................E2
E.1 Magnifyingimagesections
Descriptionof function......................................................................E.12
Magnifyingindividual images............................................................E.13
Individual manipulations...................................................................E.14
Magnifyingarangeof images...........................................................E.16
E.2 Zoomingandroamingtheimage
Zoomingimages...............................................................................E.23
Roamingtheimageunder thesegment.............................................E.24
E.3 Measuringdistances intheimage
Drawingandmeasuringlines............................................................E.34
Modifyingandcopyinglines .............................................................E.36
E.4 Measuringangles intheimage
Drawingandmeasuringtheangle.....................................................E.43
Modifyingandcopyingangles ..........................................................E.44
E.5 Superimposingagridontheimage
Superimposingthecoordinatesystem..............................................E.54
E.6 Multiplanar reconstruction(MPR)
Selectingbaseimages ......................................................................E.62
b33g_e.book Page xii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE xiii
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Descriptionof function..................................................................... E.64
Orthogonal positioning(not for MIP)................................................ E.66
Obliquepositioning........................................................................... E.68
Double-obliquepositioning ............................................................ E.610
Positioningcurvedcuts (not for MIP)............................................. E.612
Generatingrotatedseries................................................................ E.614
Generatingparallel series ............................................................... E.617
Generatingaseries of parallel curvedcuts...................................... E.619
Generatingthickslices.................................................................... E.621
Startingthereconstruction............................................................. E.622
Displayingcuts............................................................................... E.624
Managingcalculationprotocols...................................................... E.625
StoringMPR series......................................................................... E.628
E.7 Maximumintensityprojections (MIP)
Selectingbaseimages ...................................................................... E.72
SuperimposingtheVOI..................................................................... E.77
MIP interactiveonly: Movingtheimagewiththemouse................. E.712
Deningtheviewdirection.............................................................. E.716
Startingthereconstruction............................................................. E.721
Displayingprojections .................................................................... E.723
Storingprojections......................................................................... E.724
Managingcalculationprotocols...................................................... E.725
E.8 Scrollingimages
Scrollingindividual images............................................................... E.83
Scrollingarangeof images .............................................................. E.85
E.9 Modifyingimagevalues
Averagingimages ............................................................................. E.94
Adding/Subtractingimages .............................................................. E.96
Rotatingimages................................................................................ E.97
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page xiii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
xiv MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Mirroringimages ..............................................................................E.98
Offsettinggreyvalues .......................................................................E.99
Invertingimages.............................................................................E.910
Manipulatinginbackground............................................................E.911
E.10 Markingandlabellingimagedetails
Descriptionof function....................................................................E.102
E.11 Statistical evaluationof individual images
DrawingROIs andcalculatingthedistributionof greyvalues.........E.114
Displayingandevaluatingthehistogram.........................................E.115
ManagingROIs ..............................................................................E.116
E.12 Statistical comparisonof multipleimages
Selectingcalculationparameters ....................................................E.124
DrawingtheROI andperformingtheevaluation..............................E.126
ManagingROIs ..............................................................................E.129
E.13 Filteringimages (optional*)
Howdoes thelter work?...............................................................E.132
Selectingimages andlter sharpness.............................................E.134
Conguringthelter.......................................................................E.136
Workingwithlter jobs...................................................................E.139
E.14 Dynamic evaluation
Selectinglinking..............................................................................E.144
What canbelinked?........................................................................E.146
Adding/subtractinggreyvalues.....................................................E.1410
Multiplying/dividinggreyvalues....................................................E.1411
ReducinginterferenceinSteadyState(CISS) ...............................E.1412
CalculatingaT1-weightedimage..................................................E.1414
b33g_e.book Page xiv Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE xv
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
CalculatingaT2-weightedimage.................................................. E.1416
Obtainingthelogarithmof greyvalues.......................................... E.1418
Differentiation/Integration............................................................. E.1419
Evaluatingmultipleseries ............................................................ E.1420
Calculatingtheslopeof theregressionline................................... E.1422
Calculatingthemeanvalue/standarddeviation............................. E.1423
GeneratingBOLDimages.............................................................. E.1424
Prescalingtheresults ................................................................... E.1425
Startingtheevaluation.................................................................. E.1427
E.15 Generatingprolecuts
Descriptionof function................................................................... E.152
Settingtheparameters.................................................................... E.153
Evaluatingtheprolecut ................................................................ E.154
E.16 Cardiac evaluation
Selectingcardiac series .................................................................. E.162
Segmentingimages........................................................................ E.164
Generatingcontours automatically................................................. E.165
Generatingcontours manually........................................................ E.167
Processingcontours....................................................................... E.169
Calculatingtheventricular volume................................................ E.1612
Displayingtheresults of theevaluation......................................... E.1616
Examples of tables ....................................................................... E.1618
Examples of curves ...................................................................... E.1619
E.17 Flowquanticationevaluation
Evaluating2-Dphasecontrast images............................................ E.174
EvaluatingRACEimages................................................................. E.177
Phasecorrectionof theoutput curve.............................................. E.179
Correctingthecurve..................................................................... E.1710
Superimposingthecurveontheimage......................................... E.1712
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page xv Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
xvi MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.18 Cardiac evaluation(ARGUS)
ARGUS imageanalysis platform.....................................................E.182
Patient browser...............................................................................E.184
Series browser................................................................................E.185
Imagebrowser................................................................................E.186
Cardiac SegmentationMenu...........................................................E.187
Cardiac FunctionOutput Platform.................................................E.1820
SectoringMenu............................................................................E.1823
Bulls-eyeOutput Platform............................................................E.1828
F File
Summaryof lefunctions.................................................................... F2
Fileoperations ..................................................................................... F3
Files andstoragemedia....................................................................... F4
DICOM................................................................................................. F5
F.1 Archivingles
Settingarchiveparameters ................................................................F.12
Actual archiving ................................................................................F.14
Interruptingthearchivingprocess ....................................................F.16
Imagenumber alreadypresent...........................................................F.17
Archivingto magneto-optical disk(MOD) ..........................................F.18
F.2 Copyingles
Descriptionof function.......................................................................F.22
Actual copyingprocedure..................................................................F.24
Interruptingthecopyprocedure.........................................................F.27
F.3 Markingimageles for further processing
F.4 Deletingles
Descriptionof function.......................................................................F.42
Performingthedeleteprocedure.......................................................F.44
b33g_e.book Page xvi Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE xvii
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
G Exposure
Summaryof exposurefunctions..........................................................G2
G.1 Selectingimages andlming
Descriptionof function.....................................................................G.12
Overview: Filmingthescreen............................................................G.13
Transferringimages..........................................................................G.14
Displayinglmsheets.......................................................................G.16
Includingthelocalizer andslicepositions onthelmsegment.........G.17
Correctingthelmsheet...................................................................G.18
Releasingexposures.........................................................................G.19
Overview: Filmingfromtheseries list.............................................G.110
Selectingimages fromtheseries list ..............................................G.112
Manipulatingimages intheseries list.............................................G.113
Transferringimages fromtheseries list to lmsheets....................G.116
G.2 Presettingexposureparameters
Parameters for thedigital camera ....................................................G.26
PresettingtheDICOMcamera...........................................................G.27
G.3 Processingexposurejobs
Processingjobs................................................................................G.34
Showinginformationabout thejob...................................................G.36
H Printer
Summaryof theprint functions...........................................................H2
Possibleproblems whenprinting.........................................................H4
H.1 Printingimages
Descriptionof function.....................................................................H.12
Allocatingscreensegments..............................................................H.14
Selectingimages ..............................................................................H.16
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page xvii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
xviii MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H.2 Creatingsnapshots
Descriptionof function..................................................................... H.22
Printingafunctionwindow.............................................................. H.23
PrintingascreenROI ....................................................................... H.24
H.3 Presettingtheprint parameters
Activatingdefaults ........................................................................... H.34
Creatinganewmaster page............................................................. H.36
Processingmaster pages................................................................. H.38
H.4 Processingthelist of print jobs
Processingjobs ............................................................................... H.44
Showinginformationabout thejob.................................................. H.46
I 9
J Display
Summaryof thedisplayfunctions........................................................ J 2
J .1 Modifyingthescreendisplay
Changingthedisplaymode............................................................... J .12
What happens whenyouchangethesegment display? ................... J .14
Changingsegments ......................................................................... J .15
Other settings ................................................................................... J .18
J .2 Displayingtheimagetext
Switchingtext onandoff ................................................................. J .22
J .3 Medical windowing
Settingthewindowingparameters ................................................... J .32
Windowing ....................................................................................... J .34
Multi-windowing .............................................................................. J .36
b33g_e.book Page xviii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
NUMARIS REFERENCE xix
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .4 Changingthecolor displayfor thefunctionwindow
Selectingthedesiredcolor................................................................ J .42
J .5 Displayingmeasuredimages automatically
Overviewof theautomatic imagedisplayfunction............................ J .52
SwitchingtheAuto Displayfunctionon/off ....................................... J .53
Selectingsegments .......................................................................... J .54
Settingwindowingmodality.............................................................. J .55
Selectingthesliceto bedisplayed.................................................... J .56
Workingwithmacros........................................................................ J .57
K System
Summaryof systemfunctions.............................................................K2
K.1 Logbookreport
Descriptionof function.....................................................................K.12
Searchingfor messages ..................................................................K.14
K.2 Startingprograms
Descriptionof function.....................................................................K.22
Changingdefaults.............................................................................K.23
Deleteprotectionfor patient .............................................................K.25
Numaris database.............................................................................K.26
Callingthelogle...........................................................................K.210
Automatic datatransfer ..................................................................K.212
Eliminatingerrors...........................................................................K.214
Enteringimagenumbers alpha-numerically....................................K.215
Workingwithcopyjobs onthenetwork..........................................K.216
ChangingPasswords/FTP access ...................................................K.218
Editingthelist of bodyparts ...........................................................K.220
Additional programs.......................................................................K.221
K.3 Endingthesoftware
Settingthemode..............................................................................K.32
Rev. 11
b33g_e.book Page xix Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
CONTENTS
xx MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.4 Programmingthefunctionkeys
Descriptionof function......................................................................K.42
Programmingthekeys......................................................................K.43
K.5 Retrievingsystemdata
DataprovidedbyImprint ..................................................................K.52
K.6 Listingdevicedata
Dataonstoragemediaandnetworks................................................K.62
K.7 Transferringimageles
Exportingimages..............................................................................K.73
Importingimageles .......................................................................K.74
K.8 Settingupthecamera
K.9 Settingandcheckingtheprinter
K.10 Resettingtheworkspace
K.11 Systemstandby
K.12 Remotediagnostics
K.13 Qualityassurance
Overwiewof thequalityassurance..................................................K.132
K.14 Servicefunctions
K.15 Resettingthemeasurement system
Index
b33g_e.book Page xx Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
NUMARIS REFERENCE xxi
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
How to use this guide
Welcome to Numaris, the user software for operating the MR
systems:
O MAGNETOM Vision,
O MAGNETOM Impact,
O MAGNETOM Impact Expert,
O MAGNETOM Open
Please note: In the context of this handbook the product name:
O MAGNETOM Open also includes the Open viva and Open viva #P
systems,
O MAGNETOM Vision also includes the Vision plus systems,
O MAGNETOM Impact also includes the Impact plus systems,
O MAGNETOM Impact Expert also includes the Impact Expert plus
systems.
Keywords To help you locate specic operating steps, the description of con-
cepts is identied by keywords written in bold letters in the left
margin of the text. All keywords are listed in the index.
Please note: The measurement protocols, pulse sequences, coils
and parameters shown in the manual depend upon the system
and application and are only to be used as examples.
Rev. 10
b33g_e.book Page xxi Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
INTRODUCTION
xxii MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview
Patient Patient selection and management Part A
Measurement Measurement modes B
Series Series selection and management C
Image Image selection D
Evaluate Image post-processing and evaluation E
File Patient, series, and image management F
Exposure Image documentation G
Printer Printer functions H
(not for single console systems
MAGNETOM Open, Open viva and Impact with
host processor Sparc 2)
Display Selection of display parameters J
System System functions K
The layout of the guide
Chapter The chapters are organized according to the sequence used in list-
ing the functions in the menus. Each function is allocated a chap-
ter identied by a letter and a number. For example : chapter B.3
Changing the measurement parameters = Measurement Change.
Part The chapters are combined into parts just as the individual func-
tions are grouped into main function groups. For example : Part B
Measurement = main function group Measurement.
Summary chapter The functions described in a new part are dened and summa-
rized in the rst chapter of a part.
Index The index has been appended at the end of this manual.
Should you have any suggestions or proposals for improvement,
please tell us. We will gladly incorporate your suggestions in the
next update.
Thank you for your cooperation.
b33g_e.book Page xxii Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A Patient
b33g_e.book Page 1 Thursday, February 7, 2002 5:18 PM
Patient
A2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of patient management
and calling images
The patient functions are used to register patient data for the mea-
surement or to call patient images.
Select
Selecting a patient ............................................................................A.1
Current
Selecting the current patient...........................................................A.2
Register
Registering a new patient ...............................................................A.3
Preregister
Preregistering patients ....................................................................A.4
Renew
Renewing a patient for the examination ......................................A.5
Worklist
Using patient data from the RIS list ..............................................A.6
Patient
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
MAGNETOM Vision only
NUMARIS REFERENCE A3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Modify
Modifying patient data................................................................... A.7
Patient/Patient+
Paging through patient lists ........................................................... A.8
Rev. 10
Patient
A4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing Settings for Registration
Functions
Certain Siemens standard settings can be changed in the registra-
tion function. Please contact your application specialist to get in-
formation on the desired settings.
Please note: The user is responsible for any changes made to the
standard settings.
The following settings are possible:
New Study Study description , Accession number or Body part examined
can be set for a new study.
Patient Renew Do not set up a Newstudy for the updated patient. Change the pa-
tient's weight for the following examinations, without starting a
New study.
Patient Worklist For patients from the worklist:
O Change patient data using Patient Modify,
O Set up a New Study,
O Change Study description. Please contact your RIS
representative for further information.
NUMARIS REFERENCE A.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.1
Selecting a patient
When you select a patient with Patient Select, his/her images
will be displayed in the active segment. You can also scroll
through patient list, series list, or image list.
The patient actually selected then becomes the active view patient.
Active view patient The active view patient is the patient corresponding to the image
displayed in the active segment.
You can select a specic series or image of the patient, as required.
Use the function button in the function eld of the control area in-
stead of the menu for fastest access to the function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
PatSel
Rev. 10
Patient Select
A.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Description of function
U sing the Patient Select window you can call a patient in two
different ways:
List selection You can search for the patient required in the patient list
(page A.14).
Direct selection Or you can select the patient directly. To do so, you must enter a
patient identication and an image number (page A.17).
Select from the patient list
(page A.14).
Depending on search text in Patient input eld: Opens a limited
patient list. When patient identication is unambiguous: Selects
the patient directly (page A.17).
Ends patient selection.
Direct selection: Patient
nameandimagenumber
List selection
Select
storagemedium
Query
Go
Cancel
Selecting a patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the storage device
If the correct device has not been selected already:
Device: Select the storage device containing the patient selected.
Please note: The patient selected may be located on more than one
storage medium.
Click on the corresponding switch.
is the hard disk
is an optical disk, etc.
The empty switch elds have no function.
The storage media available depend on your systems specic
conguration.
Opening the patient list
To search through the selection lists :
Open the patient list.
The complete patient list of the selected storage device is superim-
posed on the function window.
Opening a limited patient list
Patient: Enter the patient identication as the search text.
Example: M*r
Open the corresponding limited patient list.
In our example, the patient list contains all patients whose names
begin with M and end with r, for example, Major, Miller, etc.
For questions concerning patient identication refer to Working
with Numaris page B.34.
STORE
OD1
Query
Go
Rev. 10
Patient Select
A.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the patient list
The patient list contains all patients in the storage medium se-
lected.
Prints the patient list (page A.19).
Updates the patient list.
Returns to function window (page A.12).
Ends patient selection.
Current patient
Print
Update
Cancel
Exit
Scroll
bar
Selecting a patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Entries in the patient list
Patient Name Patient name
Number Patient number
Registration Date and time of registration
Series Number of series
Image Number of images
Label At least one image:
a archived on OD/MOD
c copied to network node
All images:
A archived on OD/MOD
C copied to network node
F An error has occurred during the transfer. If this
happens, you can retrieve more detailed information
via DisplayNetlog (page K.210).
Diagnosis Freely composed diagnosis entry made during
registration
Rev. 10
Patient Select
A.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Sorting the patient list
The patient list of the hard disk STORE is sorted chronologically
according to the registration date: The most recent date appears at
the top. The patient list of an optical disk is sorted alphabetically.
You can change how the patient list is sorted, i.e. alphabetically or
chronologically. For that purpose, select the SortPatients pro-
gram in the SystemRun function (page K.23).
Alternative 1: Display a patient with standard image
Standard image The program automatically displays either the rst or the center
image of the series selected. You can set the standard image as the
default parameter with the Display Screen function (page J.18).
Please note: The setting will not affect localizer images with their
different slice orientations.
Double-click the corresponding line in the patient list.
The standard image of the rst series of the patient selected is dis-
played in the active segment. Both the list and the function win-
dow will be closed, if the list is not pinned.
Alternative 2: Open the series and /or image list
To select a patient from the list and to open his/her series list :
Click the respective line in the patient list.
The series list of the patient selected replaces the patient list (page
C.12).
Click the respective line in the series list.
The image list of the series selected replaces the series list (page
D.12).
T I P
If necessary, usethescroll bar
to display all entries.
Selecting a patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the patient directly
You can select the patient directly by using the patient identica-
tion.
Patient : Enter the patient name and/or patient number.
Example: Bach, Johann
1789
Bach, Johann 1789
Alternative 1: Display standard image of the rst
series
If you do not want to display a specic image, but rather simply
want to activate the patient:
Call the patient entered.
If the patient name is ambiguous, the patient list will be displayed
(page A.14). In this case, it will contain only those patients which
meet the criteria.
If the patient entered does not exist, the patient list will appear.
Direct selection: Patient
nameandimagenumber
Go
Patient
does not exist
?
Rev. 10
Patient Select
A.18 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Alternative 2: Display a specic image
If you do not want to display the standard image of the rst series,
but rather a specic image:
Image: Enter the image number of that image.
Example: 25
Call the patient selected by you.
If you entered an unambiguous patient name, the corresponding
image is displayed in the active segment.
If there is no image corresponding to the number entered, the pa-
tient list appears.
In case the newly selected patient was merely preregistered,
which means that you have not generated any images of him/her
(chapter A.4), the message patient has no image? appears in the
footer. Subsequently, the Patient Select function is ended.
Go
Image number
does not exist
?
Patient without
images
?
T I P
Use the mouse to select the
input eld, so that the caret
appears in the eld. Conrm
each entry by pressing
RETURN.
Selecting a patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Printing a list
You can print the patient, series, or image list using the printer
connected.
Printing all entries
If you would like to print all entries from a list:
Mode: Set the mode switch to All.
Print the entire list.
Printing specic entries
If you would like to print only specic entries from a list:
Mode: Set the mode switch to Select.
The list switches to Multiple Selection.
Click the lines to be printed, one after the other.
You can also press the mouse button and drag the pointer
over the entries to be printed. To deselect an entry: click the
line to be deselected again.
Print the lines selected.
Recommendation: Set the mode switch to All again. The list
switches to Exclusive Selection.
(Ends the patient selection.)
All
Print
Select
Print
Exit
Rev. 10
Patient Select
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.2
Selecting the current patient
You select the current patient with the Patient Current function.
One of the images for this patient will be displayed in the active
segment.
If you are running automatic image display, the images of the cur-
rent patient will be displayed automatically (chapter J.5).
Current patient The current patient is the patient last registered as a result of the
functions Patient Register or Renew. Since the data of the cur-
rent patient are always saved to STORE, the hard disk is automat-
ically selected as the storage device when you call this function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
PatCur
C H E C K L I S T
7 Current patient exists
7 Images are available
Rev. 07
Patient Current
A.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Please note: Images in the beginning come fromthe measurement.
Images copied or those generated during evaluation are ap-
pended at the end of the associated series. Therefore, the last im-
ages may not be the product of a measurement.
A notice box is displayed if the current patient le does not contain any
images. Conrm it by clicking Continue.
The content of the active segment, however, will be deleted.
If no current patient exists, the action is interrupted. A notice box is dis-
played. Conrm it by clicking Continue.
Interleaved excitation of slices
For an even slice number: The last image of the current patient is
displayed as the current image.
For an uneven slice number: The next to last image is displayed.
Current patient
without images
?
No current patient
?
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.3
Registering a new patient
The Patient Register function is used to register a newpatient for
the subsequent examination. The registered patient becomes the
current patient.
All the images and/or raw data of the subsequent examination
will be combined into one study only. To create additional studies,
please refer to Patient Renew page A.55.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
Rev. 10
Patient Register
A.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Entering patient data
The Register window has the same format as the registration
form. The left half is reserved for text input, the right half lists a
number of default values for your selection. Input elds that are
underlined represent mandatory data input. The remaining elds
are reserved for DICOM data.
The input elds are initially empty.
Conrms registration
(page A.38).
Terminates registration. The patient data entered become invalid.
For safety reasons, a notice box is displayed requesting you to
conrm termination.
*)
total: max. 64 characters
Go
Cancel
*) on MAGNETOM Open
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Mandatory inputs
Patient Name: Enter the name of the patient.
Patient Number : Enter a patient number.
It can be any combination of characters.
Date of Birth (dd-mmm-yy) : Enter the patients date of birth.
Example: 25-MAR-1953
25-MAR-53
25.03.53
25.03.1953
25/03/53
S28 3 25 (Japanese)
Subsequently, the date is always displayed in the format Day-
Month-Year (25-MAR-1953).
Weight [kg] : Enter the weight of the patient.
The country-specic weight unit is set during system installation
(kg or lbs.).
If the patients date of birth and weight are not known (e.g. trauma
patient), we recommend you enter the following:
Date of birth 8/8/1888
This date will facilitate locating the patient information at a later time for
correction.
Weight: Best estimate minus 10 %
In order to avoid excessive RF exposure: Make a conservative estimate of
the patients weight, i.e. it is better to underestimate than to overesti-
mate.
TheEnglishabbreviationis usedfor
themonth(3upper or lower-case
letters)
Notice
Please enter the correct weight of the patient. The SAR
computation (SAR chapter B.13, not MAGNETOM Open) is based
primarily on the patient weight entered during patient
registration.
Patient registration
in emergencies
!
Rev. 10
Patient Register
A.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Mandatory settings
Patient Sex: Set the switch accordingly :
For quality assurance measurement
(chapter K.13)
Patient Position 1: Enter the position of the patient with respect to the magnet.
Head is closest to the magnet.
Feet are closest to the magnet.
for MAGNETOM Open:
Head, to the left of the magnet.
Feet, to the left of the magnet.
Patient Position 2: Enter the position of the patient on the tabletop.
Patient is on his/her back.
Patient is on his/her stomach.
Patient is on his/her left side.
Patient is on his/her right side.
View Direction: Select the view direction for the measurement of transverse
slices.
Toward head
Toward feet
Male
Female
Other
Head rst
Feet rst
Head left
Feet left
Supine
Prone
Left lateral
Right lateral
Cranial
Caudal
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image Sorting: Set the desired image sort.
In the order slices are acquired.
Anatomical sorting
(corresponds to the numbering of the images)
According to echo time
According to repetition time
The images will be sorted accordingly in the series generated dur-
ing the measurement.
You can change the image sort later with the Series Arrange
function (chapter C.3) or restore the original sort selected during
registration.
Chronological
Anatomical
TE
TR
Rev. 10
Patient Register
A.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
DICOM data
In order to transmit data quickly via the DICOM network, addi-
tional information is required in the registration data.
DICOM is a standardized network for the exchange of medical pa-
tient and image data. You can send images to other systems and
receive images transmitted fromother systems (File Copy chapter
F.2).
Given Name: Example: Carl
Middle Name: Example: A.
Name Prex: Example: Dr.
Name Sufx: Example: not known
Study description: Short description of the study.
Example: intensiv_in
Accession number: Example: 01
Referring Physician: Example: Dr. Ray
Admitting Diagnosis : Diagnosis upon admission.
Example: Meniscus lesion
Reading Physician: Example: Dr. Fuller
Body part examined: Example: SKULL (see next page)
Example: not known
Operator: Example: not known
Comment 1: Enter commentary 1.
Example: Meniscus ganglion
Comment 2: Enter commentary 2.
Example: Left knee
Performing Physicians
Name:
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Select body part to be examined
You can select the body part by either:
O Selecting the region in a window menu, or by
O Entering the region in the input eld
(written the same way as in the window menu).
To open the window menu:
Enter a question mark ? into the input eld.
Select the body part from the list.
The anatomy selected is transferred to the input eld.
Please note: If you have to reposition the patient afterward, the se-
lected body part has to be adjusted to the new patient position
(Patient Renew chapter A.5).
T I P
You can edit the list of
body parts
(page K.220).
Rev. 10
Patient Register
A.38 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Ending registration
Store the patient data entered.
The two patient positions, the weight of the patient, and the view
direction have to be conrmed as requested by the notice box.
Conrm the data.
(If you made an error, click No and correct the input as required.)
The new patient is now registered and the function is ended.
The newpatient is registered. This patient becomes the current pa-
tient and is entered in the patient list for the STORE device. The
patient data entered is transferred to the image text eld of the
control area.
If mandatory input is missing, a notice box will be displayed. Conrm it
by clicking Continue.
The text caret will move to the eld where the missing data has to be
added.
You will be able to change some of the entries retroactively with
the Patient Renew function (chapter A.5).
Go
*) *) Head left
for MAGNETOM Open
Yes
Missing
mandatory input
?
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dynamic image numbering
The dynamic image numbering allows you to individually set im-
age numbering in the Register window for the following mea-
surements.
Depending on the image orientation, you can determine whether
the images should be numbered in the ascending or descending
order.
You can assign the image numbering for the respective orienta-
tions for each Body part examined (page A.36).
Please contact your application specialist for the respective set-
tings. If dynamic image numbering is enabled, AAA is set by de-
fault. That is:
Sag:/Tra:/Cor: Sagittal, transverse and coronal images are numbered in Ascend-
ing order.
Rev. 10
Patient Register
A.310 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Below, you will see an example of DAD image numbering for the
HEAD region.
Sag: Sagittal images are numbered in Descending order.
Tra: Transverse images are numbered in Ascending order.
Cor: Coronal images are numbered in Descending order.
Please note: When using oblique/double oblique orientations, the
images are numbered according to the main directions (Sag, Tra,
Cor).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.4
Preregistering patients
You can preregister as many patients as needed for subsequent ex-
amination using the Patient Preregister function.
You can preregister a patient while the measurement is in progress.
A preregistered patient must be made current prior to the measurement
(Patient Renew chapter A.5).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
During the
measurement
!
Rev. 07
Patient Preregister
A.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Entering patient data
The preregistration form is the same as the one used for registra-
tion. The input elds in the Preregister window are initially
empty.
The only data you have to enter during preregistration is the pa-
tient name and number.
Patient Name: Enter the name of the patient.
Patient Number : Enter a patient number.
All other entries are optional (use the same procedure as for the
Patient Register function chapter A.3).
Opens the patient list on the STORE hard disk (page A.14).
*)
Query
*) on MAGNETOM Open
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conrming preregistration
Conrm your inputs.
A notice box appears when the patient name and number are
missing. Click Continue; the text caret will move to the input eld
which is missing mandatory data.
The preregistered patient is entered in the patient list without any
series or images.
The Preregister window remains on-screen so that you can pre-
register additional patients.
Close the function window.
Patient data not conrmed by you become invalid. For safety rea-
sons, the notice box requests that you conrm termination.
Go
Cancel
C H E C K L I S T
7 Patient name
7 Patient number
Rev. 07
Patient Preregister
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.5
Renewing a patient for the
examination
Registered patients are accepted for new examinations with the
Patient Renew function. The same function applies to preregis-
tered patients. The patient selected becomes the current patient.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
T I P
Incaseyoutransferredpatient
data via the net, there is no
need to register the patient
again. J ust verify the data.
Rev. 07
Patient Renew
A.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting a registered patient
The data of the current patient is shown in the Renewwindow. In-
put elds which do not allow user intervention are initially
dimmed. The input elds of the registration formremain empty, if
there is no current patient.
Use Query to select one of the patients from the patient list.
Opens the patient list on the STORE hard disk (page A.14).
Conrms renewal of patient data (page A.54).
Ends renewal.
*)
Query
Go
Cancel
*) on MAGNETOM Open
Renewing a patient for the examination
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the patient list
Click the respective line to select the patient from the list
(page A.14).
The list will be subsequently closed. The registration form is lled
with the data of the patient selected.
Query
Rev. 07
Patient Renew
A.54 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Renewing patient data
Data may be added or changed only as described during patient
registration (chapter A.3).The new patient data applies to future
images only. They have to be conrmed in the respective notice
box.
Preregistered patient
You can add or change data, including the patient identication,
for a preregistered patient as required.
Previously examined patient
The following data can no longer be changed for previously exam-
ined patients :
O Patient identication
O Given Name
O Middle Name
O Name Prex
O Name Sufx
O Date of birth
O Number of existing studies
O Weight of patient (for existing studies)
O Sex
Fields, not accessible to the user, are dimmed.
Renewing a patient for the examination
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Creating new studies for previously examined
patients
Enable the input elds for the study data.
Enter the new study data.
Please note: This is the only place where you change the patient
weight for the examinations to follow.
Ending the function
Conrm the patient data entered.
For safety reasons, the notice box requests that you conrm your
selection.
The patient is now the current patient.
New Study
This is howtheRenew window
changes. Thestudynumber is
automaticallyincreasedby1.
Go
Rev. 07
Patient Renew
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.6
Using patient data from the
RIS list
Prerequisite: Your MR systemis connected to a clinical information
system (either a hospital information system (HIS) or a radiology
information system (RIS)). If yes, you can transfer patient data
from the central HIS/RIS station to your local MR system.
Use the Patient Worklist to select one of the RIS-registered pa-
tients and use the data for registration.
Please note: Patient data from a RIS-registered patient cannot be
edited. The underlined input elds in the Register, Renew and
Modify window are dimmed.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
C H E C K L I S T
7 Function has not been
evokedatasatelliteconsole
(MRSC)
Rev. 10
Patient Worklist
A.62 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Potential data ow in a clinical
information system
HIS/RIS provides support for the following:
O patient data management
O registering requests
O service acquisition and statistics
O diagnosis
O written report
O billing
O archive management and
O statistical evaluation.
Diagnosis
Images
Measurement
Registration
Worklist
Archival +
additional processing
at workstations +
diagnosis +
billing, etc.
Station
Station
Using patient data from the RIS list
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview of the worklist
The RIS Patient Register window shows you both, the list of
registered RIS patients plus the examination dates scheduled.
Scheduling is a much easier part of the clinical routine, and it en-
ables the data owin a hospital to be updated on a continuous ba-
sis.
Retrieves additional RIS-specic information (page A.65).
Setting the inquiry parameters.
Starts worklist query.
Registers the RIS-registeredpatient for the MR-examination (page
A.69).
Updates the patient from Numaris database for the
MR-examination (page A.69).
Preregisters the RIS-registered patient for the MR-examination
(page A.69)
Closes the worklist as well as the details window.
Details
Setup
Query
Register
Renew
PreRegister
Cancel
Rev. 10
Patient Worklist
A.64 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Patients is already registered?
State The state column in the worklist shows you the registration status
of the patient.
O Reg Patient has been registered or preregistered for the
MR-examination.
O PatRegPatient is already entered in the Numaris database,
but needs to be updated via Renew.
O RIS Patient is RIS-registered.
Several procedure requests for one patient
With HIS/RIS, you can enter several procedure requests for one
patient.
ReqProcId This column contains the ID number for the procedure request.
Updating the worklist
Please note: Patients are deleted from the list at certain intervals.
O Registered patient: after 24 hours
O Non-registered patient: after 48 hours
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Retrieving detailed information on the selected
RIS-registered patient
Open the RIS Patient Details window.
Details
Rev. 10
Patient Worklist
A.66 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting Parameters for Inquiries
Open the DICOM Worklist SCU - Query Setup windoww.
Save the changes. The set parameters will be used during the next
inquiry at the worklist.nderungen speichern.
Close the window. The selected settings will not be used.
Close the window. The set paramters will be used during the next
inquiry at the order list.
Then start the inquiry to the worklist in the RIS Patient
Register window.
The worklist is updated. If no matching jobs are found, the results
from the previous inquiry are used.
Setup
Save
Cancel
Exit
Query
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the Time Interval for Inquiries
There are a variety of ways to set the time interval for the inquiry:
Number of days from oday going into the past (0=today,
1=yesterday, etc).
Number of days from "today going into the future
(1=tomorrow,2=day after tomorrow).
Example: In order to start an inquiry for today , enter "0" twice.
Number of minutes from now" going into the past (0=0 o'clock).
Number of minutes from now" going into the future (0=23.59.59
o'clock).
Example: In order to start an inquiry for the last two hours and the
coming two hours, enter 120 twice.
The following two settings have priority over the previous time
settings.
Absolute MinDate&Time Absolute date and absolute time for start of inquiry.
Absolute MaxDate&Time Absolute date and absolute time for end of inquiry.
Example: Place an inquiry for various patients from January 12,
2000 to January 15, 2000 - Entry for Start of inquiry
20000112 and entry for end of inquiry 20000115 .
Today minus x days
(0=today)
Today plus x days
(1=tomorrow)
Now minus x minutes
(0=000000.0000)
Now plus x minutes
(0=235959.9999)
Rev. 10
Patient Worklist
A.68 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Resorting the worklist
The worklist is sorted according to the registration date. The new-
est, RIS-registered patients and/or patients with the most current
examination date are listed on top.
Type of sorting? You can change the sort as follows:
Sorts the list alphabetically
Sorts the list according to the registration date.
Other settings
Query worklist from local system.
Query worklist from all systems in the clinical
information system.
Modality Set modality. MR is the default setting.
Example: EA trauma patient requires a CT examination on your
MR system. In this case you would enter CT.
Query during startup? Automatically query worklist when Numaris is
restarted.
Do not automatically update worklist. The results from
the previous inquiry are displayed during a functional
query. You can manually start the desired query. The
functional performance may be accelerated.
Date
Alpha
Search only own Worklist
Entries?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Transferring patient data for
MR-examination
Registering a patient
Select the desired patient in the worklist.
Accept the patient data for registration.
Short-cut: double-click on the patient selected.
The worklist closes and the Register window opens up.
If the Register window was already open, the patient will be stored in
the Numaris database only.
The Register window will not be updated in this case.
Renewing a patient
Select a patient from the worklist who is already entered to
the Numaris database (status Reg or PatReg).
Renew the patient data.
This patient becomes the current patient.
Select the desired patient(s) in the worklist (multiple
selection is possible).
Accept the patient data for preregistration.
The worklist is closed and the patient data is stored to the Nu-
maris database.
Register
Different patient data
in the Register
window
?
Renew
PreRegister
Rev. 10
Patient Worklist
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.7
Modifying patient data
Use the Patient Modify function to modify various patient data of
a patient (exception: weight of patient page A.55). You can
change the data for either all or only part of the images. The data
for future images are changed with Patient Renew (chapter A.5).
The image sort is changed with the Series Arrange function
(chapter C.3).
The data of the current patient cannot be changed while the mea-
surement is in progress.
The modied data are shown in the image text (in the image text
eld or in the active image), when an image for a modied pa-
tient is displayed in the active segment.
Please note: The function does not apply to preregistered patients
without images. Data for preregistered patients may be modied
only using the Patient Renew function (chapter A.5).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
C H E C K L I S T
7 Patient has been stored to
the hard disk STORE
7 Function was not called at
the satellite console
(MRSC)
Rev. 07
Patient Modify
A.72 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Modify window contains the patient data of the active image.
If the active segment is blank, the input elds of the Modify win-
dow are also blank.
Original : The original data of the patient is always displayed in the center
column. This data cannot be modied, ensuring that the original
data will be retained.
Modied: The data in the right column can be changed. If the data have been
modied more than once, the most recent modication is dis-
played.
Opens patient list (page A.73)
Opens the series list for the patient selected (page A.73).
Conrms modications (page A.74).
*) for MAGNETOM Open:
*)
Patients
Images
Go
Head left
Feet left
Modifying patient data
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the patient and
image range
A patient and the corresponding images must rst be selected in
order to modify patient data.
Selecting from the lists
You select the patient in the usual manner (page A.14). The list is
closed. The center and the right columns are lled with the origi-
nal patient data.
Limiting the image range
If you want to limit your changes to a select number of images
only:
You EITHER:
Open the series list.
Select the desired series (multiple selection is possible).
Use Go or double-click to accept the selected series and images.
OR you:
Click on one of the series in the list.
Open the image list.
Select the desired image(s) (multiple selection is possible).
Use Go or double-click to accept the selected images.
Patients
Images
Images
Query
T I P
Gotothelists rst, if youwant
to change a large number of
images.
Subsequently,
enter theimagenumbers that
are still missing.
Rev. 07
Patient Modify
A.74 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Performing modications
Valid for : Specify the application range for the modications.
Changing a select number of images only
Select the switch.
The following data may differ frommeasurement to measurement
for each patient:
O Patient Position 1
O Patient Position 2
O Comment 1
O Comment 2
If you do not want to change patient position 1 or 2:
Select the switch.
Changing all existing images
Select the switch.
The following data have to be same per patient:
O Patient identication
O Given Name
O Middle Name
O Name Prex
O Name Sufx
O Date of birth
O Weight (to change the weight, refer to page A.55),
O Sex
Conrming modications
Conrm the modications entered.
Please note: The modication procedure takes a certain amount of
time (refer to the footer of the Modify window).
Selected
Original
All
Go
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
A.8
Paging through patient lists
The Patient + and Patient functions allow you to page up or
down through patient lists on the selected storage device. That is,
you call patients step-by-step beginning with the active view pa-
tient.
You can page through the list in a continuous loop. When you
reach the last patient in the series and continue to page up, the rst
patient in the series will be displayed. The opposite holds true
when you are paging down through the list.
Select the storage device with Patient Select (chapter A.1).
STORE is the default parameter.
In this case, the current patient is called up instead of paging
(Current Patient chapter A.2).
Patient
1
Patient
2
Patient
3
Patient
4
Patient
5
Patient
Patient +
Active segment
without patient
?
C H E C K L I S T
7 Active view patient
exists
Rev. 07
Patient /+
A.82 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the previous patient
The patient immediately preceding the active viewpatient is called
with the Patient function.
The standard image (page J.18) belonging to the rst series of the
selected patient is displayed in the active segment.
You page in a continuous loop: If the rst patient in the patient list
is displayed, the last patient will be called again when you select
Patient .
For rapid paging, particularly when you are paging through the
list a second time, use the function button in the control area. Each
time you use this button, the program pages down one patient.
In this case, you cannot page any further. A notice box appears. Conrm
the notice box with Continue.
If the patient selected has been preregistered, and therefore has no images
(chapter A.4), a notice box will appear.
Conrm the notice box with Continue.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
Pat
List contains one
patient only
?
Patient
without images
?
Paging through patient lists
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the next patient
The Patient + function calls the patient immediately following the
active view patient.
The standard image (page J.18) belonging to the rst series of the
patient selected is displayed in the active segment.
You page in a continuous loop: If the last patient in the patient list
is displayed, the rst patient will be selected again with Patient+.
For rapid paging, particularly when you are paging through the
list a second time, use the function button in the control area. Each
time you use this button, the program pages up one patient.
In this case, you cannot page any further. A notice box will appear. Con-
rm the notice box with Continue.
If the selected patient has been preregistered and, therefore has no images
(chapter A.4), a notice box will be displayed.
Conrm the notice box with Continue.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Current
Register . . .
Preregister . . .
Renew. . .
Worklist . . .
Modify. . .
Patient
Patient +
Pat +
List contains one
patient only
?
Patient
without images
?
Rev. 07
Patient /+
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B Measurement
Measurement
B2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summaryof measurement functions
You use the measurement functions to determine measurement
parameters and to start the measurement.
The Measurement menu offers three different types of measure-
ment functions :
O Measurement selection
(Protocols, Position, Change, History, Queue)
O Measurement procedure
(Measure, Load, Show Loaded, Start, Stop)
O Measurement supervision
(Monitoring, Set, SAR, Adjust, Shim)
Measurement
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Coil is connected
7 Patient is positioned and
registered.
NUMARIS REFERENCE B3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Measurement selection
Protocols
Selecting and managing the measurement protocol ...................B.1
Position
Positioning slices...............................................................................B.2
Change
Modifying measurement parameters ............................................B.3
History
Reactivating measurement protocols.............................................B.4
Queue
Processing measurement jobs .........................................................B.5
Measurement procedure
Measure
Performing the measurement .........................................................B.6
Load
Loading the current measurement protocol .................................B.7
Show Loaded
Displaying the measurement protocol ..........................................B.8
Start
Starting the measurement ...............................................................B.9
Stop
Terminating the measurement......................................................B.10
Rev. 07
Measurement
B4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Measurement supervision
Monitoring
Setting the physiological signal ....................................................B.11
Set
Presetting parameters for the measurement functions ............ B.12
SAR
SAR check ....................................................................................... B.13
Adjust
Adjustment ..................................................................................... B.14
Shim
Interactive shim.............................................................................. B.15
Physiological stimulation monitor
Monitoring physiological stimulation........................................ B.16
Please note: You do not call up this function via the menu, but
rather via SystemRun (chapter K.2).
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
*)
*)
*) Not MAGNETOM Open
NUMARIS REFERENCE B.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.1
Selecting and managing the
measurement protocol
Each measurement has its own measurement protocol. You either
select established measurement protocols or create your own with
the Measurement Protocols function.
Measurement protocol A measurement protocol comprises the entire set of parameters
required for the measurement. Numaris contains a wealth of clin-
ically optimized protocols, described in the Applications Guide.
Measurement group A measurement group is a combination of protocols available for
e. g. examining a specic part of the body.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
ProSel
Rev. 07
Measurement Protocols
B.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Group and protocol list
Terminates the function.
Ends the function. The parameters set are retained for subsequent
function selection.
Positions slices (chapter B.2).
Modies measurement parameters (chapter B.3).
Reactivates measurement protocols (chapter B.4).
Starts the measurement (chapter B.6).
Terminates the measurement (chapter B.10).
Customer
Protocols
Siemens
Protocols
Switch Siemens protocols on/off
TheSelect Protocol
windowdisplays athree-
level selectionlist:
Coils (C)
Groups (G)
Protocols (P or P*)
(pageB.18)
Optional protocols (O) are
includedinapplication
packages that arenot
installedonyour system.
For this reason, youcannot
select theseprotocols.
Cancel
Exit
Position
Change
History
Measure
Stop
Selecting and managing the measurement protocol
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting a protocol
Select the measurement group desired from the list of
groups.
Click the corresponding line.
Select the protocol desired from the protocol list.
(Double-click to switch immediately to the Protocol Change win-
dow).
Protocol to be selected: Or: Enter the name of the protocol in the input eld.
(Complete the input with RETURN.)
EITHER: change measurement parameters (chapter B.3).
OR: start the measurement (chapter B.6).
.. List up When you click .. List up, the program branches in the window
stepping upward from PROTOCOL to GROUP to COIL.
Copying protocols
Please note: You cannot copy protocols from the right to the left
column.
Select an entry in the list.
Start the copy job for the protocol desired.
The protocol is appended at the end of the right column. The order
of entries can be changed with the function buttons Move up or
Move down (page B.15).
Deleting groups
You can only delete your own groups.
Select the group you wish to delete.
Delete the group.
You will be requested to conrm the deletion of all protocols and
the associated group in a notice box.
Change
Measure
Copy
DelGroup
Rev. 07
B.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing protocols you have
created
Open the Save Protocol window.
Switches down one level.
Switches up one level.
Ends the protocol storing and passes control to the Select Proto-
col window.
Save
Thelevel of theSelect
Protocol windowis
retained. Onlythe
columnCustomer
Protocols canbe
accessed.
List down
List up
Quit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storing protocols
Please note: It is not possible to overwrite a Siemens protocol.
Save Protocol Name : Enter the new name of the protocol.
A notice box will be displayed if the program detects a protocol
with the same name. You can nowdecide whether or not you want
to overwrite the original le.
Coil/Group/Protocol Level : The current level is displayed. You can store protocols in one of
the protocol lists and in one of the lists of groups.
Start the store procedure (you can also use RETURN).
Please note: You may not have more than 100 entries in a level.
Modifying the sort mode
Please note: The sort order of Siemens protocols cannot be modi-
ed.
Select one of the entries in the list.
Move the selected entry up or down by one position.
Repeat this step, until the entry is arranged as required.
Deleting protocols/groups
Please note: You can delete protocols or groups from STORE.
However, it is not possible to delete coils. It is not possible to delete
a Siemens protocol.
Select one of the entries in the list or enter the name.
Delete the entry selected by you.
Conrm the delete request in the notice box with Yes.
Go
Move up Move down
Delete
Rev. 07
B.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Creating new groups
New groups can be created only in the Customer Protocol col-
umn.
Open the Create New Group window.
Group Name: Enter the new group name.
Blanks and some special characters (e.g. / * < >) are not permitted.
Conrm your input.
The new group is appended at the end of the list. The order of en-
tries can be changed with the function buttons Move up or Move
down (page B.15).
Ends the function.
New Group
Go
Quit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Creating comments
You can label newgroups or protocols with a comment which will
also appear in the list.
Open the Create New Comment window.
Comment Name: Enter the desired text.
Blanks and some special characters (e.g. / * < >) are not permitted.
Comment name Enter the desired text. Conrm your input.
The newcomment is appended at the end of the list. You can move
the comment to the desired group or protocol with the function
buttons Move up or Move down (page B.15).
Ends the function.
Deleting comments
Select a comment in the list.
Delete the comment selected.
New Comm.
Go
Quit
Delete
Rev. 07
B.18 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Installing new pulse sequences
P* The measurement parameters in your own protocols may change
with a new software update (identied by an asterisk *), i. e.
new or changed pulse sequences have been installed on your sys-
tem.
Select one of the changed protocols from the list.
Leave the changed protocol as is. The asterisk * remains. The
notice box appears each time you select the protocol.
Storing the changed protocol
Accept the changes.
The protocol is stored as a normal customer protocol. The aster-
isk * is deleted.
Restoring your original parameters
Open the Protocol Change window (page B.32).
By changing various parameters (e. g. matrix size, number of
slices) in the Protocol Change window, you may be able to set
and store your original parameters.
The notice box remains open. The function buttons change.
Closes the notice box.
Anoticeboxwill bedisplayed
whenyouselect oneof the
changedcustomer protocols. The
noticeboxincludes boththe
original parameters andthe
changes to them.
Cancel
Conrm & Save
Change
Close
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.2
Positioning slices
The Measurement Position function allows you to use the mouse
to position the slices to be measured in the rst or second
localizer:
In addition to the menu, the function may be called:
O in the Select Protocol window (page B.12)
O in the Protocol Change window (page B.32) and
O in the Measurement History window (page B.42).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Survey image of current
patient is displayed in the
active segment.
7 Patient table was not
moved after survey
measurement.
7 Thescreendisplaymust be
set to either 4-segment or
full screen display.
Rev. 07
Measurement Position
B.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The 2-D slice function window is displayed below. The 3-D slab
windowis displayedwhenthe corresponding protocol is selected.
Terminates the function. The parameters selected are not trans-
ferred. All slices are deleted.
Ends the function. The parameters selected are transferred. All
slices are retained.
If yes, all operating elements in the Position window are dimmed
(exception Cancel).
However, you can still position slices (e.g. for contrast series) by select-
ing the Contrast Agent checkbox in the Protocol Change window
(page B.324).
Cancel
Exit
Patient table moved
after survey
measurement?
?
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Settings
O Aligning slices (page B.25),
O Setting slice groups (page B.28),
O Additional parameters (page B.210),
O Setting presaturation slabs (page B.211),
O Processing slice objects (page B.212),
The following setting is identical to that one found under
Measurement Change:
O Conguring coils (not MAGNETOM Open)
(page B.331).
Functions
The function buttons are dimmed (except for Stop) if there is an
invalid slice, slab, or presaturation slab denition.
Changes the measurement parameters
(chapter B.3).
Reactivates the measurement protocols
(chapter B.4).
RF tuning
(chapter B.14).
Performs the measurement
(chapter B.6).
Loads the measurement parameters
(chapter B.7).
Starts the measurement with the parameters set
(chapter B.9).
Terminates the measurement in progress
(chapter B.10).
Change
History
Adjust
Measure
Load
Start
Stop
Rev. 07
B.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
General information
General information regarding the current measurement protocol
or pulse sequence is shown in the info-eld of the Position win-
dow (for a detailed description page B.34).
Selects and manages the measurement protocol (chapter B.1).
Automatic slice positioning
The applied measurement protocols contain 2-D slices, 3-D slabs
and (usually) the presaturation slabs. Default parameters are set
for their orientation and size.
After the function is called, all visible slices of a measurement pro-
tocol are displayed with their default orientations and sizes in the
localizer.
Visible slices Slices are shown, if:
O they intersect with the localizer
O the angle between slice and localizer is less than 45 degrees.
Refer to Working with Numaris chapter C.3 for a detailed descrip-
tion of the type of graphic displays offered.
Info eld
Protocol
Localizer
<45
>45
'Visibleslices:
' Shownas cut line
^ Shownas cut line
Shownas projection
Shownas projection
I+I Invisibleslices
1 2
3
5
<45
4
>45 6
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Aligning slices
The position of the slices with respect to depth is changed in the
eld shown below. In addition, you can set the repetition time and
the slice thickness.
Changes the repetition time (page B.36). The value applies to all
slices.
Style: Displays all slices/slabs as boxes.
Displays all slices/slabs as lines.
Changes the slice thickness (page B.37). The value applies to all
slices.
The 3-D window provides additional control elements. The pa-
rameters set apply to all displayed slabs.
Changes the number of partitions (page B.38).
Changes the slab thickness (page B.37).
Changes the effective slice thickness (page B.37).
Field for setting parameters
(2-D protocol selected)
Theseparameters aresummarized
inthePosition window.
TR
Box
Line
Display as boxes Display as lines
Slice group with
four members
Thickness
No. Partitions
Slab Thick.
Eff. Thick.
Rev. 07
B.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Shifting the midpoint of the slice
When you call this function, the program checks the alignment of
all slices. Only when the midpoint of all slice groups is located in
the plane of the localizer, is the To Local switch enabled. When
the midpoint of all slice groups lies in the plane of the magnet iso-
center, the To ISO C switch is enabled. If the localizer does not
have a slice shift, and the slice groups do not have a slice offcenter,
both switches are enabled.
Lets assume the following situation when the function is called:
Both switches are disabled, because the midpoint of all slice
groups is located outside the plane of the localizer and the magnet
isocenter.
You align the midpoint of all slice groups to the midpoint of the
localizer.
P
r
e
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n

s
l
a
b
Localizer
1
2 3 4
5 Plane of magnet isocenter
6
7
To Local
1 2 3 4
P
r
e
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n

s
l
a
b
Plane of magnet isocenter
Localizer
5
6
7
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You align the midpoint of all slice groups to the magnet isocenter.
You align all slice groups perpendicular to the localizer. The pre-
saturation slab remains unchanged.
Slices, which are located in parallel to the plane of the localizer, are
ignored.
To ISO-C
P
r
e
s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n

s
l
a
b
Plane of magnet isocenter
Localizer
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
perpendic.
1
2 3 4
6
7
8
1
2 3 4
8
5 6 7
Center of rotation Plane of magnet isocenter
5
Localizer
Rev. 07
B.28 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting slice groups
Slice/slab group A slice or slab group combines several 2-D slices/slabs into one
object.
Slice groups are identied by common parameters. Several of
them are shown in the slice group eld of the Position window.
Slice Groups : Number of slice groups (visible and invisible).
Selected Group: Group number of the selected slice group, otherwise none is
displayed.
Slices in Group: Number of slices in a group. The display depends on the
parameters set in the work eld (page B.212).
Create Group Number of slices to be created with the next
group.
Modify When one of the slice groups has been selected,
the number of slices in this group is shown. If
none of the groups has been selected, the display
remains blank, and the input eld will not accept
data.
Create Sat Display is blank and input eld will not accept data.
Dist. Factor : Changes the distance factor (page B.29).
Orientation: Shows the orientation of the selected slice group. The angle
of rotation is shown for oblique or double-oblique slices.
The display remains blank, in case you enabled Create Sat or Modify without
selecting a group.
Slice group eld
Inthe3-DwindowthetermSlice is
simplyreplacedbySlab.
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the number of group members
Set to modify.
Select a group.
Slices in Group: Enter a new value.
The maximum number of permissible slices/slabs is shown in the
footer of the Position window.
Conrm your input with RETURN.
The slices/slabs are evenly appended to or removed from either
side of the group. The criteria for selecting the side to which the
rst slice/slab will be appended or removed is based on:
O the orientation of the group selected and
O the original number of slices/slabs in the group to be changed.
Please note: The position of the axis of rotation changes when the
number of slices/slabs is changed.
Changing the slice or slab distance
The distance factor is the ratio of slice gap to slice thickness.
Select a group.
Dist. Factor : Enter a new value.
The acceptable value range is displayed in the footer of the Posi-
tion window.
The group is adjusted to the new value.
When the number of slices in a group equals 1, the display
changes to undened and the input eld will not accept data.
Horizontal slices Vertical slices
even#of slices uneven#of slices even#of slices uneven#of slices
Addition bottom top left right
Subtraction top bottom right left
Modify
Rev. 07
B.210 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Additional parameters
Using a second localizer
In the rst localizer, you will not see the FOV and the depth of the
slice/slab group. You can use a second localizer to display this.
Display a second localizer in the second segment.
Second Localizer: O Select the checkbox in the Position window.
All manipulations performed will be shown in both localizers.
Please note: As soon as you deselect the checkbox, the slices in the
second localizer are deleted. In case the second localizer was the
active segment, the rst segment automatically becomes the ac-
tive segment.
In addition, you will be provided with data regarding the posi-
tioned slices and presaturation slabs.
No. Slices: The rst value species the number of slices which have
already been positioned. The second value indicates the
maximum number of slices (which is dependent on TR).
Invisible Slices : Displays the number of invisible slices in the active segment
(page B.24).
Invisible Sats : Displays the number of invisible presaturation slabs in the
active segment.
Inyour 3-Dwindow, theterm
Slice is replacedbySlab.
C H E C K L I S T
7 Image of current patient is
shown in the second
segment.
7 Position of patient and
tabletop has not been
changed.
7 Second localizer has not
been manipulated (except
for Magnify)
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting presaturation slabs
The parameters regarding presaturation slabs are included in the
presaturation eld of the Position window.
Selected Sat. : Displays the number of the selected presaturation slab. If a
presaturation slice is not selected, none is displayed.
Sat. Thick. : Displays the thickness of the selected presaturation slab.
Parallel Sats : Creates parallel presaturation slabs (page B.214).
Tracking Sats : Creates a tracking presaturation slab. The labels of the
switches change depending on the patient
orientation (page B.214).
The parameters Parallel Sats and Tracking Sats cancel each other out.
Viewpresaturation slabs, if present (in the Saturation Region Pa-
rameters window).
The positioned presaturation slabs are shown. They do not allow
for user intervention.
Presaturation eld
Sats
Rev. 07
B.212 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing slice objects
You can generate, process, and delete slice objects in the rst and
second localizer. The required steps are shown in the work eld of
the Position window.
Creating slice/slab groups
Mode: Generate new slices/slabs.
All slices are deselected.
Click the mouse on a position in the localizer.
If you clicked the Second Localizer checkbox, an object is also
drawn in the second segment. As a prerequisite, there must be a
valid image in the second segment (page B.210) and the object is
visible (page B.24).
Selected Group: Displays the new group number.
All displays in the Position window are updated.
Shift and Offcenter depend on the position of the mouse when it is
clicked. The switch Create Group remains enabled as long as
additional groups can be created; otherwise, its name/function
toggles to Modify.
To create an additional group, simply click outside of the current
selected object.
Work eld
Create Group
Thegroupis drawnat that position. The
midpoint of thegroupis positionedat the
locationwherethemousewas clicked, andis
markedbyanaxis of rotation.
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Creating separate presaturation slabs
Presaturation slabs are used to suppress respiratory and owarti-
facts. The position of the presaturation slab depends on the region
of the body to be imaged. For example, presaturation slabs are not
required during knee examinations because the examinations are
not affected by ow artifacts.
Presaturation slabs can only be created if slices and/or slabs
already exist.
All presaturation slabs which are not parallel or tracking are
called separate.
Mode: Generate the new presaturation slabs.
All slice objects are deselected.
Click a position in the localizer.
Selected Sat :Displays the new number of the presaturation slab.
All displays in the Position window are updated.
The switch Create Sat remains enabled as long as additional pre-
saturation slabs can be created; otherwise, its name/function tog-
gles to Modify.
To create additional presaturation slabs, simply click outside of
the current selected object.
Create Sat
Apresaturationslabis drawnat this position.
Themidpointof thepresaturationslabis located
at thepositionwherethemousewas clicked
andis markedat theaxis of rotation.
Rev. 07
B.214 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating parallel presaturation slabs
Parallel presaturation slabs can be generated only when the mea-
surement protocol allows for more than one presaturation slab.
The parallel presaturation slabs are connected to the exterior edge
of the slices/slabs.
All slices/slabs must be parallel.
Parallel Sats: Select the Parallel Sats checkbox.
Parallel presaturation slabs are drawn into the localizer.
Please note : If you change the thickness of the parallel presatura-
tion slabs and/or the distance between the slice group and presat-
uration slab, the presaturation slabs will no longer be parallel. The
check box is automatically deselected and the parallel presatura-
tion slabs will be treated as regular presaturation slabs.
Generating tracking presaturation slabs
Tracking Sats: A tracking presaturation slab is connected to a slice/slab group
and follows the slice/slab currently being measured. The mea-
surement protocol may only contain one slice/slab group.
Select the desired direction.
O Sagittal slices :
Presaturation slab travels to the left of the slice group.
Presaturation slab travels to the right of the slice group.
O Coronal slices :
Presaturation slab travels in front of the slice group.
Presaturation slab travels in back of the slice group.
O Transverse slices :
Presaturation slab travels in the direction of the patients
feet.
Presaturation slab travels in the direction of the patients
head.
No tracking presaturation slabs.
Left
Right
Ant.
Post.
Feet
Head
Off
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Rotating slice/slab groups
You can process all visible slice objects (slices, 3-D slabs, presatu-
ration slabs) with the mouse. A single slice/slab may not be pro-
cessed, only the group to which it belongs.
Mode: Set the Mode switch to Modify.
Select a borderline of the graphic.
The slice group eld shows the appropriate data.
Position the mouse pointer on the sensitive area.
Drag the mouse in the direction desired.
The selected target is rotated in the newdirection. Its relative posi-
tion does not change.
Modify
Theselectedobject is highlightedwithgrab
handles andanaxis of rotation.
Inthegure, thesensitiveareais highlightedin
gray.
Rev. 07
B.216 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Positioningseveral slicegroups withdifferent angles
To ensure accurate image sorting, the following is required when
positioning several slice groups with different angles:
Example: Transverse spine examination,
positioning the slice groups in a sagittal localizer
1. Set the Anatomical sorting mode during patient
registration.
The Chronological sorting mode would display the images in the
order they were positioned and measured.
2. Verify that the midpoint of the slice groups do not overlap.
3. Do not rotate the slices by more than 45 degrees.
If you do, you are changing the reference plane of the slice posi-
tion (e.g. fromthe transverse to the coronal plane when selecting a
large angle in the area of the sacrum). The anatomical sort will sort
these images between the transverse images according to the nu-
merical values of their slice positions. You can check the numerical
values in the Slice Parameters for Free Values window (page
B.314).
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Shifting slice/slab groups
Position the mouse pointer on the axis of rotation.
Drag the mouse in the desired direction.
The selected target is moved to the new position. Its orientation
does not change.
Please note : The axis of rotation may not be moved outside the
localizer with the mouse. However, following automatic slice
positioning, the axis of rotation may be located outside the local-
izer. In this case, the target may not be rotated; it may only be
shifted back into the localizer.
Modify
Grab handles and
axis of rotation
Rev. 07
B.218 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing presaturation slabs
Separate presaturation slabs may be processed independent of
other targets. A separate presaturation slab cannot be changed
into a parallel or tracking presaturation slab. Parallel presatura-
tion slabs become separate presaturation slabs when processed.
Tracking presaturation slabs cannot be processed.
The presaturation eld shows the appropriate information.
The presaturation slab can now be rotated and shifted like a slice
group.
Modify
Theselectedobject is highlightedwithgrab
handles andanaxis of rotation. Theaxis of
rotationis locatedat thepositionwherethe
mousewas clicked.
Positioning slices
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting slice objects
Open the Delete window.
Select the object to be deleted.
Deletes the selected object.
Deletes all invisible slices.
Deletes all invisible presaturation slabs.
Deletes all objects. A notice box is displayed for you to conrm
your action. Conrm the delete procedure with Yes.
Abbreviated procedure for deleting all objects (in the work eld).
Delete...
Thewindowfor 2-D
sequences is displayed.
Selected
Invisible Slices
Invisible Sats
All
Delete All
Rev. 07
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.3
Modifying measurement
parameters
Use the Measurement Change function if you want to modify
parameters of the active measurement protocol. You can also se-
lect a different pulse sequence and adjust the parameters to your
requirements.
The function may also be used for reviewing the parameters with-
out changing them.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
ProCha
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Protocol Change window provides additional windows for
setting measurement parameters acceptable for the pulse se-
quence selected.
Parameters which do not allowfor user intervention are identied
by their dimmed function buttons or the missing line underneath
the numerical value.
Ends the function. The parameters set are retained.
The notice Parameters initialized by sequence appears in the footer.
A new sequence is selected that changes the current protocol (page
B.35).
Exit
Protocol parameters
changed
?
Modifying measurement parameters
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Settings
O General information (page B.34),
O Setting the pulse parameters (page B.36),
O Setting the slice parameters (page B.37),
O Setting the data acquisition (page B.318),
O Setting reconstruction and other parameters (page B.324),
O Conguring coils (not MAGNETOM Open) (page B.331)
O Setting the automatic adjustment (page B.336)
Functions
Positioning slices
(chapter B.2).
Reactivating measurement protocols
(chapter B.4).
Adjustment
(chapter B.14).
Performing the measurement
(chapter B.6).
Loading the current measurement protocol
(chapter B.7).
Starting the measurement
(chapter B.9).
Terminating the measurement
(chapter B.10).
Managing protocols you have created
(page B.14).
Position
History
Adjust
Measure
Load
Start
Stop
Save
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
General information
The info eld of the Protocol Change windowprovides you with
general data regarding the active measurement protocol or pulse
sequence. If you have not selected a new measurement protocol,
the protocol used for the previous measurement is displayed.
Pixel Size: The pixel size is given in mm
2
. The pixel size depends on the FOV
and the matrix size.
Scan Time: The measurement time calculated on the parameters entered by
you is shown.
Rel. S/N: The relative signaltonoise ratio for the current measurement
protocol is provided.
Each time you select a new protocol or sequence, the relative sig-
naltonoise reference value is set to 1. This value is adjusted
when you change one of the measurement parameters.
Examples (2-D sequence selected):
O You increase the slice thickness from 4 to 6 mm. The relative
signaltonoise ratio is increased by 50 %, changing the value
from 1 to 1.5.
O You reduce the FOV from 400 to 200 mm. The relative
signaltonoise ratio is decreased by 75 %, changing the value
from 1 to 0.25.
The value is set to 1 again when the protocol is stored.
Selecting a new measurement protocol
Selects and manages the measurement protocol (chapter B.1). This
ends the Measurement Change function.
The name of the active measurement protocol is displayed next to
the function button.
Info eld
Protocol Name
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting a different pulse sequence
When your measurement requirements have changed:
Open the Select Sequence window.
Sequence File Name : Enter the name of the desired sequence le or select an entry
in the list.
Conrm your selection (you can also use RETURN).
The parameters of the newsequence are entered into the Protocol
Change window. The value for the relative signaltonoise ratio
is set to 1.
Sequence File
Apply
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the pulse parameters
The pulse parameters dene the timing of the pulse sequences
and therefore the image contrast. They are listed in the pulse eld of
the Protocol Change window.
Changing the repetition time
The repetition time can be changed for almost every sequence (ex-
ception e. g. TurboFLASH).
Most sequences have xed echo times (no user intervention).
They are displayed next to the TE button. In case of more than one
echo time, the rst two echo times are shown next to the TEbutton
as e. g. 30/80 ms.
You can change the ip angle only in sequences which accept vari-
able values.
Changing inversion and delay time
Prerequisite: TurboFLASH, TIRM or IR sequence has been selected.
No delay time can be set for MAGNETOM Open.
When the measurement protocol does not include delay times, the
TI/TD button will change to TI. You enter the new inversion time
in the input eld next to the TI button.
When the measurement protocol does not include inversion
times, the TI/TD button will change to TD. You enter the delay
time in the input eld next to the TD button.
When the measurement protocol includes both times, enter the
new values via the TI/TDwindow.
Pulse eld
Youcanenter thenewvaluedirectlyin
theinputeldnexttothebuttonor you
canusetheappropriatewindow.
TR
TE
Flip Angle
TI
TD
TI/TD
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the slice parameters
The slice parameters dene the geometry and orientation of the
slices to be measured. They are listed in the slice eld of the Proto-
col Change window.
The number of slices or slabs is changed the same way. Just re-
place the term slice with slab.
Please note: The maximum number of slices depends on the repe-
tition time TR. Each pulse sequence has a minimum TR.
The steps for changing the slice or slab thickness are the same.
Shifts groups of slices referenced to the magnet isocenter.
Changing the effective slice thickness
Prerequisite: 3-D sequence has been selected.
The effective slice thickness is the slab thickness divided by the
number of partitions.
Please note: The 3-D parameters slab thickness, the effective slice
thickness, and the number of partitions inuence one another. If
you change a 3-D parameter, at least one other parameter will be
adjusted automatically.
Slice eld (2-D protocol) Slice eld (3-D protocol)
No. Slabs No. Slices
2-D 3-D
Slab Thick. Thickness
2-D 3-D
Shift-mean
Eff. Thick
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.38 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the number of partitions
Prerequisite: 3-D sequence has been selected.
Open the 3D Partitions window.
Number of Partitions : Enter the new number of partitions or use the slide control.
Oversampling in the slab selection direction
You can select three different types of oversampling for a 3-D
sequence :
O Oversampling in the slab selection direction
O Oversampling in the read-out direction (page B.319), and
O Oversampling in the phase encoding direction (page B.319).
The program will measure more partitions than actually used for
image reconstruction. While this function avoids aliasing artifacts,
it does increase the measurement time.
Oversampling: Enter the oversampling rate (in %) or use the slide control.
Scan time: Displays the precalculated measurement time.
Conrm your input.
The new value will be displayed in the slice eld next to the No.
Partitions button. Oversampling is shown as o.
No. Partitions
Range of values
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the slice orientation
Open the Slice Orientation window.
Orient. : Select the type of slice orientation.
Sagittal slices.
Coronal slices.
Transverse slices.
Oblique or double-oblique slices
(refer to the following two pages).
Conrm your input.
Orientation
Range of values
Hereyouselect theslice
orientationandoneor two tilt
angles for obliqueslices.
Sag
Cor
Tra
Obl
Apply
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.310 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating oblique slices
Example: Tilt from coronal to sagittal
Nomenclature in the function window: C to S, 60 deg
Nomenclature in the image text: Cor>Sag 60
If you set the Oblique orientation and the orientation is permitted
in the current sequence, you can enter the tilt angle or set it with
the slide controls.
Tilt 1 From: Select the base plane of the slices.
Example: coronal
To: Select the orientation of the plane of rotation.
Example: sagittal
Angle 1: Enter the rst tilt angle.
Example: 60 degrees
Tilt angle between 89 and +89 degrees.
The result will be a single oblique slice.
60 Sagittal (+)
z
Coronal
x
y
Obl
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating double-oblique slices
Example: Second tilt from sagittal to transverse
Nomenclature in the function window: C to S, 60 deg
to T, 45 deg
Nomenclature in the image text: Cor>Sag 60
>Tra 45
Angle 2: Enter the second tilt angle.
Tilt angle between 89 and +89 degrees.
The result will be a double-oblique slice. The direction of rotation
will be in the orientation not used until now (transverse in our ex-
ample).
y
x
45 Transverse
z
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.312 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Modifying the excitation order
The excitation order of slices or 3-D slabs can be modied as
required:
Open the Excit. Order window.
Slice Series: Set the type of slice series :
(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7).
(7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1).
(1, 3, 5, 7, 2, 4, 6).
Freely-selectable excitation order
(refer to the following page)
Series
Theslices arelistedaccordingto
their order of excitation.
Ascending
Descending
Interleaved
Free
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting FREE:
Select one of the entries in the list.
The program switches automatically to Free.
Slice #: Enter a new slice number.
Repeat the above until the order of slices corresponds to your re-
quirements.
Conrm your choice.
Please note: Chronologically sorted slices will be stored in ascend-
ing order independent of the type of slice series set.
Changing the slice or slab distance
The distance between two slices or slabs is dened as the ratio
slice gap to slice thickness and entered in percent (%).
Example: Slice thickness 3 mm
Distance factor 0.1
The slice gap is then 0.3 mm.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Descending
Ascending
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Interleaved
Apply
Dist. Factor
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.314 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Free-value slice parameters
The free-value slice parameters are listed in the slice/presatura-
tion slab eld in the Protocol Change window.
Free slice positioning
Open the Slice Parameters for Free Values window.
Select the desired slice in the slice list.
Select the parameters you want to change.
Slice/presaturation slab eld
Free Slice
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changes the slice thickness (page B.37).
Please note: In case of tracking presaturation slabs, you may only
modify the slice thickness. All other modification options will
split the slice group into several individual groups.
Changes the orientation (page B.39).
Changes the slice shift.
Deletes the slice selected.
Conrm the positioning.
Changing slice eccentricity (off-center)
Open the Image Offcenter window.
Read Out Direction: Enter the shift in the read-out direction in mm.
Phase Direction: Enter the shift in the phase-encoding direction in mm.
Conrm your input.
Thickness
Orientation
Slice Shift
Delete
Apply
Offcenter
Range of values
Apply
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.316 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Free presaturation slabs positioning
Presaturation slabs can be set individually (Exception: parallel and
tracking presaturation slabs).
Please note: The maximum number of presaturation slabs de-
pends on the repetition time TR.
Open the Sat. Region Parameters for Free Values window.
Select the desired presaturation slab in the list.
Select the parameters you want to change.
Changes the thickness of presaturation slabs.
Changes the orientation of presaturation slabs
(identical to Changing the slice orientation page B.39).
Changes the shift of presaturation slabs
(identical to Changing the slice shift page B.315).
Deletes the slab selected.
Conrm the positioning.
Free Sat.
Sat. Thick.
Orientation
Sat. Shift
Delete
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Number of Sat. : As an alternative, you can delete presaturation slabs by reducing
their number (conrm with RETURN). All presaturation slabs at the
end of the list exceeding the number set are deleted.
Parallel Sats: O Switches parallel presaturation slabs on/off.
Tracking Sats: Switches tracking presaturation slabs on/off.
The labels of the switches change depending on the patient posi-
tion (page B.214).
Selecting the saturation pulses
Each of the two saturation pulses available can be used on the en-
tire FOV. For a detailed description of the saturation techniques,
refer to the Applications Guide chapter C.2.
Fat Saturation: O Saturates the signal from fat tissue.
Please note: In the case of some pulse sequences, fat saturation
cannot be switched off.
MT-Sat. : O Click the checkbox for magnetization transfer saturation (MTS).
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.318 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the data acquisition
The parameters for measurement data acquisition and matrix size
are listed in the measurement data eld of the Protocol Change
window.
Reduced raw data matrix
A square raw data matrix has an equal number of scans (rows)
and number of sampling points (columns). A reduced raw data
matrix has fewer scans than sampling points. Because the matrix
is interpolated in the phase-encoding direction, you will always
see a square matrix on the screen.
Matrix:% Use the % scaling factor to change the matrix size in the phase-en-
coding direction or enter the absolute number of scans.
When you are using a rectangular FOV (page B.320) :
We recommend that you use the % scaling factor. This value will
remain constant even if you change other parameters. The per-
centage of raw data lines is set to 100 %. The result will be square
pixels.
Measurement data eld
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Oversampling in the phase-encoding direction
Please note: Information and examples of MR images using over-
sampling can be found in the Applications Guide page A.224.
Ph-OS: Use the arrow keys to enter the oversampling rate in units of %.
For example, 100 % means that the number of sampling points in
the phase-encoding direction has been doubled.
Please note: The systemrecalculates the values entered by you and
adjusts them as required.
Example: The raw data matrix has 256 lines
30 % oversampling rate
Increase in the number of lines is 76.8.
The system has to adjust the percentage entered to get an even
number of lines.
Oversampling in the read-out direction
Click the checkbox if you want oversampling in the read-out
direction.
Please note: Oversampling in the read-out direction is mandatory
for pulse sequences with mixed bandwidths. For this reason, the
switch cannot be disabled by you.
Generating images in the Half-Fourier mode
Only for sequences that generate Half-Fourier matrices.
Click the checkbox if you want to use Half-Fourier matrices.
The number of Fourier lines is reduced by half in the phase-encod-
ing direction. Therefore, the measurement time is reduced by al-
most 50 %.
Information and examples of MR images can be found in the Ap-
plications Guide page A.222.
Read-OS
HF
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.320 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the Field of View
All slices in a measurement have the same Field of View (size of
area under examination).
Please note: Information and examples of MR images for modify-
ing the FOV can be found in the Applications Guide page A.28.
Using a rectangular FOV
The measurement time can be shortened by limiting the FOV to a
rectangular area of the anatomy under examination. Use the Rect.
FOV switch to determine the ratio between the phase-encoding
and read-out direction. Select one of the xed options. Only the
absolute number of scans will be changed, the % scaling factor re-
mains constant. This ensures that resolution is not degraded.
To set a rectangular FOV:
Rect. FOV: Click one of the switches.
Please note: Information and examples of MR images for rectan-
gular FOV can be found in the Applications Guide page A.218.
Rect. FOV Raw data matrix
8/8 256256
7/8 224256
6/8 192256
5/8 160256
4/8 128256
FOV
The smaller the FOV, the higher the resolution,
but the poorer the signal-to-noise ratio.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Example demonstrating the reciprocal effect of
matrix parameters
Changing the number of acquisitions
You can enter the value directly in the input eld next to the No.
Acq. button or via the respective window.
Please note: Information and examples of MR images regarding
number of acquisitions can be found in the Applications Guide page
A.228.
Initial values (example only)
RFOV Ph-OS Matrix % Matrixsize Pixel
[mm
2
]
Rel. S/N Meas.time
8/8 0 100 256256 1 1 1,00 100 %
Matrix % changed
[mm
2
]
Rel. S/N Meas.time
8/8 0 50 128 256 2 1 1,41 50 %
Oversampling changed in phase-encoding direction
[mm
2
]
Rel. S/N Meas.time
8/8 100 % 100 256256 1 1 1,41 200 %
Changed rectangular FOV
[mm
2
]
Rel. S/N Meas.time
6/8 0 100 192 256 1 1 0,87 75 %
No. Acq.
The higher the number of acquisitions,
the better the signal-to-noise ratio,
but the longer the measurement time.
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.322 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the number of measurements
The measurement can be repeated at specic intervals to monitor
the course of the contrast agent. As soon as you have performed
more than one measurement, you can program a delay time be-
tween two consecutive measurements.
Open the Number of Measurements window.
No.Meas. : Enter the new number of measurements.
Select a measurement number from the list
Rep.Delay: Enter the delay time in seconds (does not apply for
measurement number 1)
Alternative: Enter the total time of the measurement interval
(measurement plus delay time).
Conrm your input.
No. Meas.
Range of values
Measurement
Interval(Const.)
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Swapping the spatial encoding
The parameters for swapping the spatial encoding are listed in
their own eld.
Normally, the phase encoding direction set for transverse or sagit-
tal slices is along the Y axis, and for coronal slices is along the X
axis.
This helps to prevent aliasing artifacts (refer to the Applications
Guide page A.414.
Swap Phase Enc. : O The phase encoding and readout directions are swapped. The
direction of the phase encoding gradients is displayed:
P > A from posterior to anterior
L > R from the left to the right side of the body
H > F fromthe top to the bottomalong the longitudinal axis of
the body
In this manner, artifacts caused by eye movements can be avoided
or eliminated when performing transverse head examinations.
Swap Select Sign: O Swaps the slice selection direction.
Transverse Sagittal Coronal
x Readout Slice selection Phase encoding
y Phase encoding Phase encoding Slice selection
z Slice selection Readout Readout
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.324 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting reconstruction and other
parameters
Interpolating the matrix size
A 128 matrix can be enlarged to a 256 matrix using sinc interpola-
tion of the pixels.
To interpolate the matrix size:
Interpolate: O Click the check box if you want to interpolate the matrix size
Only the size of the raw data matrix is shown in the image text of
interpolatedimages. Sinc interpolationis identiedby the letter S.
Please note: A 1024 matrix cannot be interpolated.
Examples of MR images: refer to the Applications Guide page A.231.
Specifying the use of contrast agent
If you want to use contrast agent during a measurement:
Contrast Agent : O Click the check box.
Please note: The check box has to be selected when you perform
contrast series. If you forget to select it, you will not be able to
draw slices with Measurement Position (page B.22).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Computing phase images
Phase images allow you to differentiate between moving spin en-
sembles and stationary tissue. This differentiation is advanta-
geous in diagnosing thrombi, for example.
Stationary spins show the same phase orientation. Moving spins,
however, deviate in phase as a function of their velocity.
In a magnitude image the gray value of a pixel corresponds to the
magnitude of the MR signal at this location. In the phase image,
each pixel gray value represents the respective phase orientation
between 180 and +180.
Phase Images: O Click the check box.
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.326 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the triggering
Open the Physiological Measurement window.
Mode: Set the measurement mode for physiological imaging.
Switch off physiological measurement.
Retain triggering.
Signal : Set the physiological signal for triggering.
Trigger with ECG signal.
Trigger with pulse signal.
Trigger with respiratory signal
(not MAGNETOM Open).
Trigger with external signal
Trigger/Gate
Off
Triggered
EKG
Pulse
Respiration
External
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
ECG/pulse or external signal triggering
Delay After Trigger : Enter the delay time in milliseconds.
Trigger Pulses: Enter the number of trigger pulses (14).
Number of Phases : Enter the number of phases
(for ECG and external signal only).
Respiratory triggering
Trigger Phase: Set the desired trigger phase.
Trigger at inspiration.
Trigger at expiration.
Threshold: Enter the trigger threshold in percent (%).
Conrm your input.
Inspiration
Expiration
Apply
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.328 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the lters
Open the Filter window.
Filter
Raw data lter
Image data lter
Normalization lter
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Raw data lter
Raw Filter : O Click the checkbox when you want to apply a lter to the
raw data.
Type: The Hanning lter is the default lter (constant with sine-shaped
slope).
Version: Set the lter version.
Filter used for routine applications
Freely-denable lter
Width of Filter : Freely-denable lter: Enter lter width W.
Width of Slope: Freely-denable lter: Enter the width of slope S.
Image data lter
Image Filter : O Click the checkbox when you want to apply a lter to the
image matrix.
Version: Select the lter version.
Filter used for routine applications
Save unltered Images : (pending)
Weak
Medium
Strong
Free
S S
W W
1.0
0
Matrix size
Weak
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.330 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Normalization lter
The normalization lter allows you to control the brightness of the
images. While the lters primary use is for array coils, you can
also use it for special coils.
Image Normalize: Click the checkbox when you want to apply the normalization
lter over the raw data matrix.
Version: Select the strength of the lter
Freely denable lter in which case you:
Width of Filter : Indicate the number of rows of the raw data matrix which should
be used for calculating the reference image. The brightness distri-
bution of the measured images is normalized on the basis of the
reference image. When the lter is as large as the matrix, the image
will contain gray pixels only.
Cutoff : Indicate whether pixels which are almost black should be ltered
completely. The higher the percentage, the higher the number of
pixels which will be cut off. A value of 5 % means that, e. g., all
pixels with a brightness level of less than 5 %of the maximumwill
be cut off. This guarantees a steady transition for the lter.
Save unnormalized Images: Click the checkbox when you want both ltered and
unltered images within a single measurement series.
Conrm your input.
Free
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conguring coils
(not MAGNETOM Open)
A series of coils can be congured via Numaris.
Setting the coil assignment
The switchable coils are:
O TMJ coil
O Shoulder coil
The coil eld is displayed on-screen as follows:
Coil Switch: Set the coil assignment.
Bilateral, both coils.
Unilateral, left coil only.
Unilateral, right coil only.
C H E C K L I S T
7 Switchable coil has been
connected
Connected coil Coil eld
Both
Left
Right
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.332 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conguring array coils
(Vision and Impact Expert only)
The coil eld changes when you connect an array coil.
Congures the array coil.
The Coil Conguration window is displayed.
Please note: Conguring the array coil and combining the base im-
ages are described in detail in the Applications Guide, chapter C.3.
Connected coil
Active elements
Congure
C H E C K L I S T
7 Array coil has been
connected
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Example: CP Spine Array
When you select Element 5, Element 1 switches off. When you se-
lect Element 6, Elements 1 and 2 switch off.
You can switch off elements which are not required in order to in-
crease the reconstruction speed. If you switch off an element in a
measurement eld, a gap is displayed in the image.
Positionof elements andactivity
status.
Theelements canbeindividually
switchedonandoff byclickingthe
mouse.
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.334 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Combination Select the method for combining the base images into the array
image.
Best signal-to-noise ratio,
reconstruction time longer.
Slightly improved image homogeneity,
additional reconstruction time.
Uncombined Images: O
Conrm the parameters you have set.
Standard
Noise adj.
Notice
This check box is reserved
for Siemens Customer Service only.
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Survey measurement with the body coil
(not MAGNETOM Open)
You can take survey measurements with the body coil while one
of the special coils is connected. The advantage in this case is the
large FOV of the body coil. The following special coils allow for
survey measurements with the body coil :
O Helmholtz Neck Coil
O CP Spine Coil
O Shoulder Coil
O Pelvis Coil
O Breast Coil
O CP Flex Coil large
O CP Flex Coil small
O LP Loop Coil standard
O CP Body Array
O CP Spine Array
O CP Neck Array
Bodyscout : O Performs a survey measurement.
The systemswitches to the body coil prior to loading the localizer.
When you select the next measurement protocol, the system
switches back to the special coil.
Rev. 07
Measurement Change
B.336 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the automatic adjustment
You can switch off the automatic adjustment of frequency, trans-
mitter, receiver, gradient and shim.
Inline Adj. : Automatic adjustment is switched on or off.
Please note: When you switch off the automatic adjustment, use
the Measurement Adjust function (chapter B.14). Image quality
is degraded if the MR components are not adjusted.
Shim Adj. : Adjustment of the shimcurrents is switched on or off. This setting
is possible only when Inline Adj. is switched on.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.4
Reactivating measurement
protocols
All measurement protocols used are temporarily stored for the
current patient so that they can be called or started again with the
Measurement History function.
The two advantages for routine examinations are :
O Reduced examination time per patient
O Increased patient throughput
O in the Position window (page B.22)
O in the Protocol Change window (page B.32)
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Current patient exists
Rev. 07
Measurement History
B.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Measurement History windowdisplays a list of all measure-
ment protocols loaded for the current patient. In addition, the list
may include other entries, e. g., the fact that the patient table has
been moved.
As soon as you register a new patient, all measurement protocols
stored temporarily for the previous patient are deleted.
Positions the slices (page B.22).
Alternative: double-click a line in the measurement history.
Changes the measurement parameters (page B.32).
Terminates the measurement (chapter B.10).
Displays the measurement parameters (page B.48).
Ends the function.
Ends the function. Selected settings are retained.
Position
Change
Measure
Stop
View
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the measurement history
The measurement history displays either protocol names or mea-
surement parameters (Measurement Set page B.123).
Protocol names An entry in the list means:
The name of the measurement protocol includes the coil type and
slice orientation. However, you may have changed the coil or the
slice orientation. As a result, the name of the measurement proto-
col and the actual status may no longer match.
If you have selected a new pulse sequence in the Protocol
Change window (page B.35), it is entered in the measurement
history under the original name of the measurement protocol.
Measurement parameters Entries in the list do not include the names of the protocol used,
only the most important measurement parameters.
1 s/body/liver_routine/t1_se_tra
Series number
Name of measurement protocol Siemens Protocol
s/body/liver_routine/t1_se_tra
Measurement terminated/Error when loading
Rev. 07
Measurement History
B.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Verifying the measurement parameters
Every time you select a parameter or an entry from the list, a his-
tory verication window is displayed in the second segment. The
original parameters in the Protocol Change window when the
function was called are displayed in the new window.
Closes the verication window.
Theparameters to betransferred
for thesubsequent measurement
aredisplayedinboldprint. All
other parameters aredimmed.
Thehistoryvericationwindow
appears onlyif youselectedto
haveit displayed
(Measurement Set page
B.123).
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the parameters
You can start additional measurements using either the entire
measurement protocol or just the slice or positioning parameters.
Reusing the old measurement protocol
Select Set the switch to Everything.
All parameters of the measurement protocol are used for the next
measurement.
If open, the verication window is closed.
Select the desired measurement protocol in the list.
It becomes the active measurement protocol.
Starts the measurement with the active measurement protocol
(chapter B.6).
The measurement is added to the measurement history.
Reusing parameters
Select Uses only the slice/presaturation
parameters for the following
measurement. These parameters are displayed in bold print in the
verication window.
O Number of slices
O Slice Thickness
O Slice FOV
O Slice mean Shift
O Slice Offcenter
O Slice Orientation
O Slice Dist. Factor
O Slice Series
O Number of Sats (presaturation slabs only)
O Sat. thickness (presaturation slabs only)
O Sat. Orientation (presaturation slabs only)
O Sat. shift (presaturation slabs only)
Everything
Measure
Slice/Sat Parameters
Rev. 07
Measurement History
B.46 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Select Uses only the positioning parameters
for the next measurement.
O Slice mean Shift
O Slice Offcenter
O Slice Orientation
O Sat. thickness (presaturation slabs only)
O Sat. Orientation (presaturation slabs only)
O Sat. shift (presaturation slabs only)
Select Uses only the presaturation slab
parameters for the next measurement.
O Number of Sats
O Sat. thickness
O Sat. Orientation
O Sat. shift
Select the desired measurement protocol in the list.
It becomes the active measurement protocol.
After the consistency of the parameters is tested (page B.47), the
modied parameters are displayed in the verication window.
The measurement is added to the list in the measurement history.
Slice/Sat Positions
Sat Parameters
Measure
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Testing the consistency
After selecting parameters and a measurement protocol, they are
combined to form the active measurement protocol. At this point,
inconsistencies may occur.
The displayed parameters are changed.
The displayed parameters are modied. TR is retained.
The displayed parameters are modied. The number of slices is
retained.
The displayed parameters are not modied. The parameters se-
lected are cancelled.
Inconsistent parameters
aredisplayedinanotice
box. Anyparameter inthe
Protocol Change
windowcanappear ina
noticebox. Youcanthen
decidewhether or not to
modifytheparameters
displayed.
Yes
Themost frequent
inconsistencyexists
betweentherepetitiontime
andthenumber of slices.
Yes, keep TR
Yes, keep slices
No
Rev. 07
Measurement History
B.48 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the measurement
parameters
Open the History Protocol View window.
(If open, the verication window is closed.)
Returns to the Measurement History window.
Displaying the slice/slab parameters
Open the History Protocol View: Slice Parameters window.
Returns to the History Protocol View window.
View
Theparameters of theprotocol
selectedinthemeasurement
historyaredisplayed. Parameters
cannot bechangedinthis
window; theycanonlybeviewed.
To changetheindividual
parameters chapter B.3.
Cancel
Slice
Theslicepositions of theprotocol
selectedinthemeasurement
historyaredisplayed.
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the presaturation slab parameters
Open the History Protocol View: Saturation Parameters
window.
Returns to the History Protocol View window.
Sat.
Displays thepositions of the
presaturationslabs of the
protocol selectedinthe
measurement history. The
functionbuttonis dimmedif the
protocol does not contain
presaturationslabs.
Cancel
Rev. 07
Measurement History
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.5
Processing measurement jobs
Use the Measurement Queue function to view and process the
list of measurement jobs for a patient. You can also change the or-
der of the jobs, as well as interrupt them, resume them, repeat
them, or delete them.
Measurement jobs If you start additional measurements while a measurement is in
progress, the jobs are sent to a list and processed step-by-step.
Queue The queue is a list of measurement jobs.
Please note: The queue is deleted when you register a newpatient.
However, a measurement in progress will not be stopped. Only
the Measurement Stop function can end a measurement in
progress.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Measurement Queue
B.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You select the job to be processed and enter the desired command
in the Measurement Queue window. The list may be scrolled if
necessary.
Please note: You can select from two types of window display
(Measurement Set page B.123). The function window with pro-
tocol names is displayed.
Ends the function. Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Description of entries
Total scan time : Species the imaging time required to process all jobs in the
job list.
No Sequential number of the imaging job.
Action Identies the origin of the imaging job.
LOAD Measurement Load function (chapter B.7).
START Measurement Start function (chapter B.9).
MEASURE Measurement Measure function (chapter B.6).
Depending on the parameters selected (page B.123), one of the
following displays is used:
Protocol Name Displays the protocol name.
Measurement Displays the most important measurement parameters.
Parameters
State Current status of the job:
ACTIVE job currently being processed.
ABORTED job was being processed but was
stopped or could not be performed.
PENDING job is in the queue and waiting to be
processed.
PAUSED job was not started automatically. The
queue stops at this position.
Functions
Positions slices
(chapter B.2).
Changes measurement parameters
(chapter B.3).
Selects measurement protocols
(chapter B.1).
Ends the function and allows you to reactivate measurement pro-
tocols (chapter B.4). Jobs which have already been processed may
be reactivated and added to the queue.
Position
Change
Protocol
History
Rev. 07
Measurement Queue
B.54 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing the queue
A notice box is displayed if you start a measurement (with the
Measurement Load, Start or Measure functions) and if there are
one or more jobs in the queue. In the notice box you can append
the measurement job to the queue.
Sends the new measurement job to the queue. The notice box
closes.
Opens the Measurement Queue window. The notice box remains
open and waits for conrmation.
Exits the notice box.
Repeating a job
You can append a copy of the measurement job to the queue.
Select the job desired.
Insert the selected job at the end of the queue.
A measurement in progress can also be repeated.
Number of jobs inthequeue
Current status of thequeue
(active, pausedaborted)
Queue
Show Queue
Cancel
Repeat
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Stopping and restarting the job
Select the active job desired.
Stop the selected job.
The stopped job is marked with the status aborted.
Restarts the measurement job.
Please note: The name of the function button toggles between
Continue and Restart.
Pausing and continuing the queue
You can pause the queue at a job which is not currently being pro-
cessed (marked with status pending). A queue which has been
stopped cannot be paused.
Pause the selected job.
The job is marked with the status paused.
The queue is processed up to this point and then pauses.
Continues with processing the queue.
Deleting jobs
Select the inactive job desired.
Delete the selected job.
A notice box is displayed and you must conrm your action.
Conrm the deletion with Yes.
Deletes all jobs in the queue.
The active job is not deleted.
Stop
Restart
Pause at
Continue
Delete
Delete all
Rev. 07
Measurement Queue
B.56 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the job sequence
Move the selected job one position higher or lower in the list,
until it is in the position desired.
Please note: You may not position a job in front of a measurement
in progress.
Move down Move up
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.6
Performing the measurement
The measurement is performed by loading a measurement proto-
col into the control unit and by subsequently starting it. The Mea-
surement Measure function allows you to load and start the ac-
tive measurement protocol in one step.
Measurement Measure combines the Load and Start functions
(chapter B.7 and chapter B.9).
O in the Position window (page B.22)
O in the Measurement History window (page B.42)
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Measurement protocol has
been selected
Rev. 07
Measurement Measure
B.62 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Loading and performing the
measurement
Prerequisite: An active measurement protocol must be available.
Please note: If you have positioned slices using the Position win-
dow, they will not automatically be used for the current measure-
ment.
If you would like to use the newly positioned slices: start the mea-
surement directly from the Position window (page B.22).
If you would like to use the previous positioning: select from the
Measurement History window (page B.42).
Perform the measurement.
The active measurement protocol is loaded into the control unit
and entered in the measurement history of the current patient
(chapter B.4). Subsequently, the measurement is started.
Data acquisition is enabled. After the images have been recon-
structed, they are stored in a new series for the current patient.
Displaying images
To view the reconstructed images :
Calls the current patient.
Please note: You can select to have the images displayed automat-
ically (chapter J.5).
Measure
PatCur
T I P
If problems arise with the
automatic adjustments,
perform the adjustment
with Measurement Adjust,
ending with Load and Start.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.7
Loading the current
measurement protocol
The active measurement protocol has to be loaded into the control
unit prior to starting the measurement. Load the measurement
protocol via the Measurement Load function without starting the
measurement.
O in the Position window (page B.22),
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
been selected
Rev. 07
Measurement Load
B.72 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Load procedure
A measurement protocol is selected.
Load the measurement protocol.
The active measurement protocol is loaded into the control unit
and entered in the measurement history of the current patient
(chapter B.4).
The frequency, transmitter, and receiver of the RF systemare auto-
matically adjusted, if preset (page B.336).
You can now start the measurement (chapter B.9).
Load
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.8
protocol
The loaded measurement protocol can be displayed, for example,
while a measurement is in progress, with the Measurement
Show Loaded function.
C H E C K L I S T
been loaded
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Measurement Show Loaded
B.82 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
parameters
Ends the function.
Displaying the slice parameters
Open the ShowLoaded Sequence: Slice Parameters window.
Returns to the Show Loaded Sequence window.
Ends the function.
TheShow Loaded Sequence
windowdisplays theparameters
set for theloadedmeasurement
protocol. Notethat youcannot
changetheparameters inthis
window. For adescriptionof the
individual parameters chapter
B.3.
Exit
Slice
Theslicepositions of theloaded
measurement protocol are
displayed.
Cancel
Exit
Displaying the measurement protocol
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the presaturation slab parameters
Open the Show Loaded Sequence : Sat. Region Parameters
window.
Returns to the Show Loaded Sequence window.
Ends the function.
Sat.
If presaturationslabs wereused,
their positions aredisplayed.
Cancel
Exit
Rev. 07
Measurement Show Loaded
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.9
Starting the measurement
You can use Measurement Start to start the measurement with
the loaded measurement protocol.
Please note: Prior to starting the measurement, you have to load
the active measurement protocol into the control unit (Load chap-
ter B.7).
O with the START key on the keyboard
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
been loaded with Load
START
Rev. 07
Measurement Start
B.92 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Measurement procedure
Prerequisite: A measurement protocol has been loaded into the
control unit.
Start the measurement.
Data acquisition is enabled. After the images have been recon-
structed, they are stored in a new series for the current patient.
Displaying images
To view the reconstructed images :
Calls the current patient.
Please note: You can select to have the images automatically dis-
played (chapter J.5).
Start
PatCur
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.10
Terminating themeasurement
The Measurement Stop function terminates the following mea-
surement sequences in progress.
That is:
O Loading the measurement protocol with Load
O Starting the measurement with Start
O Loading and starting the measurement with Measure
O Measurement in progress
O Adjustment in progress
O in the Select Protocol window (page B.12),
O in the Protocol Change window (page B.32).
O in the Measurement History window (page B.42).
O in the Measurement Queue window (page B.52).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Measurement procedure
in progress
Rev. 11
Measurement Stop
B.102 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Actual procedure
The measurement in progress is to be terminated.
Terminate the measurement.
The measurement is terminated immediately. The measurement
protocol loaded into the control unit is not retained; it must be re-
loaded using the Measurement Load or Measure function (chap-
ter B.7 or chapter B.6). You can subsequently continue the mea-
surement in the usual manner.
Please note: If you terminate a measurement in progress, images
will be reconstructed if sufcient data were acquired. If more than
half the measurement time has elapsed when the measurement is
terminated, an image of half Fourier quality is produced.
Exceptions :
O TurboSE sequences,
O TurboFLASH sequences,
O FLASH sequences,
O Turbo Inversion Recovery Magnitude (TIRM) sequences and
O Measurements with half-Fourier matrices.
Please note: Please review all images calculated after a measure-
ment has been interrupted. Always check the consistency of im-
age information, the orientation identication, and the patient
associated with the image.
Stop
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.11
Setting the physiological
signal
During physiologically controlled measurements, the physiologi-
cal signal derived from the patient is displayed. This signal can be
used to synchronize patient movements with the applied pulse se-
quences. Use the Measurement Monitoring function to display
the type of signal and gain.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Measurement Monitoring
B.112 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the parameters
You can set the settings desired in the Monitoring window and
then conrm them with Go. The signals will be displayed in the
measurement text eld of the monitor screen accordingly.
Conrms the setting selected.
Ends the function. New parameters set are not retained.
Ends the function. New parameter values are retained.
Go
Cancel
Exit
Setting the physiological signal
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Signal : Selects the type of signal.
Displays the ECG signal.
Displays the pulse signal.
Displays the respiratory signal
Displays the external signal
Amplitude: Sets the signal gain.
Low signal amplitude.
Medium signal amplitude.
High signal amplitude.
Scroll Speed: Sets the trace speed.
Signal curve appears compressed.
Signal curve appears extended.
Beeper Volume: Sets the beeper volume.
Conrm your settings.
The signals selected are displayed in the measurement text eld of
the monitor screen.
Ends the function.
EKG
Pulse
Respiration
External
Small
Medium
Large
Slow
Medium
Fast
Off
Low
Medium
High
Go
Exit
Rev. 07
Measurement Monitoring
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.12
Presetting parameters for the
measurement functions
You can set many features with the Measurement Set function,
including: automatic survey measurement, display of the mea-
surement jobs for measurement history and queue.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Measurement Set
B.122 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Presetting the parameters
The Measurement Set windowis divided into two elds. Use the
upper eld to select the displays for the various function win-
dows. Use the lower eld to set parameters regarding the mea-
surement.
Ends the function and positions slices
(chapter B.2).
Ends the function and reactivates the measurement protocol
(chapter B.4).
Ends the function and modies the measurement parameters
(chapter B.3).
Ends the function. The selected parameters are retained.
Position
History
Change
Exit
Presetting parameters for the measurement functions
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Settings for the user interface
Sets the type of display for the measurement history and the
queue (page B.43 and page B.52) :
Displays the name of the measurement protocol.
Displays the most important measurement
parameters.
Click the check box to switch on the History Verication
window (page B.44).
Setting the measurement
Autoscout : Automatic survey measurement after coil tuning is completed.
After RF tuning and all subsequent adjustments
are complete, the system searches for a survey
protocol (scout or SCOUT) in the measurement
protocol corresponding to the connected coil.
First, the program searches for a survey protocol in the list of
Customer Protocols and then moves on to the list of Siemens
Protocols. If a survey protocol is available, the survey measure-
ment is started automatically.
No automatic survey measurement.
Phase Encoding O For service purposes only.
Measurement Jobs shown
as:
Protocol Names
Meas. Parameters
History Verication
Window:
Enabled
Disabled
Rev. 07
Measurement Set
B.124 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Corrects pin cushion-shaped distortions on the edge of the image
eld (FOV) (refer to System Guide page A.19). Large FoV remap-
ping is performed for protocols, if:
O the checkbox is selected and
O the FOV is > 400 mm.
To ensure that only the images selected by you are corrected, dese-
lect the checkbox after the correction.
Please note: Image reconstruction time is slightly longer due to the
large FoV remapping.
Exception: Measurement protocols from the cardiac package or
ow quantication are not supported.
Large FoV Remapping O
(only MAGNETOM Vision)
Notice
Images corrected using this feature cannot be used for
Measurement Position (chapter B.2) and
Series Display (chapter C.6).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.13
SAR check
During the examination with MAGNETOM, the patient is exposed
to an RF eld. A portion of the RF energy is absorbed by the body
and converted into heat. This could result in an increase in body
temperature. The specic absorption rate and its limits are dis-
played with the Measurement SAR function.
Details on SAR chapter D.2 in the System Guide.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
The specic absorption rate (SAR)
obtainable with MAGNETOM Open
does not exceed the permissible values.
Rev. 07
Measurement SAR
B.132 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview of SAR
The Measurement SAR window is divided into ve subelds.
SAR check
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Informations to the last performed SAR calculation General
information about the SAR check and appropriate instructions for
changing the measurement parameters.
If SAR limits are exceeded, information regarding the following
two measurement parameters is displayed.
O Allowed TR (number of slices unchanged)
O Allowed number of slices (TR unchanged)
Patient data and patient dependent SAR factors Important pa-
tient data, e. g. the body weight and birth date of the current pa-
tient.
SAR and energy dose values of the selected protocol Mea-
surement-related data and the computed SAR values. The follow-
ing computed values must lie below these limits :
O Computed whole body SAR
O Computed partial body SAR
O Computed localized SAR
O Computed energy dose of measurement
O Accumulated energy dose at end of the (next) measurement
If the last computed value exceeds the recommended limit, a
warning is displayed.
RF exposure limits Limits for the SAR and SED.
O SAR limit whole body
O SAR limit partial body
O SAR limit local
O Energy dose
Coil data SAR-relevant coil data.
Ends the function.
For service purposes only.
Provides additional information.
Refreshes the function window. Information regarding the proto-
col currently loaded is displayed.
Exit Cancel
Details
Refresh
Rev. 07
Measurement SAR
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.14
Adjustment
The following system parameters are automatically adjusted
while loading the measurement parameters:
O the frequency,
O the transmitter,
O the receiver
O the time of the read-out interval (Vision only) and
O the shim current status
The automatic adjustment can be switched off in the Protocol
Change window (page B.336). In this case, you perform the ad-
justments individually using the Measurement Adjust function
and subsequently load the protocol with the Load function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
Notice
Manual adjustment is not used in routine clinical examinations.
Rev. 07
Measurement Adjust
B.142 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of function
Initiates frequency adjustment.
Initiates transmitter adjustment.
Initiates receiver adjustment.
Initiates gradient offset current or shim current (for Vision) adjust-
ment (page B.144).
Calls the coil directory which lists every coil installed.
Displays result of the last adjustment.
Vision only: Initiates ADC adjustment. A ne adjustment of the
read-out interval is performed for the current protocol (necessary
for EPI measurements).
Opens the Protocol Change window (chapter B.3).
Initiates 3-D shim to improve image quality for protocols with fat
saturation (page B.147).
Ends the function.
Frequency
Transmitter
Receiver
MAP-Shim
Coil Dir.
Show Actual
ADC
Change
Shim3D
Exit
Notice
Use this function only
if you are an experienced MR-user.
Adjustment
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Global shim (MAP-Shim)
A number of techniques, e.g. fat saturation, EPI or spectroscopy,
require a magnetic eld of exceptionally high homogeneity. In
cases like this, you can adjust the homogeneity manually.
MAP-Shim (Multi-Angle-Projection-Shim) performs a global
shim of the gradient offset currents (or shim currents for Vision).
During the shim, an algorithm calculates corrections to the cur-
rents.
Rev. 07
Measurement Adjust
B.144 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the gradient offset currents or shim currents
ExampleMAGNETOM Vision
Adjustment
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the shim currents (Vision only)
The Shim Currents window appears when you call the MAP-
Shim function.
You select or deselect the individual shim channels in this win-
dow.
Softwareversion VB33A:
Useonlytheseveshim
channels.
Youmaynot usetheother
channels.
Rev. 07
Measurement Adjust
B.146 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Start the adjustment
# The number sign behind the calculated value indicates conver-
gence with the respective channel.
Repeat the adjustment until all currents converge or the message
shim adjusted appears. You can now end the procedure.
Exit fromthe global shimand apply the calculated currents to sub-
sequent measurements.
Start
Starting value:
1st iteration
2nd iteration
3rd iteration
Calculated value:
Exit Apply
Adjustment
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
3-D shim
Several protocols (e.g. those using fat saturation) require magnetic
eld of especially high homogeneity. In this case, please proceed
as follows:
Select the desired protocol.
Position the slices or slabs.
In the Position window:
Call the Measurement Adjust function.
Open the Shim3D window (refer to the next page) .
Click this button.
The Position window containing a special shim sequence is
opened. The VOI displayed corresponds to the VOI of the protocol
selected.
Position the 3-D volume (as required).
Please note: Position the volume carefully. Otherwise, the quality
of the 3- D shim may be degraded by aliasing artifacts.
In the Position window:
Call the Measurement Adjust function.
Open the Shim3D window.
Initiate the 3-D shim.
After completion of the 3-D shim:
Close the Shim3D window.
Open the Protocol Change window.
Please note: The Shim Adj. checkbox is disabled. The setting ap-
plies to the selected protocol only.
Start the measurement.
Please note: The data of the shim will be overwritten if you select
an additional protocol with fat saturation while Shim Adj. is still
enabled.
Adjust
Shim3D
Position for Shim3D
Adjust
Shim3D
Start
Exit
Change
Measure
Rev. 07
Measurement Adjust
B.148 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.15
Interactive shim
A number of techniques, such as FatSat or spectroscopy require
magnetic elds of especially high homogeneity. Currents calcu-
lated with MAP shim can be further optimized and individually
set for the selected pulse sequence when you use Measurement
Shim.
Using spectroscopy: A detailed description can be found in the
Spectroscopy Guide.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Protocols . . .
Position. . .
Change. . .
History . . .
Queue. . .
Measure
Load
Show Loaded. . .
Start
Stop
Monitoring. . .
Set . . .
SAR. . .
Adjust . . .
Shim. . .
Not at the MRSC
(Satellite console)
Not MAGNETOM Open
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Global shim has been
completed successfully
(page B.144)
7 Pulse sequence has been
selected
Use this function only
if you are an experienced MR-user.
Store the results of the global shim before you change
the shim currents.
Rev. 07
Measurement Shim
B.152 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the gradient offset currents
or shim currents
FID signal Frequency signal (after Fourier transform)
Interactive shim
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calls Measurement Adjust (chapter B.14).
Sets the current from the gradient cabinet or the shim cabinet
(Vision only).
Ends the interactive shim. The currents set will be applied for the
subsequent measurements.
What is a good shim?
The objective of shimming is to obtain a FIDsignal with a slowde-
cay time and a frequency signal as narrowas possible. The quality
of your shim is indicated by the two displays Integral and
FWHM.
Integral: A long FID signal with a smooth exponential decay gives a high
integral value. The maximum obtainable value should be reached.
FWHM: The narrower the frequency signal, the lower the displayed value.
In this case, the minimum obtainable value should be reached.
Adjust
Local
Cancel
Exit
Rev. 07
Measurement Shim
B.154 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the currents
The following are usually set for interactive shimming:
Grad PSU: Gradient offset currents
Shim PSU: Non-linear shim channels (all except for X, Y and Z).
For this reason, only these currents can be selected. When the gra-
dient cabinet is switched off, you can set the linear shim channels
in place of the gradient offset currents.
Coordinate System: Set the designation for the shim channels.
Changing the currents
Start the interactive shim.
The number of acquisitions is automatically set to 1. You can
change the currents during the measurement as required.
Shim PSU:/Grad PSU: Select one of the shim channels.
Do not change more than one shim current at a time.
Shim Increments Set an increment of 5 mA.
Shim Currents When you call the function, the currents computed from the glo-
bal shim are displayed.
Increase the selected current.
The values changes as a function of the ShimIncrements set.
Monitor the integral and FWHM value to determine the effect of
your changes. Lower the current again in case the integral value
drops and/or the FWHM value rises.
If the integral value rises and the FWHM value drops, continue to
change the current in the same direction.
If the current does not improve any further, select the next shim
channel.
Repeat the above for the desired currents.
Measure
Interactive shim
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Local shim
The shimis applied to a local volume only. In this case, change the
linear shim currents x, y, z only.
Global shim (Vision only)
The shim is applied to the entire measurement eld. In addition,
the term z
2
and/or terms of higher orders have to be optimized.
Please note: A drastically changed z
2
shim current will directly af-
fect the resonance frequency.
In case you notice a shift in signal frequency because of the change made
to the z
2
shim current:
Change the z
2
value in small increments (1 mA increments) until the
transmitter frequency is in resonance again.
Shift in resonance
frequency
?
Rev. 07
Measurement Shim
B.156 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the signal display
Raw: Changes the display of the raw data.
FT: Changes the display of the frequency signal.
Click the small triangle with the MENU button.
The window menu shown lists the various display modes.
Display:
Switches on signal display.
Switches off signal display.
Freezes the actual signal.
Absolute magnitude
Real part
On
Off
Hold
Interactive shim
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Absolute magnitude Imaginary part
Real part Phase
Rev. 07
Measurement Shim
B.158 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scaling of the Y axis
Signal: Scales the Y axis.
Click the triangle with the MENU button.
The window menu provides you with a number of different
values:
O Minimum: 0.01 V
O Maximum: 15 V
Scaling the X axis
Time: Scales the X axis.
Click the triangle with the MENU button.
The windowmenu shown provides you with different scaling fac-
tors (in %).
MENU button
Interactive shim
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing shim les
The list of available shim les appears on the left side of the Shim
Conguration Window.
Deletes shim les.
Displays parameters of the selected shim le.
Loads shim les.
Stores shim les. You can save shim les under a new name or
overwrite the old name.
Delete
Show
Load
Save
Rev. 07
Measurement Shim
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
B.16
Monitoring physiological
stimulation
(MAGNETOM Vision only)
The new ultrafast gradient switching (300 s) causes the magnetic
eld to change very quickly. The electric eld generated induces
electric currents in the patients body.
The induced current
can stimulate the nerves or cells of the patient.
Stimulation of the nerves or cells is experienced as a slight tingling
sensation especially in the area of the buttocks, the lumbar re-
gion, the sides, and the nose.
However, as a precaution, specic limits have been set (in Tesla
per second [T/s]).
The rate of change in the magnetic eld (dB/dt) is determined
while loading the pulse sequence (e.g. EPI). The system automati-
cally stops the loading process, when the maximum permissible
limit has been exceeded. It is then no longer possible to perform
measurements.
Important
The current maximum rate of change in the magnetic eld
does not pose any type of hazards for the patient.
Rev. 07
B.162 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Limits (Thresholds)
The limits are country-specic and are set during system installa-
tion at the customer site.
There are two different value limits:
O legal limits
O stimulation threshold or limit (determined empirically)
Legal limits A distinction is made between a minimum legal threshold and a
maximum legal limit:
O dB/dt < Minimum legal threshold
Normal operating mode of the system. The pulse sequence is
loaded immediately.
Depending on country-specic approvals, the minimum legal
threshold can be a ctitious value.
O Minimum legal threshold < dB/dt < Maximum legal limit
Stimulations are possible. The sequence is then not loaded. How-
ever, it is up to the physician discretion to continue the examina-
tion (refer to the next section).
O dB/dt > Maximum legal limit
Patient examination is blocked, the sequence is not loaded.
Monitoring physiological stimulation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Continue with sequence loading
In the case of stimulation, the following error message appears in
the measurement text eld of the control area:
Measurement: Terminated
MSC data computation: Terminated
Remedies for stimulation are described later on in this chapter
(page B.166).
At the same time the following notice box is displayed:
Continues loading the sequence.
The decision lies with the physician performing the examination.
The overall health of the patient is a factor in this decision.
Terminates the loading procedure for the sequence.
Yes
No
Rev. 07
B.164 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying physiological stimulation
values
There is a program under System Run (chapter K.2) which dis-
plays the stimulation values.
Provides information regarding the current stimulation values.
The information window is displayed.
Updates the function window. Information pertaining to the
currently loaded protocol is shown.
Closes the window.
StimulationMonitor
Update
Exit
Monitoring physiological stimulation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The parameters for the three axis are provided.
Absolute eld rise per gradient strength.
Minimum Legal Threshold Country-specic threshold for changes in the magnetic eld due
to gradient pulsing (may be a ctitious value).
Maximum Legal Limit Country-specic limit for changes in the magnetic eld due to
gradient pulsing.
Display of threshold at which stimulation may occur.
Stimulation Limit (x,y,z) Display of limit at which the sequence will no longer be loaded.
Current Sequence Display of the current pulse sequence.
Stimulation value which was computed from the current
sequence.
Patient Orientation Display of the current patient orientation.
Display of maximum eld changes due to gradient pulsing.
Sequence Load Time Display of the clock time the sequence was loaded.
Evaluation result Display of the results of the limit computation.
The following messages may be displayed:
O Stimulation is NOT expected
O Stimulation may occur
O Stimulation limit exceeded, sequence can NOT be loaded
Remedies for the last two items are described on the next page
(page B.166).
(X-,Y-,Z-) Gradient
Sensitivity
Physiological Stimulation
Threshold (x,y,z)
Calculated Overall
Stimulation Value
Calculated Physiological
Value (x,y,z)
Rev. 07
B.166 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Remedies in the case of stimulation
Stimulation through the y gradient tends to occur when the pa-
tient is in the prone or the supine position.
The y gradient acts in two orientation as a rapidly switching read-
out gradient:
O transverse orientation with swapped phase-encoding
O sagittal orientation with swapped phase-encoding
However, stimulation may occur in the other orientations as well.
There are two methods for suppressing stimulation:
Increase the FOV or
Change the slice orientation.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C Series
Series
C2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of the series functions
The series functions allowyou to organize the large volume of pa-
tient images into manageable groups of series.
Select
Selecting a series of the active view patient................................. C.1
Create
Creating new series ......................................................................... C.2
Arrange
Sorting images in series .................................................................. C.3
Modify
Modifying series .............................................................................. C.4
Series/Series+
Paging through series...................................................................... C.5
Display
Displaying image positions on a localizer image........................ C.6
Series
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
NUMARIS REFERENCE C.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.1
Selectingaseries of theactive
view patient
Use the Series Select function to select any series of the active
view patient from the series list.
The series selected will replace the previously active series.
Active Series The active series is the one containing the image displayed in the
active segment.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
C H E C K L I S T
7 Activesegment contains an
image.
Rev. 07
Series Select
C.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the series list
The series list contains all series of the patient selected.
The series list also appears under Patient Select (chapter A.1).
Please note: The series list for an optical disk contains only the en-
tries for No., Ima, and Range.
Updates the series list. The series for the active view patient are
displayed.
Ends the selection of series.
Update
Exit Cancel
Selecting a series of the active view patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Stu Number of the DICOM study
Ser Number of the series
Arr Sorting order (page C.35):
AN Anatomical
CH Chronological
TE After echo time
TR After repetition time
TD After trigger delay time
CA After contrast agent
Combined series (page C.34):
\ Beginning
/ End
Series Name Name of the series
Typ Series type, indicates origin (also page D.13)
CRE Self-generated (chapter C.2)
DYN Dynamic evaluation (chapter E.14)
EXT External (chapter K.7)
FLT Image ltering (chapter E.13)
MEA Measurement
MIP MIP (chapter E.7)
MPR MPR (chapter E.6)
Ima Number of images contained
Range Range of image numbers
Coil Coil used
TR Repetition time (ms)
TE Echo time (ms)
TI Inversion time (ms)
FA Flip angle
Ori Slice orientation:
SAG Sagittal
COR Coronal
TRA Transverse
OBL Oblique
VAR Variable within the series
SL Slice thickness (mm)
FOV Field of View (mm)
Tri Physiological triggering (page B.326):
ECG ECG signal
PUL Pulse signal
RES Respiratory signal (not MAGNETOM Open)
EXT External trigger (not MAGNETOM Open)
CA Contrast agent used:
n, y no, yes
V Variable: Combined series with and without contrast agent
Rev. 07
Series Select
C.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Sorting the series list
The series in the series list of the patient selected are numbered
consecutively and sorted chronologically.
Exception: COMBINED series are displayed at the end of the list
(page C.34).
Alternative 1: Displaying a series with the standard
image
To call a series plus image directly:
Double-click the corresponding line in the series list.
The standard image of the selected series is shown in the active
segment. Both the list and the function window will be closed, if
the list is not pinned.
Alternative 2: Opening an image list
To select a series from the list and to open the image list:
Click the corresponding line in the series list.
The image list of the series selected replaces the series list (page
D.12).
Paging up and down in the patient list
You can page quickly through the patient list.
Pages down in the patient list. The series list of the previous patient
appears.
Pages up in the patient list. The series list of the next patient
appears.
<Pat
Pat >
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.2
Creating new series
The Series Create function enables you to generate new series
from patient images selected by you.
Please note: While the patient does not have to be the active view
patient, the series had to be previously saved to the hard disk
STORE.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
Rev. 07
Series Create
C.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Enter the name for the series to be created in the Series Create
window. The patient and the desired images may be entered ei-
ther
O directly or
O via the selection list
Subsequently, conrm your choice. You can create any number of
series for each patient.
Ends the creation of series.
Ends the creation of series. The entries are retained.
Cancel
Exit
Creating new series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Assigning a name to the series
New series name: Enter the name of the new series.
Example: ventricle_3
Test Series
Alternative 1: Entering data directly
Patient : Enter the patients name.
Example: AngioMIP
Bach, Johann
Image: Enter the image numbers to be included.
Example: 110
3,1030
Conrm your entry by pressing RETURN.
Alternative 2: Selecting from the lists
If you have not explicitly specied a patient name:
Select the patient from the patient list.
The series list of the patient replaces the patient list.
Please note: The series list is displayed immediately if you have
explicitly specied a patient name.
Query
Rev. 07
Series Create
C.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the series list
Deselects the series previously selected in the series list.
Returns to the patient list (if a patient name was not specied) or
the Series Create window (if a patient name was specied).
Selecting all images
If you would like to select all images from one or more series:
Select the series desired in the series list.
Click the corresponding names of the series.
You can deselect a series by clicking the corresponding line again.
Conrm you selection.
This returns you to the Series Create window, if the list is not
pinned.
Selecting individual images
If you would like to select individual images:
Call the image list.
The< Pat and> Pat buttons are
always dimmed.
For anexplanationof the
individual columns of theseries
list pageC.13.
Update
Cancel
Exit
Go
Query
Creating new series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the image list
The image list looks slightly different in the Series Create func-
tion. The amount of images per series are listed after the series
number.
Deselects the images previously selected in the image list.
Returns you to the series list (page C.24).
Selecting individual images
Select the images desired from the list.
Click the corresponding line.
To deselect an image, simply click the corresponding line again.
Conrm your selection.
This returns you to the Series Create window, if the list is not
pinned.
Selects all images
Click the name of the series in the image list.
For anexplanationof the
individual columns of theimage
list
pageD.13.
Update
Cancel
Exit
Go
Rev. 07
Series Create
C.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Concluding the creation
of a new series
Create the new series.
The images selected are copied to the new series. The next avail-
able number allocated to the series of the patient is assigned to the
new series. The series will be dened as CRE under Typ in the se-
ries list.
An error message will appear if the series name is either missing or
ambiguous.
If image numbers are missing or invalid, the program automatically cor-
rects the input.
Example :
Input : 110, 11
Correction: 14, 79 (when image numbers 5, 6, 10 and 11 are missing).
The function windowremains open so that you can generate addi-
tional series.
End the function.
The function window is closed. The parameters entered are re-
tained for subsequent function selection.
Go
In the case of
errors
?
Exit
Creating new series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Checking the DICOM consistency
When you generate a new series, the DICOM consistency of the
data may be compromised.
For example: Images of a study with different diagnoses.
You will be informed accordingly by a notice box.
Conrm the notice.
The inconsistent image will not be used.
For additional inconsistent images, notication will be limited to a
message in the footer of the function window.
Disabling the consistency check
If your system is not equipped with a DICOM connection and con-
sistency checks are unnecessary, use the program
Series_CreMod_Behaviour under SystemRun to switch off the
consistency check (chapter K.2).
The images of the patient can be combined as required without af-
fecting Numaris.
Series_CreMod_Behaviour
Rev. 07
Series Create
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.3
Sorting images in series
Originally, the images in series are arranged according to the sort
mode selected during registration. However, you can change the
sort with Series Arrange. At the same time, you can combine sev-
eral series into a single entity.
The original sort mode selected during registration can be re-
stored as required.
Please note: While the patient does not have to be the active view
patient, his/her series have to be contained on the hard disk
STORE.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
Rev. 07
Series Arrange
C.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting patients and series
Enter the name of the patient desired and the numbers of the se-
ries to be sorted in the Series Arrange window or select from the
lists.
O You can select whether you want to combine series
(page C.34).
O You can select new sort criteria (page C.35).
O You can restore the original sort (page C.38).
Next, you start the sorting procedure.
Starts sorting procedure
(page C.36).
Ends sorting procedure.
Go
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Alternative 1: Entering the data directly
Patient : Enter the patient identication of the desired patient.
Example: Demo
Series: Enter the series numbers.
Example: 7 (series 7)
7,8 (series 7 and 8)
79 (series 7 to 9)
* (all series)
Select the patient from the patient list.
The series list of the patient replaces the patient list.
Please note: The series list is displayed immediately if you have
explicitly specied a patient name.
Select the series from the series list (multiple entry
selection).
Query
Go
Rev. 07
Series Arrange
C.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the sort mode
You can select different measurement parameters as the sort crite-
ria and apply them to
O a single series or
O several series (combined series)
Combining series
Mode: Set the combination of series.
Image sort within individual series
Combination of several series to sort images in
common.
Combined series are identied with a back-slash \ and slash /
under the arrange column in the series list. In the image list they
are separated by commas.
When you page through combined series with Ima+/, the images
appear in the sequence set with the new sort criterion (chapter
D.3).
Please note: You cannot combine previously combined series a
second time. However you can cancel the previous combination
with the Reset Series button (page C.38).
Single
Combined
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the sort criteria
You can select several sort criteria simultaneously. The sequence
in which the images will be arranged depends on the order in
which you combine the sort criteria.
Arrange Criteria: Select the sort criteria in the sequence required by you.
According to slice position (AN); this
corresponds to the image numbering.
According to slice acquisition (CH).
According to echo time (TE).
According to repetition time (TR).
According to trigger delay time (TD).
According to contrast agent (CA).
Example : When you select echo time as your rst and anatomi-
cal as your second sort criterion, the images are rst sorted ac-
cording to echo time. Then, as a second step, all images having the
same echo time are sorted anatomically.
Should you select only one switch (e. g. AN), additional criteria
are automatically added (TE, TR). If you do not select one of the
switches, the images are automatically sorted according to their
image numbers.
Selected: The sequence of the sort criteria is displayed.
Example: AN,TE,TR
Anatomical
Chronological
Echo Time
Repetition Time
Trigger Delay
Contrast Agent
T I P
When you select just one
criterion, the program may
create unsuitable
combinations. Werecommend
that you use an additional
criterion.
Rev. 07
Series Arrange
C.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Performing the sort
Execute the sort as set by you.
The sort is explained by way of a double echo sequence with TE
1
and TE
2
:
1. Measurement :
4 slices SP1 SP4 with TR1, TE1, TE2.
2. Measurement :
4 slices SP1 SP4 with TR2, TE1, TE2.
Please note: In the examples shown, the AN setting (anatomical)
corresponds with the SP parameter (slice position).
Example 1: Anatomical sort
(according to slice position)
Mode:
Arrange Criteria:
Selected: TR, TE, AN
whereby: TR1<TR2, TE1<TE2, SP1<SP2<SP3<SP4.
Go
Combined
Anatomical
SP4
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP1
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP2
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP3
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
1st series 2nd series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Example 2: Sort according to echo time
Mode:
Arrange Criteria:
Selected: TR, AN, TE
whereby: TR1<TR2, SP1<SP2<SP3<SP4, TE1<TE2.
Example 3: Sort according to repetition time
Mode:
Arrange Criteria:
Selected: AN, TE, TR
whereby: SP1<SP2<SP3<SP4, TE1<TE2, TR1<TR2.
Combined
Echo Time
SP4
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP1
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP2
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP3
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
Combined
Repetition Time
SP4
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP1
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP2
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
SP3
TR1
TE1
TR2
TE2
TR1
TE2
TR2
TE1
Rev. 07
Series Arrange
C.38 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Cancelling the sort
Restores within the selected series the original image sort deter-
mined during registration. Combined series are separated again.
Cancels the sort mode in every series of the patient. The original
sort is restored.
Ending the sort mode
The function windowremains open so that you can performaddi-
tional sorts.
End the function.
The parameters set are stored.
Reset Series
Reset Patient
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.4
Modifying series
The Series Modify function allows you to copy patient images to
one of the patients series or modify the name of the series.
Please note: The patient need not be the active view patient, how-
ever, the images and series must be contained on the hard disk
STORE.
While you can add images, you cannot delete them (deleting im-
ages chapter F.4).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
Rev. 07
Series Modify
C.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You enter the patient and the series number in the Series Modify
window or you select them from the lists. Subsequently, you may
want to rename the series or add the numbers of the images to be
inserted into the series. The images can be selected via the image
list as well.
You may change as many series as required.
Opens selection list.
Initiates modications
(page C.44).
Ends modication of series.
Ends modication of series. The entries are retained.
Query
Go
Cancel
Exit
Modifying series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Alternative 1: Entering data directly
Patient : Enter the name of the desired patient.
Example: Demo
Series Number : Enter the series number.
Example: 17
Old Name: The previous name of the series is displayed here.
You must have conrmed your inputs with RETURN.
New Name: Enter the new series name by overwriting the old one.
Example: test
Add Image: Enter the numbers of the images to be added.
Example: 164,9799
When you entered a clearly dened patient name, the series list
will be displayed immediately.
Select from the lists.
You can select several images simultaneously in the image list by
clicking the respective line. Conrm your choice with Go.
Query
Rev. 07
Series Modify
C.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Performing modications
Conrm your inputs.
The images entered are added to the series selected. Also, a re-
named series will be saved under its new name.
Please note: When adding images, the DICOM consistency of the
data may be compromised. For further details, please refer to page
C.27.
Ending the function
The function window remains open so that you can modify addi-
tional series.
End the function.
The entered data are retained for subsequent function selection.
Go
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.5
Paging through series
The Series + and Series functions allow you to page through
the series list of the active view patient.
You may page through the series in a continuous loop. When you
have reached the last series and continue paging up, the program
will jump to the rst series. The opposite holds true when paging
down.
Series
1
Series
2
Series
3
Series
4
Series
5
Series
Series +
C H E C K L I S T
7 Active segment
contains an image.
Rev. 07
Series -/+
C.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Paging down through series
The Series function calls the previous series of the active viewpa-
tient.
You page in a continuous loop: If the active image belongs to the
rst series, the standard image of the last series for the patient will
be displayed.
To expedite paging, especially when you are paging through se-
ries repeatedly, use the function key on the keyboard or the func-
tion button in the function eld of the control area.
Each time you use the button, the programpages down one series.
The function will be terminated followed by an error message when:
No images exist for the patient, or no active view patient exists.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
SER-
Ser
Error message
?
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Paging up through series
The Series+ functions calls the next series of the active view pa-
tient.
You page in a continuous loop: If the active image belongs to the
last series, the standard image of the rst series for the patient will
be displayed.
To expedite paging, especially when you are paging through se-
ries repeatedly, use the function key on the keyboard or the func-
tion button in the function eld of the control area.
Each time you push the button, the program pages up one series.
The function will be terminated followed by an error message when:
No images exist for the patient, or no active view patient exists.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
SER+
Ser +
Error message
?
Rev. 07
Series -/+
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
C.6
Displayingimagepositions on
a localizer image
Frequently, the user would like to allocate individually-measured
slices to a localizer image on lm. You use the Series Display
function to superimpose slice positions and their image numbers
on a freely-selectable localizer image. This enables you to display
how images measured in one or more series intersect another im-
age position (interesting, for example, in MR angiography).
At rst, display the image in the active segment, that you
want to use as the localizer image.
Slice object Generic term referring to 2-D slices, 3-D slabs, and presaturation
slabs.
Use the function button in the function eld of the control area for
fastest access to the function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Create. . .
Arrange. . .
Modify . . .
Series
Series +
Display . . .
SeriesAn SerDis
C H E C K L I S T
7 Images werenot scrolled,
mirrored or rotated
7 Images intersect the
localizer image
Rev. 10
Series Display
C.62 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Series Display windowshows the data of the active viewpa-
tient. To provide increased clarity in the localizer image, standard
text in text blocks 3, 4, and 5 are switched off. Text block 2 only con-
tains the hospital name (Text in the image chapter J.2).
Name Name of active view patient
Number Patient number
Current Localizer Slice orientation of the localizer image
(must be perpendicular to the slice object to
be superimposed); here: transverse
Date Date of measurement
DOB Date of birth
Sex Patient sex
Ends the series display function.
Scroll bar
Scroll bar
List containingthepositioned
series after series selectionis
completed(pageC.64)
List for selectingindividual slices
(pageC.66)
Exit
Displaying image positions on a localizer image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
General operating sequence
Repeat these steps as necessary until you are satised with the re-
sults.
Display in the localizer image
Slices and single partitions are represented as solid lines showing
the center of the slice or partition. An image number at the border
is allocated to the slice or partition via a diagonal line. 3-D slabs
are represented by rectangles, and presaturation slabs are repre-
sented by dashed line rectangles.
Please note: To prevent overlapping graphics and image text, the
program does not display graphics close to the image text. How-
ever, there are two ways for displaying graphics in full:
O Change the position of the image numbers displayed (page C.69)
or
O Use the full screen display to increase the area for graphics
display.
Select the series to be displayed in the localizer image
(page C.64)
Select slices from the series which have been posted
(page C.66)
Modify the position of image numbers as needed and switch
off unwanted slices (page C.68)
Expose the localizer image with slice positions on lm
(Exposure Interactive chapter G.1)
Rev. 10
Series Display
C.64 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the series
Please note: The localizer image and slice object must be perpendic-
ular to one another. Otherwise, the slice object cannot be dis-
played.
Example: transverse localizer image
Open the Series Select list.
The list contains all series of the active view patient.
Select the series to be displayed from the list (multiple
selections possible).
Conrm your selections.
The list is closed.
The selected series are entered in the upper list of the Series Dis-
play window. The slice objects of these posted series are superim-
posed on the localizer image. The resulting display can be very
confusing.
The number of slices actually displayed depends on the default
setting (page C.69).
Select...
Scroll bar
Example: Series 2 is also
transverse and therefore
cannot be used
Apply
Currently Posted Series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
If the patient table was moved between the time the localizer im-
age was measured and the selected series was measured, a notice
box is displayed.
If you conrm the notice box with Ok, the drawings in the local-
izer image may not correspond with the slice objects actually mea-
sured.
You can also page through the series list of the selected patient.
Series previously selected are deselected.
The series with the next highest series number replaces the series
currently posted. The localizer image is adjusted accordingly.
If there is no posted series, you can selected the patients most re-
cent series using Series+.
Please note: The notice box displayed above can also appear when
you page through series.
Has the patient table
moved between
measurements
?
Series +
Rev. 10
Series Display
C.66 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from posted series
To improve clarity, you can use the Series Display window to
limit the display to the selected slices of a single posted series.
Select the series containing the slices to be displayed from
the upper list.
Slices in Selected Series The lower list displays all slices and partitions contained in the se-
lected series. The entries are highlighted dark.
Echo No.
Select apostedseries
Select or deselect individual
slices intheselectedseries
1 Our Example etc.
1 Our Example etc.
1 etc.
2 etc.
3 etc.
4 etc.
5 etc.
Currently Posted Series
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
For multiecho series only:
Displays the slices of the next echo.
The header of the lower list contains the echo number and total
number of echoes: Echo 1 of 1 etc.
The list is continually updated.
Selecting slices from the selected series
Indicate the slices to be superimposed on the localizer image
by selecting and deselecting slices in the lower list.
Conrm your selections.
The display in the localizer image is limited to the selected slices
of the individual series. The actual type of display depends on the
default settings, which may be modied as desired (page C.68).
These procedures can be repeated for other slices and series.
Echo +
Slices in Selected Series
Apply
Paging through echoes
Rev. 10
Series Display
C.68 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Modifying the type of display
The display of slice objects and their image numbers can be
adapted as desired (or set as the default).
Open the Set... window.
Modifying the image number display
Numbers Displayed Select the slices or partitions to be displayed with the image
number.
Do not display the image number
Image numbers of the rst and last
slice and/or partition
Image numbers of the rst, middle, and
last slice and/or partition
Image number of every other slice
and/or partition, beginning with the
rst; also displays the image number of
the last slice and/or partition
Displays all image numbers to the
extent possible
Set...
T I P
Overlapping image numbers
cannot be displayed. Set
Staggering to On.
None
First/Last
First/Last/Center
Every Second
All
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Number Position Selects position of image number. The switch which you can select
depends on the orientation of the slice/partition.
Staggering Staggers the display of image numbers, e.g., when they overlap
(On, Off).
Labeling Displaying slice objects as a slice position or image number.
Superimposing/switching off slices
Slices Displayed Determine the number of slices to be displayed.
Please note: The parameter is enabled once you select a new series
in the Series Select list.
If the slice gap falls below the minimum for the slices to be dis-
played, the program will skip some of the slices.
Sat Regions Displays/switches off presaturation slabs.
Left Right Top Bottom
Positionof thesliceor
partition
Correspondingswitch
Rev. 10
Series Display
C.610 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Temporarily storing parameters
Stores current parameters.
Loads the parameters stored last as the default values.
Accepting the parameters
Accept the parameters.
The window is closed. The drawings in the localizer image are
modied accordingly.
Set Defaults
Load Defaults
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
D Image
Image
D2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of the image functions
Using the image functions, you can display images individually
or automatically in series in the active segment.
Select
Selecting images of the active view patient ................................. D.1
Dynamic
Dynamic image display .................................................................. D.2
Image/Image+
Paging through individual images................................................ D.3
Image
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Dynamic . . .
Image
Image +
NUMARIS REFERENCE D.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
D.1
Selecting images of the active
view patient
Use the Image Select function for image selection from the active
view patient series.
The image list of the active view patient series appears.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Dynamic . . .
Image
Image +
ImaSel
C H E C K L I S T
7 Activesegment contains an
image.
Rev. 10
Image Select
D.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting from the image list
The image list contains all images of the series selected.
The image list also appears under
O Patient Select (chapter A.1)
O Series Select (chapter C.1)
Please note: The image list for an optical disk contains only the en-
tries for No. and Label.
Updates the image list. The images from the active series are
displayed.
Ends the selection of images.
Update
Cancel Exit
Selecting images of the active view patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Ima Image number
Typ Image type, indicates its origin:
CAR Cardiac evaluation (chapter E.16)
CRE Self-generated (chapter C.2)
DYN Dynamic evaluation (chapter E.14)
EXT External (chapter K.7)
FLQ Flow quantication (chapter E.17)
(not available for MAGNETOM Open)
FLT Filtered image (chapter E.13)
GRA The image is a graphic
MAG Magnied image (chapter E.1)
MAN Manipulated image (chapter E.9)
MIP (chapter E.7)
MPR (chapter E.6)
PHA Phase image
RAW Raw data
SEG Copied segment (page F.25)
TR Repetition time (ms)
TI Inversion time (ms)
FA Flip angle
TE Echo time (ms)
SL Slice thickness (mm)
SP Slice position (mm)
Ori Slice orientation:
SAG Sagittal
COR Coronal
TRA Transverse
OBL Oblique
View Patient position view direction
H Head rst (left for MAGNETOM Open)
F Feet left (left for MAGNETOM Open)
SP Supine
PR Prone
LL Left lateral
RL Right lateral
CR Cranial
CA Caudal
Coil Coil used
Label At least one image:
c copied to network node
All images:
A archived on OD/MOD
C copied to network node
F An error has occurred during the transfer. If this
happens, you can retrieve more detailed information
via DisplayNetlog (page K.210).
Examination Examination date and time
Comment Freely generated comments
Rev. 10
Image Select
D.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Sorting the image list
Originally, the images in the image list are sorted according to im-
age number (anatomical). You can use the Series Arrange func-
tion to select different sort criteria for the images in each series
(page C.34).
Displaying a specic image
If you would like to select and call an image from the list:
Click the corresponding line in the image list.
The image selected is displayed in the active segment. The image
list is closed, if the list is not pinned.
Paging up and down in series
You can page quickly through the series of the active patient.
Pages down in the series. The image list of the previous series
appears.
Pages up in the series. The image list of the next series appears.
<Ser
Ser >
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
D.2
Dynamic image display
Use the Image Dynamic function to rapidly move through se-
lected images belonging to the series containing the active image
(for example, for dynamic cardiac or joint series).
O Fast Paging by dragging the mouse and
O cine mode with innitely variable speed
Prior to dynamic image display, you have to load the images into
the image memory.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Dynamic . . .
Image
Image +
C H E C K L I S T
7 Patient from le saved
to hard disk STORE
7 Imagefromseriesshownin
active segment.
Rev. 07
Image Dynamic
D.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You select the images in the Dynamic Display window and load
them into the image memory. You can also specify the display de-
vice. Subsequently, you start Fast Paging or cine display.
Starts cine display
(page D.26).
Starts Fast Paging
(page D.24).
Ends the function.
Ends the dynamic function. Selected settings are retained.
Start/Stop
Fast Paging
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Loading images
Images from patient : The active view patient is entered here.
Image Numbers: All images of the active series are selected. If you would like to
limit the images selected:
Enter the desired image numbers.
Example: 3194
When the image number entered by you is too high or too low, the
program automatically corrects the number.
The number of images to be loaded is shown (in our example, 64).
Load the selected images into the image memory.
The images are now available as the working range for dynamic
display.
Selecting the output device
Output dest. : Select the output device for the image series.
On the monitor screen.
Only possible if the video recorder
is connected.
Displays tables and diagrams also stored
(for example with Cardio). This will slow
the display of the series.
Please note: When viewing images on the video recorder, ensure
that the program is not simultaneously processing a lm job.
Number of Images
to be loaded:
Load
Screen
Video
Graphics
Rev. 07
Image Dynamic
D.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Fast image paging
The loaded images are displayed in the active segment when Fast
Paging is used. Using the mouse you may dene speed and direc-
tion of Fast Paging.
Setting the speed for image display
Image Call Up: Select one of the default parameters for the speed of image
display.
Slower display.
Faster display.
You can change the speed during actual image display.
Starting fast image paging
Start Fast Paging.
The loaded images run through the segment. The mouse pointer
changes shape (<=>). If you would like to change the direction
and /or the speed:
Position the mouse pointer on the function button.
Press the SELECT mouse button and hold.
Pull the mouse to the left or right.
You will page through the images accordingly. The direction cor-
responds to the direction in which you pull the mouse (i.e. to the
left or right).
Paging ends as soon as you stop pressing the mouse button.
Slow
Fast
Fast Paging
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the image range
Working Range Selection: You can change the working range between image displays.
Restores the previous image range.
Loads the images of the current patient as the image range. Load
the images as described above.
Dyn. Series
Pat. Curr.
Rev. 07
Image Dynamic
D.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Cine mode
During the cine mode, the selected images are automatically dis-
played in the active segment. The display sequences available for
cine are circle or yoyo.
Cine: Set the direction of the cine sequence.
Display begins again from the rst image
after the last image is displayed.
Display direction reverses after the last
image is displayed.
Speed: Set the speed and direction of the cine mode with the slide
control.
Example: 10 Reverse at maximum speed
0 Stop
+10 Forward at maximum speed
Start the cine mode.
The images are displayed according to the values set. You can
change the speed range of the slide controls with the Image Call
Up Slow/Fast switch.
Stop the cine mode.
Please note: You can page through the images individually using
the Ima + and Ima buttons in the function eld of the control
area (chapter D.3). If the cine mode is still active, an error message
will appear. Image paging will begin only after the cine mode has
ended.
Circle
Yoyo
Start/Stop
Start/Stop
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
D.3
Paging through individual
images
The Image + and Image functions allow you to individually
page through images of the active view patient.
You consecutively call the images of a series or a combined series
of the active view patient. You can also page through them in a
continuous loop, that is, the program returns to the rst image
when you have reached the last image and continue to page up.
The reverse holds true when you page down through the images.
The chronological image sort may be changed with Series Ar-
range (chapter C.3).
Please note: According to the parameters set in Display Screen,
you may be able to page through one series only or through every
series of the active view patient (page J.18).
Image
1
Image
2
Image
3
Image
4
Image
5
Image
Image +
C H E C K L I S T
7 Active segment
contains an image.
Rev. 07
Images /+
D.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Paging down through images
The Image function selects the previous image of the active view
patient.
However, if the rst image of the series or patient is displayed, Im-
age will call the last image of the active series or active view pa-
tient (depending on the parameters set under Display Screen
page J.18).
To expedite paging, especially when you are paging through im-
ages repeatedly, use the function key on the keyboard
or the function button in the function eld of the control area. Each
time you use the button, the program pages down one image.
An error message will appear in the notice box when paging is
blocked because no images exist for the patient or there is no ac-
tive view patient.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Dynamic . . .
Image
Image +
IMA-
Ima
Paging is blocked
?
Paging through individual images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Paging up through images
The Image + function selects the next image of the active viewpa-
tient.
However, when the last image of the series or patient is already
displayed, Image + calls the rst image of the active series or ac-
tive viewpatient (depending on the parameters set under Display
Screen page J.18).
To expedite paging, especially when you are paging through im-
ages repeatedly, use the function key on the keyboard
or the function button in the function eld of the control area. Each
time you use the button, the program pages up one image.
An error message will appear in the notice box when paging is
blocked because no images exist for the patient or there is no ac-
tive view patient.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Select . . .
Dynamic . . .
Image
Image +
IMA+
Ima +
Paging is blocked
?
Rev. 07
Images /+
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E Evaluate
Evaluate
E2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summaryof theevaluationfunctions
Images obtained from the measurement are processed using the
numerous evaluation functions contained in the Evaluate menu.
The MR images shown in part E are examples only and do not
demonstrate the image quality of your system.
ROI An ROI (region of interest) is the selected region of an image on
which the evaluations are done.
Evaluate
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Flow Quantification. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Notice
To ensure accurate image allocation,
we recommend that you do not simultaneously
evaluate series of the same patient at the MRC and MRSC.
NUMARIS REFERENCE E3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image post-processing
The size or grey value of images is changed using the post-pro-
cessing functions.
Magnify
Magnifying image sections .............................................................E.1
Roam
Zooming and roaming the image...................................................E.2
Scroll
Scrolling images................................................................................E.8
Manipulate
Modifying image values..................................................................E.9
Filter
Filtering images (optional*) ..........................................................E.13
Dyn. Analysis
Dynamic evaluation .......................................................................E.14
Rev. 07
Evaluate
E4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image measurement and labelling
Distance
Measuring distances in the image................................................. E.3
Angle
Measuring angles in the image...................................................... E.4
Grid
Superimposing a grid on the image.............................................. E.5
Label
Marking and labelling image details .......................................... E.10
Image reconstruction
MPR
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) ................................................ E.6
MIP
Maximum intensity projections (MIP).......................................... E.7
Notice
Depending on the system, it is possible to have distortion on
the edge of the image eld (FOV)
(refer to System Guide page A.19).
The Evaluate Distance, Angle and Grid functions can cause
uneven results on the image edge.
Possible correction for MAGNETOM Vision:
Image correction with Large FoV Remapping
(page B.124).
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Flow Quantification. . .*)
*) Not MAGNETOM Open
NUMARIS REFERENCE E5
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image calculation
The image calculation functions are used to display statistical and
other calculated results as numerical values, in tables, or in
graphs.
Statistics
Statistical evaluation of individual images................................. E.11
Mean/Curve
Statistical comparison of multiple images ..................................E.12
Prole
Generating prole cuts...................................................................E.15
Cardiac
Cardiac evaluation..........................................................................E.16
Flow quantication
Flow quantication evaluation.....................................................E.17
Argus
Cardiac evaluation (ARGUS) ........................................................E.18
Please note: You do not call up this function via the menu, but
rather via SystemRun (chapter K.2).
Rev. 07
Evaluate
E6 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Exposing the evaluation text in the image
!
Various evaluation functions generate evaluation texts in the im-
age (e.g. Evaluate Angle, Distance or Statistics). The evaluation
text can overlap the image text when the image is exposed on lm,
making both texts illegible.
To prevent the texts from overlapping:
Display the evaluation text in the image (Display Text page
J.24).
The evaluation text is displayed directly next to the evaluation
graphics (lines, angles ROIs).
Subsequently, when you expose the image, the evaluation text and
image text will not affect each other.
Evaluation text is not shown in the image?
Check the setting under Display Text (page J.24).
Processing medical images from other systems
Medical images generated on other systems (CT or MR systems)
can be processed with the MAGNETOM.
In addition, the images may also contain graphics or may be mag-
nied. The image data can be loaded on the systemvia network or
optical disk.
Please note: When you copy images from the MAGNETOM to
GBS I/II via the network, the image number is lost.
!
NUMARIS REFERENCE E.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.1
Magnifying image sections
Use the Evaluate Magnify function to enlarge a section of the im-
age. Those sections of the original image outside the section will
be truncated.
You may also indicate whether subsequently selected images
should be automatically magnied.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Mag
Rev. 07
Evaluate Magnify
E.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
When you call the function an ROI is displayed in the active seg-
ment. Set the magnication factor in the Magnify window.
Starts the Magnify function.
.
Deletes all graphics in the active segment. The ROI is reset to its
default values.
Copies the ROI to another segment
(page E.14).
Terminates the Magnify function.
Ends the Magnify function. The values set are retained for subse-
quent function selection.
Go
Del All
Copy
Cancel
Exit
T I P
Standardtext maybeblanked
from the image using the
Display Text function(chapter
J .2).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Magnifying individual images
Factor : Set the magnication factor.
Magnication factor of 1.25, etc.
You may also enter any value between 1.01 and 8.00, accurate to
two decimal places. Complete input by pressing the RETURN key.
The size of the ROI is adjusted automatically.
Start the magnication.
The ROI is magnied to ll the entire segment. While graphics are
enlarged as well (if they are completely within the ROI), the width
of lines remains unchanged.
You can also start magnication by double clicking the mouse but-
ton when the pointer is positioned in the active image.
The magnication factor and size of the ROI depend on one
another :
O The higher the magnication factor, the smaller the ROI.
O The larger the ROI, the smaller the magnication factor.
You can select different magnication factors for images in differ-
ent segments because Magnify affects the active segment only.
1.25
1
Original image
magnicationfactor 1.25
2
Magniedimage
Go
T I P
To magnify an image again:
Exit thefunctionwithExit and
call thefunction. Youmaynow
magnify the image again.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Magnify
E.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Individual manipulations
Moving the ROI
Position the mouse pointer within the ROI.
Move the ROI to the desired position by dragging the mouse.
The ROI is moved to the desired position. Its size does not change.
Changing the size of the ROI
Move the pointer to one of the borders of the ROI and drag the
mouse in the desired direction.
The ROI is enlarged or reduced accordingly; the aspect ratio and
the center of the ROI are maintained. After the mouse button is re-
leased, the magnication factor is correspondingly modied in
the function window.
Copying an ROI into another segment
Activate the copy mode.
Select the target segment with the mouse.
The ROI appears in the other segment as well.
Copy
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the original image
Please note: If you want to magnify the image by a different mag-
nication factor without exiting the function, you must display
the original image.
Display the original image.
You may now repeat the procedure for positioning the ROI.
You can also undo the magnication by double-clicking in the ac-
tive image.
Retaining the magnication values for subsequent
image selection
Hold Data: Indicate whether you want to maintain the magnication data
for subsequent image selection.
Retains the values.
When additional images of the same patient are selected while the
active segment is being maintained, they are magnied according
to the selected values, even after the Magnify function is ended.
Does not retain the values.
As long as the Magnify function is active, the ROI will be dis-
played in all images selected subsequently.
Original
YES
NO
Rev. 07
Evaluate Magnify
E.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Magnifying a range of images
You select a range of images and magnify the section specied by
the ROI within all selected images.
Switch to magnication in background.
Please note : The graphics in the original images will be deleted
when magnifying in background. Anotice box is displayed which
must be conrmed by you.
Indicate whether the original images should be overwritten
by the magnied ROIs.
Overwrite the original images. In this case, all image
information outside the ROI is truncated.
Please note: The original images cannot be overwritten if they are
in an exposure or printer job list.
The magnied ROIs should be stored as new images in
the series. The original images are retained.
Image Range: Enter the range of image numbers.
Example: 1018,20,2228
You may also open the image list. Select the images desired (mul-
tiple selections possible).
In the Magnify window: Start magnication in background.
The command can be performed within the image list or from the
function window.
Magnied images are generated fromthe ROIs in the selected im-
ages. Depending on the parameters set, either the original images
are overwritten or the magnications are stored as new images
and appended at the end of the respective series.
Information regarding the background magnication procedure
is displayed in the message eld of the control area.
Magnify in
Background:
YES
Overwrite
original image:
YES
NO
Query
Go
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.2
Zooming and roaming the
image
The Evaluate Roam function allows you to zoom the active im-
age and move it with the mouse in any direction under the seg-
ment. The image remains completely intact. The segment acts as a
magnifying glass or view window.
Please note: The Roam function changes the grey values of an im-
age. Therefore, functions such as Statistics, which evaluate the
pixel information, cannot be applied to roamed images.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
Rev. 07
Evaluate Roam
E.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Using the Roamwindow, you either select the zoomfactor for the
active image from one of the six default parameter switches, or
you increase/decrease the zoom factor step-by-step with the two
zoom function buttons.
The Roam function differs from the Magnify function as follows :
O With the Roam function, the entire image is enlarged under the
segment. The image itself remains completely intact ; however,
only part of the enlarged image is visible at one time.
O The Magnify function enlarges a specic part of the image only.
Those sections which are not displayed are truncated.
Please note : If you subsequently copy or photograph a zoomed im-
age, image information not displayed will be lost as well.
Invisible
Segment
Image
ZOOM
Zooming and roaming the image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Zooming images
Current Zoom Factor : Select the zoom factor for the image.
Zooms the image by a factor of 1.5 etc.
The active image is zoomed immediately. Graphics are enlarged
as well.
Zooming step-by-step
You may use the function buttons to increase and decrease the
zoom factor of the image step-by-step.
Increases the zoom factor of an image by one step (for example,
from 2.0 to 3.0).
Decreases the zoom factor of an image by one step (for example,
from 2.0 to 1.5).
Displays the original image.
1.5
Zoom up
Zoom down
Original
Original
Rev. 07
Evaluate Roam
E.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Roaming the image under the segment
Using the mouse, drag the image under the segment to the
desired position.
When you use a high zoomfactor, you have to repeatedly drag the
mouse over the image, because the image will shift only if the
mouse pointer is located in the active segment.
Segment
Image
After zooming and roaming
T I P
You can blank out standard
text in the image with the
J .2).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.3
Measuring distances in the
image
Distances in the MR-image can be measured with millimeter accu-
racy using the Evaluate Distance function. You may measure up
to seven lines. You can also determine the angle between each dis-
tance line and a horizontal line. The scale is absolute, that is, the
actual distance is displayed. The lines are drawn in with the
mouse.
The results of the distance measurement are displayed in the func-
tion window. The evaluation text appears in the image.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Distance
E.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Distance window contains a result eld which displays the
evaluation text. The distance values measured are labelled from
Di 1 to Di 7 and are specied in centimeters to one decimal place.
Returns you to draw mode, if necessary.
Selects a graphic for modication, shift, delete, or copy.
Deletes the graphics selected.
Deletes all graphics in the active segment.
Copies the graphics selected to another segment (page E.36).
Terminates the Distance function.
Ends the Distance function. The parameters set are retained for
subsequent function selection.
Results
eld
Draw
Select
Delete
Del All
Copy
Cancel
Exit
Measuring distances in the image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying images with graphics
If you would like to call images that are already stored with their
corresponding distance lines :
Only display lines added in the image via
File Copy Segment.
Please note: New lines drawn into the active segment are deleted.
Use the lines currently drawn in the image and ignore
the stored lines.
Please note: The images must fulll the same requirements as for
copying lines (page E.36).
Creating distance lines
Centerpoint : Indicate whether the center point of distance lines should be dis-
played.
Display the center point.
The center point is displayed as a small square in the distance line.
Do not display the center point.
Endpoints: Select the form of the end points of the distance lines.
Display end points as crosses.
Do not display end points.
These parameters may be subsequently modied. If parameters
are changed, all lines previously drawn in are modied accord-
ingly.
Image Call up
with Graphics:
Yes
No
T I P
J .2).
On
Off
Cross
None
Rev. 07
Evaluate Distance
E.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Drawing and measuring lines
Select draw mode, if necessary.
Drag the mouse from the start to the end point.
The program will draw a straight line from the start to the end
point. The distance value is continually updated and displayed
near the end point.
The line is dened as soon as you stop pressing the mouse button.
The rst line is labelled 1; all subsequent lines will be numbered
chronologically up to 7. The labels and the corresponding distance
values are displayed in the evaluation text, in each case in the re-
sult eld of the function window.
You may draw up to seven lines at a time. If you want to draw an
additional line, you must delete one of the existing seven. All dis-
tance lines displayed can be processed subsequently.
Draw
17.5
Measuring distances in the image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Measuring the angle of the line with respect to a
horizontal line
The horizontal angle is the angle formed between the distance line
and a horizontal line. It is measured counterclockwise and may
have a value between 0.1 and 180.0 degrees.
Horizontal Angle: I Switches on angle measurement.
The value of the angle with respect to the horizontal line is dis-
played in degrees at the start point of the line.
Switches off angle measurement.
Angle measurement may subsequently be switched on or off. All
lines drawn will be adjusted automatically.
On
Off
T I P
Use theAngle function to
measure arbitrary angles
(chapter E.4).
Rev. 07
Evaluate Distance
E.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Modifying and copying lines
An individual distance line must be selected before it can be pro-
cessed (a selected line is indicated by grab handles).
Selecting distance lines
Activate the selection mode.
Select the line desired with the mouse.
The line is indicated by grab handles.
Moving a line
Click the mouse on a point on the line and pull it in the
direction desired.
The line is moved to the new position.
Modifying a line
Click one of the grab handles and drag the mouse into the
desired direction.
The line is rotated about the start point and changed in length.
Copying a line
Please note: Lines can be copied within the same series only. In ad-
dition, the following parameters must match in the source and tar-
get segments:
O Slice orientation
O Slice position
Click in another segment.
The line is copied into the new segment. You can select the copied
line and move or modify it.
Select
Copy
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.4
Measuringangles intheimage
Angles in an MR image can be measured within 1/10 of a degree.
Use the Evaluate Angle function to measure up to 7 angles in the
active segment. You draw in the angles with the mouse.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Angle
E.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Angle windowcontains a result eld for the angle values. The
angles measured are labelled from An1 to An7, and displayed
from 0 to 180 degrees.
Returns to draw mode, if necessary.
Selects graphic for modication, move, deletion, or copying.
Deletes the graphics selected.
Copies the graphics selected to another segment
(page E.44).
Terminates the Angle function.
Ends the Angle function. The parameters set are retained for sub-
sequent function selection.
(page E.33).
Results
eld
Draw
Select
Delete
Del All
Copy
Cancel
Exit
Image Call up with
Graphics :
T I P
Standard text may be blanked
Display Text function (chapter
J .2).
Measuring angles in the image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Drawing and measuring the angle
Select draw mode, if necessary.
Use the mouse and draw the two lines of the angle in the image.
The two lines do not have to intersect or touch. Not until the draw-
ing procedure is nished are they considered to form an angle.
Drag the mouse from the start point to the end point of the
rst line.
Please note: If you interrupt drawing with another action, the rst
line disappears if you have not begun drawing the second line.
Repeat the procedure for the second line.
While you are drawing the second line, the angle value is super-
imposed at the arrow point.
You may drawa total of seven angles in one image. The rst angle
is numbered 1. Subsequent angles are numbered up to 7. To draw
an additional angle, one of the seven existing angles must be de-
leted.
Draw
Therst lineis xedinpositionandends withan
arrowpoint.
like this or this
52.3
41.5
Rev. 07
Evaluate Angle
E.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Modifying and copying angles
An individual angle must be selected in order to be processed (in-
dicated by grab handles).
Selecting an angle
Switch to Select mode.
Select the desired angle with the mouse.
Both lines of the angle are marked with grab handles.
Moving the entire angle
Drag one line of the selected in the direction desired.
The entire angle shifts to the new position.
Modifying the lines of an angle
Drag the grab handle on the line to be modied in the
direction desired.
The length and direction of the line are modied accordingly.
Copying an angle
Please note: Angles can be copied within the same series only. In
addition, the following parameters must match in the source and
target segments:
O Slice orientation
O Slice position
O Magnication factor
The angle is copied into the new segment. You can select the cop-
ied angle and move or modify it.
Select
Copy
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.5
Superimposing a grid on the
image
It is sometimes necessary to measure distances in the image in re-
lationship to the magnet isocenter. Use the Evaluate Grid func-
tion to superimpose a scale grid on the active image for these mea-
surements. The scale grid comprises a coordinate system and grid
points which may be displayed if desired.
The function may not be used for double oblique slices.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
The Evaluate Grid function is a pure evaluation function and
should not be used for patient positioning.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Grid
E.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Select the grid scale in the Grid window. The grid can be scaled so
that it corresponds to either
O the distance within the image plane (even oblique), or
O the coordinates of the magnetic eld.
Displays the coordinate system and grid point as set
(page E.54).
Terminates the Evaluate Grid function.
Ends the Evaluate Grid function. The parameters set are retained.
Go
Cancel
Exit
Delete All
T I P
J .2).
Superimposing a grid on the image
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scaling the grid
Scaling Type: Indicate how the grid should be scaled.
Use absolute distances in the (oblique) image
plane as the scale. The intersecting point of the
two coordinate axes corresponds to the magnetic
isocenter.
Use projected distances of the magnetic eld
coordinates to the (oblique) slice as the scale. The
scaling marks on the grid axes are farther apart.
Please note: Because of the projection, the scaling in magnetic eld
coordinates is applicable for oblique slices only.
Displaying grid points
Fence: To select whether or not to display grid points:
Grid points are displayed.
Grid points are not displayed.
Distance
0
oblique slice
Projection
0
oblique slice
On
Off
Rev. 07
Evaluate Grid
E.54 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Superimposing the coordinate
system
Superimpose the coordinate system on the image.
The coordinate system is superimposed on the image. The origin
is located at the lower left corner of the segment. The current posi-
tion is displayed in millimeters in the default coordinates at the
upper right next to the vertical axis.
Move the coordinate system by dragging the mouse in the
desired direction.
Please note: Whenever you switch image text on or off, the coordi-
nate system is refreshed.
Go
Thegridpoints aresuperimposed
ontheimageas showninthegure
above.
Thedisplayof thecoordinate
systempositionis continually
updated. Thedisplayindicates the
positionof thepoint inrelationship
to theselectedcoordinatesystem.
C H E C K L I S T
7 The image must be of
paraxial or orthogonal
orientation.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.6
Multiplanar reconstruction
(MPR)
The Evaluate MPR function reconstructs new images from 3-D or
multislice series, generating so-called MPR series.
Please note: MPR is possible only on STORE.
The function switches automatically to 4 segment display.
Only at the MRSC: Use the function button in the function eld of
the control area instead of the menu for fastest access to the func-
tion.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
MPR. .
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.62 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting base images
First you have to select the base images and load theminto the im-
age memory.
Prerequisites The base images must fulll the prerequisites in the CHECKLIST.
The number of base images that can be loaded depends on the
processor conguration and the size of the le.
You may also use a results image generated with the MIP function
as the base image. The MIP data record is transferred automati-
cally. Orthogonal and curved cuts are not possible in an MIP im-
age.
Terminates loading.
Selecting base images from the lists
In the patient list you can select another patient. When you are in
the series list of the patient, select a complete 3-D or multislice se-
ries (Multislab : select several series and then Go). Query moves
you to the image list where you dene the range of images.
IntheMPR: Image Loading
windowdataregardingtheactive
series aredisplayed.
Cancel
Query
C H E C K L I S T
7 images fromSTORE
7 same FOV
7 same matrix
7 same slice orientation
7 same slice gap
(or multiple thereof)
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR)
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Directly selecting base images
Patient : Enter the name of the desired patient.
Series: Enter the number of the series to be processed.
Multislab : As the base image you can use series with multiple
slabs, or use multiple series. For example: 2,5,9.
Images: Enter the number range of images required.
Loading base images
Load the base images selected into the image memory.
The system checks whether the base images meet the previously
described requirements. If yes, the images are loaded in the image
memory. The numbers of the images are shown in the message
eld of the control area. The images will be displayed in the rst seg-
ment.
If not, an error message is displayed in the footer.
Terminates loading and allows you to work with the images pre-
viously loaded. There will be a slight delay in terminating the
function, because the programwill rst complete the image recon-
struction in progress.
If it is not possible to load all of the images, you will be informed accord-
ingly via a notice box. Conrm with Ok or: request additional informa-
tion via the Details button. The Image Loading Information
window provides you with the information why certain images could not
be loaded.
Repeat image selection, if necessary.
Load
SAG COR
TRA
After loadingtheimages, therst segment will
containthebaseimageandtheother two segments
will eachcontainanorthogonal cut throughthebase
images.
Thecuts havetheimagenumber 0.
Break
Not all images have
been loaded
?
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.64 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the MPR window to select the type of cut denition and gen-
eration, as well as whether the procedure should run in fore-
ground or background.
Stores the MPR series (page E.628).
Administers reconstruction protocols (page E.625).
Loads new base images. The MPR image loading window is dis-
played (page E.62).
Switches to the Evaluate MIP function (chapter E.7). The existing
input data is transferred to the function.
Terminates the MPR function.
Ends the MPR function.
Please note: When you leave the function with Cancel or Exit, the
original setting of the image text (on or off) is restored.
Thickslices (pageE.621)
Store
Calc. Prot.
Load Ima
MIP
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Positioning cuts
Positioning Orthogonal positioning (not possible with
MIP base image) (page E.66).
Oblique positioning
(page E.68).
Double-oblique positioning
(page E.610).
Curved cuts
(page E.612).
Generating a series of cuts
Dene After a planar cut is positioned, you can generate a series of ro-
tated or parallel cuts :
Generates a series of rotated (i.e. radial) cuts
(page E.614).
Generates a series of parallel cuts
(page E.617).
Finally, you start the reconstruction of the series (page E.622).
The generated cuts are temporarily stored in the image memory as
an MPR series.
Please note: To permanently store an MPR series, it must be saved
to the hard disk STORE.
Please note: In case you superimposed a scale grid while working
with the MPR function (Evaluate Grid chapter E.5) you will have
to reactivate the MPRwindowby clicking its header. The grid dis-
appears.
3D Cursor
Oblique
Dbl. Oblique
Curved Cuts
Rotated
Parallel
Start
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.66 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Orthogonal positioning
(not for MIP)
The rst segment displays the base image ; the second and third
segments display orthogonal cuts through the base image. The
gure below displays a sagittal 3-D series as an example.
Start with the orthogonal positioning.
3-D pointer The 3-Dpointer (shaped like a large cross) is superimposed on the
image.
When you shift the 3-D pointer in any image, the cuts are recalcu-
lated and displayed in the other two images.
3D Cursor
1
Sagittal reference image
2
Coronal cut
3
Transverse cut
Thecross of the3-Dpointer
displays thesliceplanes of the
neighboringimages. Thesmall
squareis themidpoint of the3-D
pointer andtheintersectionof all
threeimageplanes.
1 2
3
C H E C K L I S T
7 Load base image from 3-D
or multisliceseries, or from
multislab.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the reference image
Reference image A reference image is the image used as the basis for each type of
cut calculation. In our example, the reference image is the active
image the sagittal base image. The reference image can be the
base image or a cut.
Select the desired reference image with the mouse.
Moving cut planes in parallel
Single cut plane Move the pointer to the cut line in the reference image and
drag the cut line in the desired direction via the mouse.
Example: Move the horizontal cut line downward.
The plane of the corresponding transverse image moves accord-
ingly. The newcut is calculated and displayed. You may also page
in the reference image using Ima and Ima +.
Both cut planes Move the mouse pointer to the intersecting point of the 3-D
pointer; drag the intersecting point in the desired direction
via the mouse.
You can also click on a specic point in the reference image.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.68 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Oblique positioning
Please note: When you change the type of cut positioning, the new
cuts will overwrite the old cuts.
Start with the oblique positioning.
Planar cuts are displayed in the rst three segments.
Reconstruction of the reconstruction: An oblique cut can be posi-
tioned using a previously reconstructed oblique or double-ob-
lique image. The previously reconstructed image is transferred to
the rst segment as the reference image.
Select one of the images as the reference image.
The reference image is transferred to the rst segment. A horizon-
tal cut line indicates the plane of the planar cut displayed in the
second segment. The cut line in the reference image may be
moved in parallel or rotated about its axis.
The image in the third segment is a copy of the cut. The dashed cut
line represents the plane of the reference image. You can move the
cut line in parallel, however, you cannot rotate it.
Moving the cut in parallel
Click and hold the point of rotation on the cut line in the
reference image. Move the line by dragging the mouse in the
desired direction.
The cut line and point of rotation are moved in parallel. The corre-
sponding orthogonal cut is recalculated and displayed in the sec-
ond and third segment.
As an alternative, you can just click the new point in the reference
image.
Oblique
T I P
Click 3D Cursor rst if you
want to select a reference
imagewhichis basedonthree
orthogonal cuts. The system
thendisplaysthoseorthogonal
images usedto denethelast
orthogonal cuts.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Rotating the cut
To determine the angle of rotation of the oblique cut, rotate the cut
line in the reference image about its axis of rotation.
Click the cut line (away fromthe point of rotation) and rotate
it in the desired direction.
To move the cut of the reference image in parallel :
Move the dashed cut line in the copied cut.
1
Reference image
2
(Oblique) cut
3
Copy of the cut
Thecut lineis rotatedandtilted
accordingly. Theimageof the
obliquecut is calculatedand
displayedinthesecondandthird
segments.
1 2
3
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.610 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Double-oblique positioning
Please note: The Evaluate Grid function cannot be applied to dou-
ble-oblique cuts.
Start with the double-oblique positioning.
Planar cuts are displayed in the rst three segments.
Reconstruction of the reconstruction: A double-oblique cut can be
positioned using a previously reconstructed oblique or double-
oblique image. The previously reconstructed image is transferred
to the rst segment as the reference image.
You need two reference images in order to position a cut.
Select one of the images as the rst reference image.
The rst reference image is transferred to the rst segment. A hor-
izontal cut line indicates the plane of the planar cut displayed in
the second segment. The vertical cut line represents the plane of
the third segment. The cut lines in the reference image may be
moved parallel or rotated about its axis.
The second reference image is displayed in the third segment. It is
perpendicular to the images in the rst and second segments. It
also displays a cut line which may be moved in parallel or rotated
about its axis.
Both reference images contain dashed lines representing the plane
of the other reference image.
Moving the cut in parallel
Click and hold the point of rotation on the cut line in the
reference image. Move the line by dragging the mouse in the
desired direction.
The cut line and point of rotation are moved in parallel. The corre-
sponding orthogonal cut as well as the other reference image are
recalculated and displayed.
Dbl. Oblique
T I P
Click 3D Cursor rst if you
want to select a reference
imagewhichis basedonthree
orthogonal cuts. The system
thendisplaysthoseorthogonal
images used to position the
last orthogonal cuts.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Rotating the cut
Click the cut line (away fromthe point of rotation) and rotate
it in the desired direction.
Repeat the cut rotation procedure in the second reference
image.
The cut is now in double-oblique orientation.
To move the rst reference image in parallel :
Move the dashed cut line in the second reference image.
Alternative: In the rst active segment with Ima- or Ima+.
The rst reference image is replaced by a new cut.
1
First reference image
2
(Double-oblique) cut
3
Second reference image
Thecut lineis rotatedandtilted
accordingly. Thecut andtheother
referenceimagearerecalculated
anddisplayed. Thecut is nowin
single-oblique orientation.
1 2
3
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.612 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Positioning curved cuts
(not for MIP)
Start with the positioning of the curved cuts.
Orthogonal cuts are displayed in the rst three segments. Single
oblique curved cuts may be positioned in orthogonal cuts only.
Select an image as the reference image.
The reference image is moved to the rst segment. The other seg-
ments are deleted.
Drawing the curve
Draw an irregular curve in the image (Working with Numaris
page A.59).
You can end the curve by double-clicking. The corresponding cut
is calculated and displayed in the second segment.
Click Curved Cuts with the mouse to draw a new curve. The
curve which has been drawn in is deleted.
Curved Cuts
1
Reference image
2
Cut
1 2
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Moving the curve in parallel
Drag the curve in the desired direction.
Click the curve with the mouse, then drag it in the direction de-
sired.
The entire curve is moved. The cut is recalculated and displayed.
Moving an evaluation section along a curve
Only a section of the curve will be evaluated if the curve is too
long. The section is highlighted. You can move the highlighted
section to any position along the curve :
Drag the arrow at the beginning of the curved section in the
desired direction.
The cut is recalculated and displayed.
Rotating the curve
Rotate Result Indicate by what angle the calculated curve section should be
rotated.
Do no rotate the curve.
Rotates the curve 90 degrees
(in counterclockwise direction).
Rotates the curve 180 degrees.
Rotates the curve 270 degrees.
0
90
180
270
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.614 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating rotated series
Once you have positioned a planar cut, you may generate a series
of rotated cuts. Subsequently, you can store the series as a CALCU-
LATION PROTOCOL (page E.625).
Please note: If you already completed dening a series of rotated
cuts, you must return to positioning planar cuts.
Dene Switch to generating rotated cuts.
Establishing the axis of rotation and the reference
image
Dene the axis of rotation.
Select the reference image.
Drag the axis of rotation to the position desired.
Rotated
The eld
changes as
shown
Def. Axis
Axis of rotation
Thereferenceimagemoves to the
rst segment. Inthecenter of the
referenceimage, theaxis of
rotationis displayedas asmall
circle.
C H E C K L I S T
7 Planar cuts have been
dened (orthogonal,
oblique, or double-oblique)
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dening cuts
You generate a rotated series by establishing the rst and last cut.
The area in between these cuts is lled equally with slices.
Start to set the rst cut.
A cut line through the axis of rotation is displayed in the image.
Start to set the second cut line.
A second cut line is superimposed over the rst.
Rotate the cut line to the position desired.
The region between the rst and last cut lines is automatically
lled with cut lines of equal angle value, based on the value en-
tered in the Angle Increment eld.
Def. Start
The cut lines can be rotated
with the mouse
Def. End
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.616 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the distribution of rotated cuts ROTATED SERIES
There are two ways to increase the accuracy of cut positioning:
No. of Images: EITHER: Enter the number of cut lines desired, or change the
value with the arrows.
The value next to Angle Increment adjusts automatically.
Angle Increment OR: Enter the value for the angle (in degrees) between two
adjacent cut lines.
The value next to No. of Images adjusts automatically.
The last cut is repositioned automatically if you change the value
for the angle and the number of cuts and the cuts no longer t into
the area dened.
You can also subsequently modify all cuts by rotating the rst or
last cut line with the mouse. The values adjust automatically.
Equally distributing the rotated cuts
Instead of lling in cuts between two cut lines, you can equally
distribute cuts over a circle (i.e. 360 degrees).
Set the axis of rotation and the rst cut line.
Equally distribute the cuts specied under No. of Images.
The rotated (i.e. radial) cuts are distributed equally over 360 de-
grees.
360
T I P
Should you make a mistake,
delete the cut lines with
Delete.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating parallel series
Once you have positioned a planar cut, you may generate a series
of parallel cuts. Subsequently, you can store the series as a CAL-
CULATION PROTOCOL (page E.625).
Please note: If you already completed dening a parallel series,
you must return to positioning planar cuts.
Oblique/double-oblique : The series generated are positioned
parallel to the results image.
Orthogonal: The series are parallel to the base images measured.
Dene Switch to generating parallel cuts.
Dening cuts
You only dene the rst and last cuts. The region in between is
lled with cuts automatically.
Dene the rst cut.
Parallel
The eld
changes as
shown
Def. Start
Acut lineappears inthereference
image. Youcanmovethecut lines
withthemouse.
C H E C K L I S T
7 Planar cuts have been
dened (orthogonal,
oblique, or double-oblique)
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.618 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dene the last cut.
A second cut line is superimposed over the rst.
Move the cut line to the position desired.
The area between the rst and last cut is lled with cut lines in ac-
cordance with the distance value set. The total number of cuts is
indicated in the No. of Images eld; the Dist. of Cuts eld indi-
cates the distance between the individual cuts.
Changing the distribution of parallel cuts
There are two ways to position cuts more precisely:
No. of Images: EITHER: Enter the number of cuts desired or use the arrows
to select the number.
The value next to Dist. of Cuts changes automatically.
Dist. of Cuts OR: Enter the distance between cuts.
The value next to No. of Images changes automatically.
You can subsequently change all cuts by shifting the rst or last
cut line. The values adjust automatically.
Def. End
T I P
If youmakeamistake, youcan
Delete.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating a series of parallel
curved cuts
Once you have positioned a curved cut, you may generate a series
of parallel curved cuts. Subsequently, you can store the series as a
CALCULATION PROTOCOL (page E.625).
Please note: If you already completed dening parallel curved
cuts, you must return to positioning curved cuts.
Dening cuts
In the reference image:
Use the mouse to position the curved cut as required.
Please note: The curvature should not be too sharp.
Dene the curved cut as the center cut of the series.
Dene the slice coverage.
Move the mouse perpendicular to the curved cut.
Boundary cut lines appear on both sides of the center cut.
As soon as you release the mouse, the area between the rst and
last cut is lled with cut lines in accordance with the distance
value set. The total number of cuts is indicated in the No. of Im-
ages eld; the Dist. of Cuts eld indicates the distance between
the individual cuts.
The number of cut lines between the center cut and both cut line
boundaries is identical. If the total number of slices is an even
number , the center cut will be shown as a dotted line, because it is
not part of the series.
The eld
changes as
shown
Def. Start
T I P
If youmakeamistake, youcan
Delete.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.620 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the distribution of parallel curved cuts
There are two ways to position cuts more precisely:
No. of Images: EITHER: Enter the number of cuts desired (max. 15) or use
the arrows to select the number.
The value next to Dist. of Cuts changes automatically.
Dist. of Cuts OR: Enter the distance between cuts.
The value next to No. of Images changes automatically.
You can subsequently change all cuts by shifting the rst or last
cut line. The values adjust automatically.
Smoothing curved cuts
If you are not satised with the cut lines, you can smooth them as
required. However, you cannot undo the smoothing.
Smooth the curved cuts. Smooth
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating thick slices
Usually, the slice thickness of cuts is automatically calculated ac-
cording to pixel size, slice/slab distance, and the angles of rotation
and tilt. However, you can change the slice thickness as required.
Thickness: Enter a new value in millimeters.
The minimumand maximumfor this value depend upon the base
images selected.
Press the RETURN key.
The system checks whether the slice thickness specied is less
than the slice/slab distance.
Please note: If the Thick slices switch is already set to On, the cal-
culation begins immediately after the RETURN key is pressed.
Positioning thick slices
Please note: The following calculation is very time-consuming.
Thick slices: Set the switch to On.
The system checks whether the slice thickness specied is less
than the slice/slab distance. If so, thick slices are interpolated
from several thinner slices.
The slice/slab distance is automatically set to a whole number
multiple of the slice thickness.
The cut positioning may then be stored as a calculation protocol
(page E.625).
On
C H E C K L I S T
7 Parallel series of
orthogonal slices has been
generated
7 TheThick slices switch is
initially set to Off
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.622 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the reconstruction
You can generate the MPR series in foreground or background.
If you have dened several series, they will be reconstructed in the
order in which they were dened.
MPR in foreground
Calculate Set the procedure to run in foreground.
Begin the reconstruction.
The images are displayed in the active segment and stored to a
temporary calculation protocol "MPR_actual" (for planar cuts
only).
Interrupts reconstruction. Calculation in progress is completed
prior to interrupt. You should subsequently delete all slice deni-
tions with Delete if you do not want to continue the reconstruc-
tion.
Continues the reconstruction procedure where it was interrupted.
Foregr.
Start
Break
Continue
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MPR in background
Multiple jobs may be started in background.
Calculate Set the procedure to run in background.
Conrm the background mode.
The MPR: Background Calculation window is displayed.
Series: Enter a name for the series to be generated.
Anotice box is displayed if the series name already exists. You can
either terminate the procedure or append the new images to the
existing series.
Comment: Enter comments if required.
Start background calculation of the MPR series.
The job is sent to a wait queue. The calculated cuts are not shown
on-screen. Instead they are automatically saved to STORE.
Terminating the background job
Use the Abort button in the control area.
Please note: If you exit the MPRfunction and subsequently call the
MIP function while an MPR background job is running, MIP will
automatically use the MPRimages. To use other images, you must
wait until the background job is completed.
Backgr.
Start
Start
Abort
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.624 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying cuts
You can viewthe cuts in Loop, Yo-Yo or Fast. For a description of
cine, please refer to page D.26 Image Dynamic.
Display Switches to Fast Paging.
Speed: The sliding control allows you to set the speed and direction of the
paging.
Output Destination Select the output device for the image series.
Only possible if the video recorder
is connected.
Displays tables and diagrams also stored.
This will slow the display of the series.
Cuts not calculated previously will be calculated during their dis-
play, causing a slight delay in the process.
Fast
Screen
Video
Graphics
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing calculation protocols
Open the Calculation Protocol list.
You use this list to load, store, or delete calculation protocols for
dened series. Once a series has been dened, it can be used as the
basis for calculations of additional cuts, including the generation
of thick slices.
Returns to the MPR window.
Calc. Prot.
Cancel
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.626 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Loading calculation protocols
Ensure that your rst reference image is located in the rst seg-
ment prior to opening the list.
Set the switch to Group.
All groups are displayed in the list.
Select the desired group.
Set the switch to Protocol
(abbreviated procedure : double clicking).
The protocols for the group are displayed.
Select the protocol from the list.
Load the protocol (abbreviated procedure : double clicking).
The MPR window displays the new values. The reference image
displays the cut lines of the calculation protocol.
Reconstruction is not started automatically. You can modify the re-
construction parameters as desired.
Deleting calculation protocols
First select the corresponding group.
Set the switch to Protocol.
Select one or more protocols.
Start deleting.
You will have to conrm the deletion in a notice box.
Group
Protocol
Load Prot.
Protocol
Delete Prot.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storing calculation protocols
After dening a series of cuts, the rst and last cuts are displayed
bold. A series of cuts which you have dened may be saved as a
protocol. To maintain a better overview, group similar protocols
together ; for example, according to anatomical structures.
Set the switch to Protocol.
Open the Store Protocol window.
Group name Enter the group name.
Protocol name Enter the new protocol name.
Save the new protocol.
The program returns to the list.
Protocol
Store Prot.
Store
T I P
Asinglecut canalso besaved
as acalculation protocol. The
parallel series will comprise
only one cut.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MPR
E.628 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storing MPR series
Identify what should be stored in the MPR window.
One cut only.
The entire series that belongs to this cut.
Open the MPR:Store Output window.
Closes the window.
Series: Enter the name of the series to be generated.
A notice box will appear if the name of the series already exists.
You can either terminate or append the newimages to the existing
series.
Comment: Enter comments as required.
If you want to store one cut only:
Segment Select the segment with the desired cut.
Store the series.
Image
Series
Store
Cancel
Store
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.7
Maximum intensity
projections (MIP)
Maximum intensity projectionsMIP series of 3-D or multislice
series are calculated using the Evaluate MIP function and com-
piled in MIP series. This function is used primarily for MRangiog-
raphy, a procedure which displays blood vessels at a lighter grey
tone than the rest of the image.
Asurvey image will give you the best MIP vieworientation, but is
not mandatory. The function switches automatically to the 4-seg-
ment display.
Only at the MRSC: Use the function button in the function eld of
the control area instead of the menu for fastest access to the func-
tion.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
MIP. .
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.72 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting base images
First you have to select the base images and load theminto the im-
age memory.
Prerequisites The base images must fulll the prerequisites in the CHECKLIST.
The number of base images that can be loaded depends on the
processor conguration and the size of the le.
Terminates loading of images.
Selecting base images from the lists
In the patient list you can select another patient. When you are in
the series list of the patient, select a complete 3-D or multislice se-
ries (Multislab : select several series and then Go). Query moves
you to the image list where you dene the range of images.
IntheMIP: Image Loading
windowdataregardingtheactive
series aredisplayed.
Cancel
Query
C H E C K L I S T
7 same FOV
7 same matrix
7 same slice orientation
7 same slice distance
(or a multiple)
Maximum intensity projections (MIP)
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Directly selecting base images
Patient: Enter the patient name.
Series: Enter the number of the 3-D or multislice series to be
processed.
Multislab : You can also use series containing multislabs as well as
multiple series as base images. For example: 2,5,9.
Images: Enter the range of images required (at least 3).
Loading base images
Load the base images selected.
The system checks whether the base images meet the 3-D require-
ments. If yes, the images are loaded in the image memory. The
numbers of the images are shown in the message eld of the con-
trol area. The images will be displayed in the rst segment.
If not, a notice box is displayed.
Terminates loading and allows you to work with the images pre-
viously loaded. There will be a slight delay in terminating the
function, because the programwill rst complete the image recon-
struction in progress.
MIP interactive only: If it is not possible to load all of the images, you
will be informed accordingly via a notice box. Conrm with Ok or:
request additional information via the Details button. The Image
Loading Information window provides you with the information why
certain images could not be loaded.
Repeat image selection, if necessary.
Load
SAG COR
TRA
Whenloadingis complete, onesegment displays
thebaseimage, andtwo other segments display
orthogonal cuts throughthebaseimage.
Break
Not all images have
been loaded
?
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.74 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the basic window (MIP or MIP interactive) to select the refer-
ence image and dene the MIP view direction.
Stores projections (page E.724).
Manages calculation protocols (page E.725).
Loads new base images. The MIP Image loading window is dis-
played (page E.72).
Switches to the Evaluate MPR function. You can transfer the last
MIP result image as the base image (chapter E.6).
Terminates the MIP function.
Ends the MIP function.
Please note: When you leave the function with Cancel or Exit, the
original setting of the image text (on or off) is restored.
Store
Calc. Prot.
Load Ima
MPR
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting a reference image
After you load the base image, the system displays three images,
one in each orientation.
Select one of the three displayed images as the reference
image.
The reference image is transferred to the rst segment; the axis of
rotation is identied by a small circle. The third segment contains
a second reference image, which displays the axis of rotation as a
cut line.
MIP interactive only: The second segment displays an MIP results
image. The results image can be moved with the mouse. (page
E.712).
Work Image Select the type of reference images with which you would like
to work.
Orthogonal cut.
MIP on orthogonal cut (recommended
because it reduces the possibility of truncating
important regions).
Changes the orientation of the second reference image (e. g., from
sagittal to coronal).
Please note: If you superimpose a grid with Evaluate MIP (Evalu-
ate Grid chapter E.5), you must reactivate the basic window. To do
so, click the header in the window. The grid disappears.
Cut
Projection
Exchange
T I P
If after selecting Cut or
Projection the displayed
images are not windowed
properly: window with the
WinAut functionbuttoninthe
control area.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.76 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Superimposing the 3-D pointer
May only be used with the parameter Cut.
Display the 3-D pointer (shaped like a cross).
Move the 3-Dpointer until you nd the region of interest in the
image.
You may select a new reference image at any time.
Briey press the Select button.
The 3-D pointer disappears again.
Then select the reference image.
3D Cursor
Thecross of the3-Dpointer
displays thesliceplanes of the
neighboringimages. Thecenter of
the3-Dpointer is theintersection
of all threeimageplanes. Whenyou
shift the3-Dpointer inanyimage,
thecuts arerecalculatedand
displayedintheother two images
Select
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Superimposing the VOI
The starting point for the denition of the projections is the VOI
(Volume of Interest) which delimits the space generated by the
base images.
After you have selected MIP, all of the base images are included in
the VOI. To limit the VOI, proceed as follows:
O Select a rectangular VOI (page E.78) or a
O Free-form VOI (only for MIP interactive page E.79).
MIP orientation
third dimension of the VOI
MIP results image
Projection
VOI
(cannot be adjusted)
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.78 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Using the rectangular VOI
VOI Activate a rectangular VOI.
or
for MIP interactive
If you switch off the VOI, the rectangles disappear and the entire
base image is considered the VOI.
Please note: If you select a VOI which is larger than the measured
slab, MIP calculation ends automatically at the slab limit.
On
Box
Arectangular VOI is superimposed
oneachimage.
TheVOI canbeshiftedor its size
canbechanged.
T I P
If the base images were
measured with a rectangular
FOV, the MIP result images
maycontainlargewhitespots.
If this occurs, reduce the VOI
slightly in all directions.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
For MIP interactive only: using free-hand VOI
There is no limit to the shapes for free-hand VOIs. You dene and
process the free-hand VOI in the MIP results image which adapts to
your processing steps accordingly.
You can combine several processing steps to obtain the free-hand
VOI:
1. Generate contour,
2. Take contour from the volume of base images and cut,
3. Process contour
4. Rotate MIP results image with the mouse (page E.713).
You can repeat these steps whenever necessary.
Examples showing a selection of shapes for the free-hand VOI are
found on page E.711.
Please note: Information related to free-hand VOIs cannot be
stored as calculation protocols.
Generating contours
VOI Switches you to generating free-hand VOIs.
Click on Shape with the SELECT button of the mouse.
Draw a contour with the mouse (free-hand or polygon) into
the MIP results image.
Close the contour with a double-click.
The contour can be shifted or changed in size as usual.
Free
Shape
C H E C K L I S T
7 MIP results image is not
zoomed.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.710 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Cutting out contours
After you shaped the contour as required, it can be cut out.
Click on Shape with the MENU button of the mouse.
Select Shape.
Shortcut: Click the function button with the SELECT button of the
mouse.
Double-click either in or outside the contour.
The section you clicked will remain. The MIP results image is ad-
justed to the new VOI.
If you want to change the cutout in the MIP image, you can dene
a new contour.
Processing contours
Click on Shape with the MENU button of the mouse.
Select the desired option:
Undo Last The last cutout or image movement is undone.
By clicking several times, you can undo the
individual actions step-by-step.
Please note: Undo Last may take some time.
Undo All All cutouts or image movements are undone.
Please note: You cannot reverse Undo All.
Delete Deletes the contour.
Shape
Shape
Undo Last
Undo All
Delete
Awindowmenuis displayed
Shape
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Examples of free-hand VOIs
1. Entire volume 3. Cut outside 2. Draw contour
11. Cut a hole into 10. Form right part
9. Turn slightly 8. Cut inside 7. Draw contour
6.Cut outside 5. Draw contour 4. Turn toward the front
12. Result
to the left
of VOI the left part
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.712 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MIP interactive only:
Moving the image with the mouse
You can move the result image in the second segment with the
mouse. This allows you to better display the region of interest.
When Free is selected, you can move the image with the mouse
only if the following prerequisites have been met:
O The results image does not contain contours
O Shape was deselected with Delete.
Try to visualize the image as a three-dimensional object in a trans-
parent sphere. You can manipulate this bubble with the mouse.
Mouse Action Set the switch as required.
Rotates the image
Magnies or reduces the image
Shifts the image only after Zoom
(page E.715).
Selecting the resolution for image movement mode
Drag Mode Select the desired resolution.
For fast overview. This reduces the
reconstruction time.
Normal resolution.
Rotate
Zoom
Shift
Coarse
Intens.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Rotating the image
a) Mouse pointer inside the bubble
Drag mouse vertically: rotation about the vertical axis.
Drag mouse horizontally: rotation about the horizontal axis.
When you drag the mouse diagonally, you create a combined rota-
tion about both axes.
b) Mouse pointer outside the bubble
Rotation about the central axis.
Rotate
a) b)
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.714 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Zooming the image
Drag mouse upward: Zoom +.
Drag mouse downward: Zoom . You cannot zoom down an im-
age to a size smaller than its original size.
Zoom
Zoom + Zoom -
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Shift is only possible after Zoom +.
Undoing image movement
Resets the original image.
Shift
Zoom +
Zoom +
after Shift
after Zoom + Output image
after Zoom +
shift
Zoom - to
original size
Reset
Shifting the image
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.716 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dening the view direction
View Directions You can set MIP view directions (projection directions) for the re-
construction of entire MIP series :
MIP interactive window only:
Open the window MIP: View Denition.
Positioning can be accomplished:
O with arrows (page E.717)
O with the mouse (page E.719)
O with the keyboard (page E.719)
O by drawing mouse movements directly in the results image (page
E.720)
Closes the window.
Dene
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Using the arrows
In the View Denition window (MIP interactive only):
Positioning: Set positioning with arrows.
Establish the rst view direction.
An arrow is superimposed on the rst reference image.
Establish the last view direction.
A second arrow is superimposed next to the rst.
Drag the arrow to the desired position.
Arrow
Def. Start
Anarrow appears intherst
referenceimage. Youcanrotate
this arrowwiththemouse.
Def. End
Theareabetweentherst andlast
viewdirections is lledequallywith
additional viewdirections, as
speciedbythevalueset inthe
Angle Increment eldor the
number of projections.
T I P
If you have made a mistake,
you can delete the view
directions with Delete.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.718 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Accurately dening view directions
There are two ways to accurately dene the view directions :
Angle Increment EITHER: Enter (in degrees) the angle between two adjacent
view directions.
The value next to No. Images adjusts automatically.
No. Images: OR : Enter the number of view directions desired.
The value next to Angle Increment adjusts automatically.
The position of the last view direction will be reset if you change
the angle increment or number of viewdirections and the viewdi-
rections no longer t in the area dened.
You can subsequently change the values by entering text in the in-
put elds; you can also rotate the rst or last arrow via the mouse.
All other values are adjusted automatically.
The view directions can also be distributed equally.
Distributes view directions equally across a semicircle.
Distributes view directions equally across a circle.
MIP interactive only: Apply the dened view directions.
180
360
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MIP interactive only: Dening directly
In the View Denition window:
Positioning: Set direct positioning.
With the mouse
Use the mouse to shift, zoom, and rotate the results image
until the image corresponds with the desired rst view
direction.
Conrm the rst view direction.
Use the mouse to shift, zoom, and rotate the results image
until the image corresponds with the desired last view
direction.
Conrm the last view direction
The number of view directions to be calculated can be modied at
any time using the No. Images eld.
With the keyboard
Enter the values for Orientation, Zoom and Shift for the rst
view direction in the input elds.
Example: sag>cor15>tra-4 (abbreviation: s for sag, etc.)
Conrm the rst view direction.
The results image is adjusted to the new values automatically.
Enter the values for Orientation, Zoom and Shift for the last
view direction in the input elds.
Conrm the last view direction.
The number of view directions to be calculated can be modied at
any time using the No. Images eld.
Direct
Def. Start
Def. End
Def. Start
Def. End
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.720 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MIP interactive only: Freely-dened view directions
View directions may be dened without opening the MIP: View
Denitions window.
Record Switch on free-denition of view directions in the
MIP interactive window.
By moving the mouse in the results image, perform a sort of re-
view of the data volume.
All actions of the mouse will be recorded allowing you to freely
dene the viewdirections. When the projections are subsequently
calculated, the review of the data volume becomes
comprehensible : the image levels correspond to the specied
number of view directions.
The recording can be viewed with Loop, Yo-yo or Fast.
The number of view directions to be calculated can be modied
using the No. Images eld (blocked after you use Start/Stop).
On
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the reconstruction
MIP in foreground
Set a foreground run in the basic window.
Start calculating the MIP series.
The calculated projections are displayed in the second segment
and stored in the image memory. The images are combined into a
new series.
However, they must still be savedto the hard disk! (page E.724).
Interrupts calculation. The calculation of a MIP in progress is com-
pleted prior to interrupt. Subsequently delete all slice denitions
with Delete if you do not wish to continue the calculation.
Continues the calculation at the point where it was interrupted.
Terminates calculation.
MIP interactive only: Modifying the resolution
Resolution Setting the resolution of the result images:
Normal resolution is the default with MIP in
foreground.
High resolution is the default with MIP in
background.
To change the resolution for image movement mode, refer to page
E.712.
Foregr.
Start
Already calculated
Break
Continue
Cancel
Normal
High
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.722 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MIP in background
Set a background run in the basic window.
Conrm the background mode.
The MIP: Background Calculation window is displayed.
Series: Enter a name for the series to be generated.
Anotice box is displayed if the series name already exists. You can
either terminate the procedure or append the new images to the
existing series.
Comment : Enter comments if required.
Start background calculation of the MIP series.
The job is transferred to the job list. The images are not displayed
on screen. The calculated projections are automatically saved to
STORE.
Terminating the background job
Use the Abort button in the control area.
Please note: If you exit the MIP function and subsequently call the
MPR function while an MIP background job is running, MPR will
automatically use the MIP images. To use other images, you must
wait until the background job is completed.
Backgr.
Start
Start
T I P
If the base images were
measured with a rectangular
FOV, the MIP result images
maycontainlargewhitespots.
If this occurs, reduce the VOI
slightly in all directions.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying projections
You can look at projections with Loop, Yo-yo, or Fast. For a de-
scription of a cine display page D.26 Image Dynamic.
Display Switches to Fast Paging.
Images (%): The sliding control allows you to set the speed and direction of the
paging.
Output Destination Select the output device for the image display.
Only possible if a video recorder is
connected.
Displays graphics and text stored in addition
to the images. This will slow the image
display.
If the projection has not been calculated yet, the calculation is car-
ried out while the image is being displayed on screen. This can
lead to a slight delay in the image display.
Inverting result images
When calculating future result images, you can select inverted
display. Subsequent inversion of the result images is not possible.
Invert The result images are displayed in inverted form (like a
lm negative). Blood vessels will appear dark against
the background.
Standard display of result images.
Fast
The eld
changes like
this
Screen
Video
Graphics
On
Off
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
E.724 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storing projections
Specify the projections to be stored in the basic window.
Only one image.
The entire series which belongs to the results image.
Open the MIP: Store Output window.
Closes the window.
Series: Enter the name of the series to be generated.
A notice box is displayed if the series names already exist. You
must decide whether to terminate the procedure or append the
new images to the existing series.
Comment : Enter comments if required.
Only for MIP interactive:
If you want to store a single image only:
Segment Select the segment with the desired image.
Store the projections.
Image
Series
Store
Cancel
Store
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing calculation protocols
Calculation protocols are managed the same as for MPR, but the
content of the protocols is MIP-specic. MIP protocols contain in-
formation regarding
O Orientation of the reference image and axes
O Type of reference image
O VOI parameters (rectangular VOI only!)
O View directions.
For additional information refer to page E.625.
For MIP interactive only:
Information relating to free-hand-VOIs cannot be stored as calcu-
lation protocols. The Calc. Prot. button is dimmed.
Calc. Prot.
Rev. 07
Evaluate MIP
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.8
Scrolling images
To optimally position every section of an image, the Evaluate
Scroll function allows you to create an endless roll of the image se-
lected. When you drag the active image in one direction using the
mouse, the area outside the segment frame is connected to the op-
posite edge of the image matrix. This allows you, for example, to
center off-center images, such as those for the shoulders or hips.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Scroll
Rev. 07
Evaluate Scroll
E.82 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the Scroll window to set the direction of image scrolling and
to select whether the function should operate in foreground or
background.
Terminates the Scroll function.
Ends image scrolling. Modied settings in the function window
will be retained.
Delete All
Cancel
Exit
Scrolling images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scrolling individual images
Direction: Select the scrolling direction.
Only scroll the image horizontally.
Only scroll the image vertically.
Scroll the image in any direction.
You scroll through the active image by dragging the mouse.
Indicate the start position in the active segment by clicking
the mouse.
Depending on the direction selected, the start position will appear
as one of the following:
O Horizontal : vertical line
O Vertical : horizontal line
O Variable : cross hairs
Horizontal
Vertical
Variable
Original image
Rev. 07
Evaluate Scroll
E.84 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Drag the image in the desired direction using the mouse.
Scroll in Column, Row: Displays the column and row values by which the active image
was shifted (not scrolled: 0,0).
You may scroll the image in different directions and as often as re-
quired to achieve the correct image position.
Please note: Graphics drawn into the image are deleted when the
image is scrolled.
Stores the result image (page F.25).
Hold data: If you call additional images, they are scrolled according
to the current column and row values, even after you
exit the function.
Returning to the original status
The results of scrolling are undone, even if you scrolled multiple
times.
This button cannot be applied if you have already ended the Eval-
uate Scroll function.
Theimageis movedinthedesired
direction. Thesectionof theimage
outsidethesegment frameis
reconnectedto theoppositeedge
of theimagematrix.
CopSeg
Yes
Original
Scrolling images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scrolling a range of images
Scroll in Background: Select scrolling in background.
image is scrolled in background.
Overwrite original Image : You may select whether original images should be
overwritten with the scrolled images.
Overwrite original images with scrolled images.
Original images will be lost when overwritten by scrolled images.
The original images cannot be overwritten if they are in an expo-
sure or printer job list.
Store scrolled images and append as new les to the
series.
Scroll a reference image.
Scroll a reference image by the values which the function will use
to scroll in background.
Example: 1018,20,2228
Opens the image list. Select the image entries desired (multiple se-
lections are permitted).
Start scrolling in background.
You can follow the background run in the message eld.
If no image numbers are entered, image scrolling will not be started.
Instead, the image list will be displayed.
Select the images to be scrolled from the list.
Yes
Yes
No
Query
Go
No image numbers
entered
?
Rev. 07
Evaluate Scroll
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.9
Modifying image values
The Evaluate Manipulate function allows you to manipulate the
grey values of selected images for the active view patient. You
may take the average of several images, add or subtract two im-
ages, shift the grey values of an image, as well as rotate, mirror, or
invert an image.
Most image manipulation procedures can be performed on a rect-
angular section of the image (an ROI). Image rotation and mirror-
ing may also be performed in background.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.92 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the Manipulate window to set the type of image manipula-
tion. You can also limit the manipulation to an ROI.
Resets the ROI to the default size.
Deletes all graphics in the active segment and resets the ROI to the
default size.
Copies the ROI to another segment.
Ends the function. The settings are retained.
Delete
Del All
Copy
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the type of manipulation
Manipulation: Select the type of image manipulation.
Averages the pixel values for several images
(page E.94).
Subtracts a second image from the active image
(page E.96).
Adds the pixel values of two images
(page E.96).
Rotates the entire image 90 degrees
(counterclockwise) (page E.97).
(page E.97).
(page E.97).
Mirrors the entire image along the horizontal
center axis (page E.98).
Mirrors the entire image along the vertical center
axis. (page E.98).
Shifts the grey values of the image by a value
specied by you. (page E.99).
Inverts the entire image (page E.910).
Average
Subtract
Add
Rot. 90
Rot. 180
Rot. 270
Mir. hor.
Mir. vert.
Offset
Negate
T I P
Standard text in the image
may be blanked using the
Display Text function
(chapter J .2).
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.94 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Averaging images
Averaging operates over two or more images.
Switch manipulation to Average.
Determining the image section
Region: Limit the averaging to a specic section of the images, as
needed.
Manipulates the entire image.
Manipulates only the submatrix specied by the
ROI.
As soon as you select Submatrix, an ROI will appear in the active
image. You may shift its position and change its size using the
mouse. This allows you to dene the submatrix to be manipu-
lated.
Returns the sub-matrix to the previous size. If the ROI has already
been manipulated, this function button will have no effect.
Selecting images
Image Range: Enter the image numbers.
Example: 1018,20,2228
You can also open the image list. Select the desired image entries
(multiple selections are possible).
Average
Image
Submatrix
Del All
Query
T I P
Results images can
sometimes be improved
throughwindowing. Click the
WinAut buttoninthefunction
eld of the control area.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the manipulation
Start averaging (in the image list or function window).
The grey values will be averaged for the image section specied.
The results will be displayed in the active segment.
The following example demonstrates the grey values after the av-
eraging of two input images into a result image.
Go
1
st
input image 2
nd
input image Result
CopSeg
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.96 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Adding/Subtracting images
The manipulation will be done with two images at a time. The
grey values of both images should be similar.
Switch manipulation to addition/subtraction.
Region: Limit the manipulation to a specic section of the images, as
needed (page E.94).
Image Range: Enter both image numbers.
Example: 2,3
Start the manipulation.
The sumof the grey values or the difference between the grey val-
ues for the preselected image range will be calculated and dis-
played in the active segment.
The following example demonstrates the grey values after the ma-
nipulation of two input images to produce a resultant image.
Go
1 2
Subtraction Addition
CopSeg
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Rotating images
The angles of image rotation are calculated counterclockwise.
Set the rotation desired.
Rotates the entire image 90 degrees.
Please note: All graphics will be deleted prior to image rotation.
Start the rotation.
You can rotate the image several times by different degrees.
If you would like to rotate several images at the same time, try ro-
tating them in background (page E.911).
Rot. 90
Rot. 180
Rot. 270
Go
Theentireactiveimageis rotated
counterclockwisebythevalue
selected. Thetext describing
patient orientationis adjusted
accordingly.
CopSeg
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.98 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Mirroring images
The principle of image mirroring is the same for the horizontal
and vertical axes.
Switch manipulation to the mirroring option desired.
Mirrors the entire image about a horizontal
central axis.
Mirrors the entire image about a vertical
central axis.
Please note: All graphics will be deleted prior to mirroring.
Start the mirroring procedure.
If you would like to rotate several images at the same time, try ro-
tating them in background (page E.911).
Mir. hor.
Mir. vert.
Go
Theentireactiveimagewill be
mirroredalongthehorizontal or
vertical center axis, dependingon
theoptionselected. Thetext
describingpatient orientationis
adjustedaccordingly. Repeating
themirroringprocedurewill return
theimageto its original state.
CopSeg
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Offsetting grey values
You can use this manipulation function to make the image or a
part of the image lighter or darker.
Switch manipulation to offset.
Region: Limit the offset to a specic section of the images, as needed
(page E.94).
Value: Enter the offset value.
The unit for input corresponds to the windowing values. You can
enter values between 4 095 and +4 095.
Example: 256 Increases the grey values by 256 units.
500 Reduces the grey values by 500 units.
Start the offset procedure.
The pixel values for the section preselected from the active image
are offset by the value entered. The windowing values (W/C) in
the image text do not change.
Offset
Go
CopSeg
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.910 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Inverting images
Inversion is applied to the entire image.
Switch manipulation to inversion.
Start the inversion.
All light pixels in the active image will be displayed dark and vice
versa, as in a lm negative.
The image is restored to its original state by inverting it a second
time.
Negate
Go
CopSeg
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Manipulating in background
Images can be rotated and mirrored in background. This is recom-
mended when you would like to rotate or mirror many images at
the same time.
These procedures manipulate the entire image.
Switch manipulation to one of the rotation or mirroring
options.
Switch manipulation to background.
image is manipulated in background.
Set whether the original images should be overwritten by the
manipulated images.
Overwrite the original images.
The original images will be lost when overwritten by the manipu-
lated images. The original images cannot be overwritten if they are
in an exposure or printer job list.
Append manipulated images as new image les at the
end of the series.
Image Range: Enter the range of images.
Example: 1018,20,2228
You may also open the image list. Select the image entries desired
Manipulate in
Background:
Yes
Overwrite
original Image:
Yes
No
Query
Rev. 07
Evaluate Manipulate
E.912 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting image manipulation
Start rotation or mirroring in background
(in the image list or in the function window).
You can followthe progress of the background run in the message
eld.
All images from the range selected will be rotated or mirrored
identically.
Either the original images will be overwritten by the manipulated
images, or the manipulated images will be stored in a new image
le which will be appended at the end of the series.
If no image numbers have been entered, image manipulation will not
start.
A notice box appears. Conrm it with Continue.
Go
No image numbers
entered
?
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.10
Marking and labelling image
details
For documentation purposes, it is often necessary to highlight
specic details in an image or to enter text. Use the Evaluate La-
bel function to mark images with various objects. The objects may
subsequently be modied, shifted, or deleted.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Label
Rev. 07
Evaluate Label
E.102 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You can use the Label window to select the object to be labelled
(for example, text, rectangle, or circle). Subsequently, you draw
the contours of the object in the image using the mouse.
Returns you to draw mode, if necessary.
Deletes all objects in the image.
Ends the function. Settings are retained.
Draw Object : Select the type of object to be drawn in the image:
To draw an arrow.
To enter a comment.
To draw an irregular curve.
To draw a rectangle.
d To draw a circle.
Draw
Del All
Cancel
Exit
Arrow
Text
Irregular
Box
Circle
For further details concerning how to work with graphics,
refer to the manual Working with Numaris chapter A.4 and
chapter A.5.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.11
Statistical evaluation of
individual images
Use the Evaluate Statistics function to statistically evaluate the
distribution of grey values. Using regions of interest, you calculate
the mean value, standard deviation, and minimumand maximum
of values.
The frequency distribution of grey values within the ROI may be
displayed as a histogram.
There are several geometric forms available for the ROI. The
shape and position of each ROI may be saved for each segment
and subsequently selected.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics . . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Statistics
E.112 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the Statistics windowto select the statistical calculations and
the shape of the ROI. The right side of the window contains four
results elds for the four ROIs which may be entered per seg-
ment.
Returns to Draw mode if necessary.
Selects graphics so that they can be shifted, deleted, or copied.
Deletes the selected graphic.
Copies the selected graphic to another segment (page E.117).
Ends the function and stores the parameters set for subsequent
function selection.
Draw
Select
Delete
Del All
Copy
Cancel
Exit
Statistical evaluation of individual images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Indicate whether images should be displayed with their
corresponding stored ROIs or with the current ROIs.
Only display ROIs which were stored together
with the image via File Copy Segment.
New ROIs drawn in the active image are deleted.
Use the current ROIs and ignore the stored
ROIs.
Selecting the calculation
Calculation: Select the statistical calculations desired.
Calculates the mean value and standard
deviation of the grey values.
Calculates the area of the ROI.
Calculates the minimum and maximum grey
values.
The calculations may be combined as desired.
All calculations refer to the ROI selected.
You may also display the histogram of an ROI (page E.115).
Limiting the grey values
You can limit the statistical evaluation. In this case, only the grey
values within the specied limits are used for the calculation.
Upper Limit : Enter the upper limit for the statistical evaluation.
Lower Limit : Enter the lower limit for the statistical evaluation.
Image Call Up
with Graphics:
Yes
No
Mean/SD
Area
Extreme
Histogr.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Statistics
E.114 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Drawing ROIs and calculating the
distribution of grey values
Region: Select the shape of the ROI.
To draw a circular ROI.
To draw an irregular ROI (freehand curve or
polygon). Close an irregular ROI by double
clicking the mouse button
To draw a 1-pixel ROI (mean value of a 33
matrix) by clicking once in the image.
Activate draw mode.
Draw the shape selected for the ROI in the image.
The evaluation of the ROI begins immediately.
The ROIs which are drawn may be subsequently manipulated.
After each change, the evaluation begins automatically.
Up to four ROIs may be entered. To enter an additional ROI, you
must rst delete one of the four existing ROIs.
An ROI may be stored and called for subsequent use (page
E.116).
Evaluation text Depending on the calculation selected, the results are displayed in
the evaluation text, assuming the function has been activated
(Display Text page J.24).
Circle
Irregular
1 Pixel
Draw
T I P
For further details concerning
how to work with graphics,
refer to the manual
Working with Numaris
chapter A.4 and
chapter A.5.
Mean Mean value
SD Standard
deviation
A/cm ROI area in cm
2
Max Maximum value
Min Minimum value
For a 1 pixel ROI :
Pix Val Value of the pixel
Line Line coordinates
Column Column
coordinates
Mean value, standard deviation, and
area are calculated to the rst decimal.
Maximum, minimum, and pixel values
are whole numbers.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying and evaluating the
histogram
Select the desired ROI.
Click on one of point of the ROI.
Start the histogram (does not apply to one-pixel ROIs).
Move the sampling line by dragging the mouse.
The results are displayed at the upper right next to the sampling
line :
PC Number of pixels of a specic grey value in the ROI
PV Grey value (X axis)
Other ROIs may be selected and a new histogram displayed. The
original histogram disappears.
Please note: The histogramand MR image are unrelated geometri-
cally.
Histogr.
Bold-typelines indicatethat the
ROI has beenselected. The
histogramis superimposedonthe
activeimage.
Greyvalues aredisplayedontheX
axis, andthenumber of pixels with
therespectivevalueis displayedon
theY axis.
Avertical samplinglineis displayed
onthehistogram.
T I P
Scale for higher resolution.
Select the ROI and re-enter the
values for Upper Limit and
Lower Limit.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Statistics
E.116 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing ROIs
The ROIs drawn in a segment may be stored and subsequently
called for each individual segment.
Activate the Select mode.
Grab handles indicate the ROI has been selected.
Store the selected ROI.
The shape, size, and position of the ROI are stored for this segment.
Reusing the ROI
Open the ROI list.
Select the ROI from the list.
Transfer the selected ROI to the active segment.
The ROI is superimposed with its corresponding shape, size, and
position.
Please note: Use Copy to transfer an ROI from one segment to an-
other.
Select
Store
Call...
Thelist contains thestoredROIs for the
active segment (if no ROIs arestoredfor
thesegment, thedisplayis blank). In
additionto thenameof theROI shape,
entries includeparameters suchas shape,
center point, radius, andmatrixsize.
Apply
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting an ROI entry
Select the desired entry from the list.
Delete the ROI from the list.
Closing the list
Close the list.
You return to the Statistics window.
Copying an ROI
Please note: You can copy an ROI only if the images have not been
manipulated and the following parameters match in the source
and target segments:
O Matrix size
O FOV
O Slice orientation
O Slice position
The ROI must be selected.
Activate Copy mode.
The ROI is copied to the newsegment. You can then select the cop-
ied ROI and move it or modify it.
Delete
Cancel
Copy
Rev. 07
Evaluate Statistics
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.12
Statistical comparison of
multiple images
Use the Evaluate Mean/Curve function to calculate the area,
mean value and standard deviation of grey values for up to four
ROIs across several images.
You can display the results above the image numbers in a graph or
as a table.
C H E C K L I S T
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics . . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Mean/Curve
E.122 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the Mean/Curve window to select the shape of the ROI, vari-
ous evaluation parameters, and the range of images to be evalu-
ated.
Ends the function. Tables and graphs are deleted.
You can save tables and curve diagrams (page F.25).
Del All
Cancel
Exit
CopSeg
Statistical comparison of multiple images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Indicate whether images which are subsequently selected
should be displayed with their graphics.
Only display ROIs stored with their images using
File Copy Segment.
New ROIs drawn into the active segment are deleted.
Shift images under the new ROIs and ignore the stored
ROIs.
Dynamically modifying the ROI
ROI : Indicate whether all images should be evaluated
simultaneously.
Retain ROIs ; simultaneously evaluate all
images.
Modify ROIs. One image is evaluated per
evaluation process. You can therefore modify
ROIs prior to the evaluation of the subsequent
image.
Checking the image range
During the evaluation, images are checked for uniformity of ma-
trix size, eld of view, image center, slice orientation, and mea-
surement sequence. Calculation is terminated if an error is de-
tected.
Checks: Indicate whether you want to check the selected image range.
Activates checking.
Deactivates checking.
Image Call up
with Graphics:
Yes
No
Static
Dynamic
On
Off
Rev. 07
Evaluate Mean/Curve
E.124 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting calculation parameters
The following parameters may be changed after the evaluation is
completed. When you conrm your selections with Go, the new
diagram is displayed.
Scaling the axis
The active segment must contain the image to be evaluated.
X-Axis: Indicate how the X axis should be scaled.
Enter the images on the X axis according to the
image number (corresponds to the anatomical
sorting).
For motion series or other dynamic
measurements.
Enter the images on the X axis in the order of excitation If you se-
lected an ascending order of excitation, the NormTime is identical
to scaling according to image numbers.
For slow contrast series.
Prerequisites: Injection begins with second
measuremen.
Scale Maxima: Indicate how the Y axis should be scaled.
Automatically scales the Yaxis using the specified
limit values.
Allows for manual scaling of the Y axis. In this
case, enter the minimum and maximum values
in the corresponding input elds.
Scale Shape: Indicate how the Y axis should be calibrated (linear or
logarithmic).
Image No.
Norm Time
CM Time
t
Pre- Post- Post 2 Post 3
contrast contrast 1
t =0 =Start of injection
Auto
Manual
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Additional parameters
Smoothing: Indicate whether you want the mean values connected using
a smooth curve.
Connect values with a smooth curve.
Connect values with straight lines.
Standard Dev. : Indicate whether the standard deviation should be calculated
in addition to the mean value and area.
Calculate the standard deviation.
Do not calculate the standard deviation.
On
Off
Yes
No
Rev. 07
Evaluate Mean/Curve
E.126 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
DrawingtheROI andperformingthe
evaluation
Instead of drawing a new ROI, you can also call a stored ROI
(page E.129).
Region: Selecting the shape of the ROI.
Draws a circular ROI.
Draws a rectangular ROI.
Draws an irregular ROI (freehand drawing or
polygon). Close an irregular curve by double-
clicking the mouse
Activate draw mode.
Draw the selected ROI shape into the image.
The ROIs which are drawn in can subsequently be manipulated
in the usual manner.
You can draw up to four ROIs in a segment. The ROIs are differ-
entiated in that their boundary lines are in different styles. To de-
ne an additional ROI, you must delete an existing one.
You may also open the image list and select entries from the list
(multiple selection possible).
Please note: Select images from one series only.
Circle
Rectangle
Irregular
Draw
Query
T I P
refer to the manual
chapter A.4 and
chapter A.5.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the statistical comparison
Start the statistical comparison of the selected images.
The results are displayed in the second segment on a dual-scale
Cartesian coordinate system with two X and two Y axes. The line
types of the curves correspond to the line types of the individual
ROIs.
The left Y axis contains the mean values for the ROIs. The scale of
the lower X axis depends on the setting selected (page E.124). If
you evaluate less than 128 images, each image contains a unique
scale marking.
A sampling line is displayed on the curve. Standard deviation (if
specied) and mean value for the respective image are displayed
next to the sampling line.
The sampling line can be shifted in the usual manner in order to
display the values for each individual image.
The results of the area calculation are displayed in a rectangle next
to the Y axis. The rectangle may be moved as desired.
Go
Sampling line
Area calculation
Example:
Scaling the X axis
according to the image number
Rev. 07
Evaluate Mean/Curve
E.128 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting the patient identication in the graph
The patient identication is displayed under the lower X axis. To
delete the patient ID:
Select the segment.
Activate Select mode.
Select the text line.
Delete the identication.
Displaying the results as a value table
The results of the mean value calculation may be displayed in a ta-
ble.
Open the table.
The table contains the numerical mean values, standard devia-
tion, and area for each of up to four ROIs per image.
If you evaluate many images, the table will not t into the seg-
ment. For this reason, the table consists of several pages. The page
number and the number of pages are indicated in the top right
corner of the table. By repeatedly clicking the Table button, you
can page through the table in a continuous loop.
Select
Delete
Table
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Managing ROIs
Activate the Select mode.
Grab handles around the ROI indicate it has been selected.
Store the selected ROI.
Reusing an ROI
Open the ROI list.
Select the desired ROI from the list.
Transfer the selected ROI to the active segment.
The ROI is superimposed in the shape, size, and position selected.
Please note: Use Copy to move an ROI stored for one segment to
another segment.
Select
Store
Call
Thelist contains information
regardingthestoredROIs,
includingshape, center point, key
points, andmatrixsize.
Go
Rev. 07
Evaluate Mean/Curve
E.1210 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting ROI entries
Select the desired entry from the list.
Delete the ROI from the list.
Closing the list
Closes the list without executing any of the modications entered
by you.
Closes the list, the modications entered by you are executed.
Copying an ROI
Please note: You can copy an ROI only if the images have not been
manipulated and the following parameters match in the source
and target segments:
O Matrix size
O FOV
O Slice orientation
O Slice position
The ROI must be selected.
Activate Copy mode.
The ROI is copied to the newsegment. You can then select the cop-
ied ROI and move it or modify it.
Delete
Cancel
Exit
Copy
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.13
Filtering images
(optional*)
Use the Evaluate Filter function to retroactively improve the im-
age impression of MR images. You can use the lter to smooth
contiguous areas and enhance contours. It also improves the sig-
nal-to-noise ratio without losing information on the tissue struc-
tures.
*This function is standard with MAGNETOM Open.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics . . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Filter
E.132 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
How does the lter work?
The lter is an adaptive lter. Its function is primarily based on the
following image information:
O local distribution of the signal intensity
O plot of local tissue structures.
Various low and high pass lters are used to check whether struc-
tures are coincidental, or whether they are connected with other
structures.
Filtering images (optional *)
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Filter window contains a list of lter jobs. The list is empty
when the window is called.
Ends the function.
Move immediately to
List of lter jobs
image selection
Exit
Rev. 07
Evaluate Filter
E.134 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting images and lter
sharpness
Open the Select Images window.
The patient, series, and image lists are displayed next to one an-
other.
Returns to the Filter window.
WINDOW MENUS are superimposed on the list to help you in se-
lecting images. Move the mouse pointer over the respective list
and press the MENU button.
Patients: Select the patient whose images you want to lter.
Select Images..
Cancel
MENU button
(Upper case before lower case)
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Series: Select the series which contains the desired images fromthe
series list.
Images: Select the images to be ltered from the image list.
Filter setting: Select the desired lter sharpness.
Selects another le or individually congure a lter (page E.136).
The FILTER JOB is transferred to the Filter window.
Please note: Image and lter selection can be repeated as often as
desired, even for additional patients.
You subsequently start the lter jobs (page E.139).
Display the selected series again
(if all entries in the list cannot be
displayed and the selected series
lies outside the section)
Page forward in the image list
Deselect all entries
Name of the default lter
Value of lter sharpness
Filter defaults...
Select
T I P
If you have mistakenly
deselected all images of a
series, switchtoanother series
andthenreturnto theoriginal
series.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Filter
E.136 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conguring the lter
Open the Filter defaults window.
Use the Filter defaults window to allocate values to the three l-
ter settings Smooth, Medium, and Sharp. You can save the new
allocation under a lter name and select previously stored lter
names.
Terminates the function and returns to the Select Images win-
dow.
Filter defaults...
List of stored lters
Cancel
T I P
For future ltering:
Generate a test series, and
allocate a lter value to each
image. Save this series.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Allocating values to lter sharpness
Depending on the type of image to be ltered, you may wish to
use different noise suppression or structure enhancement. Since
the visual impression of ltered images can be very subjective, we
are only providing suggestions for the lter values.
Filter groups
You can enter values between 1 and 20. The values are divided
into two groups :
1 to 10 Suitable for images in 256 matrix format. The higher the number,
the more enhanced the contours. However, there will be some loss
in image smoothness. These values are located in the windowFil-
ter defaults in the setting old (page E.136).
11 to 20 Optimized for the 512 matrix, but can also be used for other matrix
sizes. The higher the number, the higher the signal. However,
there will be some loss in noise suppression. These values are lo-
cated in the window Filter defaults in the setting new (page
E.136).
Please note: The values for the three lter sharpnesses must come
from the same lter group.
Some recommendations for individual lter values
Filter 9 Increased structure enhancement (emphasizing edges and lines).
This value can also be used for angiography images that have al-
ready been post-processed with Evaluate MIP (chapter E.7).
Filter 11 and 12 Good noise suppression and low signal amplication (e.g. use for
spinal column and liver).
Filter 15 and 17 Suitable for imaging with MAGNETOM Open.
Filter 19 and 20 Lowest ltering effect.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Filter
E.138 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storing a new lter
A new lter setting must rst be saved before it can be used.
Default Name: Enter a name for the set lter.
Example: normal
Store the lter under the new name.
The new lter is displayed in the default list.
Deleting a lter
If the name of the lter to be deleted is not displayed under De-
fault Name:
Default list : Select the lter to be deleted.
Delete the selected lter.
The lter is deleted from the default list.
Selecting a different lter for lter jobs
Default list : Select the desired lter from the list.
Activate the lter for use in future lter jobs.
The Select Images window opens and contains all other lters.
Set the desired lter sharpness (page E.135).
Save new
Delete
Accept
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Working with lter jobs
The Filter windowcontains the selected lter jobs. The Image Se-
lect window remains open so that additional images and lters
can be compiled into lter jobs (page E.134).
Filter Sharpness of lter setting. The name of
the lter is displayed in brackets.
Example: 17 (normal)
Patient/Series/Images Patient number, series number, image
numbers of images to be ltered.
Example: 157/1/122
Terminates the function. Note: lter jobs in progress are
terminated as well!
T I P
UseCancel to close the
Image Select window.
End
Wait until all lter jobs have been processed
before terminating the function.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Filter
E.1310 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting lter jobs
Please note: Processing itself is very time-consuming.
Start the list of lter jobs.
The jobs are processed one after the other.
Each lter job is stored as a separate series and is correspondingly
coded (e.g. F15). The lter information is included as a comment
in the image text. The original images are retained.
Stopping the job list
Please note: A lter job being processed when the function is
stopped cannot be continued.
Terminates the processing.
Deleting lter jobs
Select the jobs to be deleted from the list.
Multiple jobs can be selected by clicking the mouse and dragging
it across the entries in the list.
Delete the jobs selected in the list.
Keeping the function window as an icon
Because the Filter window remains open when processing lter
jobs, we recommend (in contrast to all other function windows),
that you keep the function window as an icon on the screen.
Click the small triangle in the header of the Filter window. The
window is closed and reappears as small icon in the image area.
You open up the window by double-clicking the icon.
Run List
Stop Run
Delete Lines
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.14
Dynamic evaluation
The Evaluate Dynamic Analysis function enables the quantita-
tive analysis of dynamic processes (for example, contrast agent se-
ries). The function also allows you to establish certain trends com-
mon to several series of a patient.
Display an image of the patient to be evaluated in one of the
image segments.
The system switches automatically to 4 segment display.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Dynamic Analysis
E.142 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The image and series information of the active image are trans-
ferred to the Image Arithmetics window. This image is trans-
ferred to the rst segment.
Patient Name: The name of the active view patient is displayed.
Multiple Operands: Evaluate multiple series. In this case, a different window is dis-
played (page E.1420).
Ends the function.
Cancel
Exit
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Basic operating sequence
First Operand: Select the rst operand.
Depending on the goal of the evaluation and the linking to be se-
lected, this can be a series, an image, or a constant (page E.146).
If you do not want to use the active series,
select one from the series list.
The name of the selected series is displayed.
Range: O If you do not want to use all the images of the
series, enter the desired range of image numbers in the numerical
eld.
If you do not want to use the active image,
either select one from the image list, or enter the
image number in the numerical eld. You can also click on the
arrows.
The number of the selected image is displayed.
Enter the numerical value of a constant in the input eld.
Operation: With the MENU button of the mouse, select the operation
desired (page E.144).
The operation is displayed next to the menu arrow.
Second Operand: Select the series, image, or constant that you want to link to
the rst operand.
Proceed in the same manner as described for the rst operand.
Please note: Some operations use only one operand. In these cases,
a second operand cannot be selected.
The result of the evaluation can be prescaled as required (page
E.1425).
Start the evaluation (page E.1427).
Series Select...
Image Select...
Constant
Go
Rev. 07
E.144 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting linking
Operation: You select linking from a WINDOW MENU.
The grey values are added up
(page E.1410).
The grey values are subtracted (page E.1410). This enables you to
display changes after administration of contrast agent.
The grey values are multiplied by a constant (page E.1411). This
allows you to scale grey values.
The grey values are divided (page E.1411). This is another way to
display the changes after administration of contrast agent.
(Constructive Interference in Steady State) Enables you to elimi-
nate the intensity modulations in images produced when using
FISP and PSIF sequences (page E.1412).
Calculates a T1 image and a T2-weighted image
page E.1414).
Calculates a T2 image and a T1-weighted image
(page E.1416).
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
CISS
Notice
The CISS linking is not used with MAGNETOM Open
at this time.
T1
T2
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculates the logarithm of the grey values of the images in a se-
ries (page E.1418). This reduces the sharp differences in intensity
within the images.
Forms the derivative across successive images of the series (page
E.1419).
Forms the integral across successive images of the series (page
E.1419).
Slope of regression line of operand images (page E.1422). During
contrast agent series, for example, you can visualize the different
types of tissue using varied acquisition speeds (slower and faster).
Calculates mean of the grey values of all operand images (page
E.1423). Enables you during functional neuroimaging to derive
similar images to reduce artifacts.
Calculates standard deviation from mean value (page E.1423).
Displays regional variations in contrast agent enhancement. No
difference is made between positive and negative changes.
Logarithm
Differentiate
Integrate
Slope
Mean
Std Dev
Rev. 07
E.146 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
What can be linked?
Series and series Links corresponding images of two series. If one series contains
less images than the other, the additional images cannot be linked.
Results : The same number of new images as contained in the se-
ries with the smaller number of images. The sequence of results
images depends on the sequence of images in the series.
Series and image The image is linked to each image in the series.
Results : As many images as are contained in the series. The se-
quence of results images depends on the sequence of images in the
series.
Series 1
Series 2
Results
Series
Results
Image
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Series and constant Constants are linked to each image of the series. Can be used with
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Results : As many images as are contained in the series. The se-
quence of results images depends on the sequence of images in the
series.
Image and image Images are linked to one another.
Result : One image; for T1 and T2 calculations two images (includ-
ing a density image.
Series
Results
Constant
Image 2
Result
Image 1
Rev. 07
E.148 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image and constant The constant is linked to an image. Can be used with addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Result : One image.
Series Links all selected images of a series with one another.
Result : For mean, standard deviation and slope of regression lines
one image. For T2 calculations two images (including density
image). For logarithms, as many images as initial number of im-
ages used (for differentiation and integration one image less).
Image
Result
Constant
Series Result
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Multiple series The rst images of each series are linked with one another, the sec-
ond images of each series are linked with one another, etc. If there
are series with less images than others, the additional image are
not linked.
Results : The same number of new images as contained in the se-
ries with the smallest number of images. The sequence of results
images results from the sequence of images in the series.
Evaluating multiple series page E.1420.
Series 1
Series 2
Series 3
Results
Rev. 07
E.1410 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Adding/subtracting grey values
Subtraction can be used, for example, to show changes after ad-
ministration of contrast agent.
Type of linking:
O series and series
O series and image
O series and constant
O image and image
O image and constant
First Operand: Select a series or image.
Operation: Select Add/Subtract.
Second Operand: Select the series, image, or constant that you want to link with
the rst operand.
To prescale the results image page E.1425.
To start the evaluation page E.1427.
C H E C K L I S T
7 All selected images have
the same FOV, matrix size,
and slice orientation
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Multiplying/dividing grey values
Multiplication is used to rescale grey values in the images.
Division can be used, for example, to showchanges after adminis-
tration of contrast agent.
Type of linking:
O series and series (division)
O series and image (division)
O series and constant
O image and image (division)
O image and constant
First Operand: Select a series or image.
Operation: Select Multiply/Divide.
Second Operand: Multiplication: Select the constant by which you want to
multiply the series or image.
Division: Select the series, image, or constant by which you
want to divide the rst operand.
C H E C K L I S T
Rev. 07
E.1412 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Reducing interference in Steady
State (CISS)
NOT
MAGNETOM OPEN
CISS enables you to reduce interference modulations (appear as
black streaks) in images which are generated using the old CISS
sequences (ciss_pm_8b195 and ciss_pp_8b195).
Correlating the series
First Operand: Select the ciss_pm series.
Operation: Select CISS.
Second Operand: Select the corresponding ciss_pp series.
Limiting post-processing to image pairs
You can limit the evaluation to image pairs of the same slice posi-
tion from the two series.
First Operand: Select the desired image from the ciss_pm series.
Operation: Select CISS.
Second Operand: Select the corresponding image of the same slice position
from the ciss_pp series.
CISS
CISS
1
ciss_pm image
2
ciss_pp image
C H E C K L I S T
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting CISS evaluation
(For details: Starting the evaluation page E.1427).
Series Name: Enter a name for the results series.
Start calculating results images.
The results series contains the same number of images as the
smaller of the two input series. The sequence of results images re-
sults from the sequence of images in the two input series.
Go
ciss results image
Rev. 07
E.1414 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculating a T1-weighted image
A T
1
-weighted image is calculated using two images with different
repetition times (TR).
First Operand: Select an image from the rst series with a
shorter repetition time (e.g. TR=250 ms).
Second Operand: From the second series, select an image at
the same slice position with a longer
repetition time (e.g. TR=3000 ms).
Operation: Switch to T1 calculation in the menu.
To prescale the results image page E.1425. For example, you can
eliminate the noise level by means of a histogram. Continue to
scale until the results are satisfactory.
Image
Image
1
TR=250 ms
2
TR=3000 ms
T1
C H E C K L I S T
7 Measure two series with
differentrepetitiontimeTR.
All other parameters must
be identical.
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting T1 calculation
The results series contains a T
1
image and a T
2
-weighted density
image.
Please note: During subsequent evaluation with Statistics, the
mean value within the ROI corresponds to the T
1
value in ms.
Go
1
T1 image
2
T2-weighted density image
Rev. 07
E.1416 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculating a T2-weighted image
AT
2
-weighted image is calculated using two or more images with
different echo times (TE).
For double echo
First Operand: Select the image with the shorter echo time
as the rst image (e.g. TE=50 ms).
Second Operand: Select the image with the longer echo time as
the second image (e.g. TE=400 ms).
For multiecho series
First Operand: Select the desired multiecho series.
For multislice series:
Range: O Switch on the range selection.
Next to the checkbox, enter the numbers of the images to be
evaluated.
Criteria: Same slice position with increasing echo time.
Example: 12,15,18,21,24, etc. (in the case of three slice positions in
anatomical order)
Image
Image
1
TE=50 ms
2
TE=400 ms
Series
C H E C K L I S T
7 Measure images with
different echo times. All
other parameters must be
identical.
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Operation: Switch to T2 calculation in the menu.
Starting T2 calculation
The results series contains a T
2
image and a T
1
-weighted density
image.
T2
Go
1
T2 image
2
T1-weighted density image
Rev. 07
E.1418 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Obtaining the logarithm of
grey values
Logarithm calculations are used to reduce the pronounced differ-
ences in intensity between images in a series.
First Operand: Select the input series
Range: O Limit the range of images as necessary.
Operation: Select Logarithm.
The results series has the same number of images as the input se-
ries or the selected image range.
Series
Logarithm
C H E C K L I S T
7 Images havethesameFOV
and matrix size.
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Differentiation/Integration
First Operand: Select the series to be evaluated.
Range: O Limit the range of images if necessary.
Operation: Select Differentiation/Integral.
The results series contains one image less than the input series or
the selected image range.
Series
C H E C K L I S T
and matrix size.
Rev. 07
E.1420 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Evaluating multiple series
A range of series may be statistically evaluated as well. In this
case, the corresponding images of each series are linked (page
E.149). A typical example is a contrast agent evaluation, where
the same slice position is imaged over time.
Multiple Operands: O Switch to Multiple Operands by clicking the check box.
The displayed function window changes.
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The different types of linking
Operation: You select linking from a WINDOW MENU.
Calculates the slope of the regression line
(page E.1422).
Calculates the mean of grey values
(page E.1423).
Calculates the standard deviation of the mean value
(page E.1423).
Generates BOLD images
(page E.1424).
Thetypeof linkingselectedis Multiple
Operands (multipleseries);
refer to pageE.144for singlelinkingtype.
Slope
Mean
Std Dev
Z-Score
Notice
The Z-Score linking is not used with MAGNETOM Open
at this time.
Rev. 07
E.1422 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculating the slope of the
regression line
Calculating the slope can, for example, be used to showthe varied
enhancement speeds of different types of tissue in contrast agent
series.
Multiple Operands: O Switch to Multiple Series.
Operands: Select the series to be used from the list.
The list can be scrolled if necessary.
Your selections are displayed under Selected Series.
Operation: Select Slope.
Slope
C H E C K L I S T
and matrix size
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculating the mean value/
standard deviation
Mean value calculation can be used to average images of the same
type, for example, to reduce artifacts.
Standard deviation is used, for example, to show regional varia-
tions in contrast agent enrichment. No differentiation is made be-
tween positive and negative changes.
Operands: Select the series to be used from the list.
Operation: Select Mean/Std Dev.
C H E C K L I S T
7 Images must have the
same FOV and matrix size
Rev. 07
E.1424 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating BOLD images NOT
MAGNETOM OPEN
As a prerequisite for generating BOLD images, the series to be
evaluated have to be grouped according to activation and non-acti-
vation images. In addition, the series have to contain the same
number of slices.
Operands: Select the series in the list.
You can scroll the list if necessary.
Operation: Select Z-Score.
Group the selected series according to activation and non-
activation images.
The list provided for this purpose contains the series selected.
Select only activation series from the list.
They will be allocated to the rst operand. The remaining series
are automatically allocated as non-activation series.
Conrm the grouping of the series.
Z-Score
Group
Go
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Prescaling the results
Result : If necessary, the results values to be generated can be prescaled us-
ing reference values. The reference values are produced by calcu-
lating a results image.
Calculating the temporary results image
There is a special procedure for calculating the temporary results
image.
Order Number for Scaling: Enter the number of the image to be used as the temporary
results image.
Example: Two series containing 20 images each should be added.
If you enter 3 as the number of the results image, the
third image of the rst series and the third image of the
second series are added to produce temporary results
image 3.
Generating a histogram
You can calculate a histogram of pixels in the results image in or-
der to numerically evaluate and scale the temporary results ob-
tained.
Generate a histogram of the results image.
The histogram is displayed in the second segment.
Scale
Example of a histogram
Rev. 07
E.1426 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scaling the results image with reference values
The parameter elds are lled with data from the histogram.
Change the reference values in the elds to obtain a homogeneous
distribution of grey intensity.
Offset : Offset value for grey intensity
Scale: Scaling factor
Range: Minimum and maximum values of the range
If you change the value for offset and scaling factor or for mini-
mumand maximum, the corresponding value is changed as well.
You can also sample the histogram and change the reference
value. Drag the arrow across the axes with the mouse. The values
for Scale and Range change automatically.
Scale the histogram with the new values.
The histogram changes accordingly.
This procedure may be repeated until the desired results are ob-
tained.
Displaying the temporary results image
Display the results image in the rst segment.
Scale
Display
T I P
Toreversethescalingfor T1or
T2 calculations, set the
following:
Offset: 0
Scale: 1
Dynamic evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the evaluation
Generating a results series
Series Name: Enter a name for the results series. Otherwise, a name is gener-
ated. The generated name comprises the operation, rst and sec-
ond operand, and the date.
Example: Sub_S45_I31-110394
O Operation: Subtraction
O First Operand: Series 45
O Second Operand: Image 31
O Date : March 11, 1994
During the calculation, the incremental image numbers are dis-
played in the footer of the function window.
The calculated images are appended to the patient list of the active
patient as a results series. The series and its images are labelled
DYN (for dynamic evaluation).
A notice box is displayed if the series name already exists.
Click Cancel to terminate the calculation. Click Continue to continue
the calculation with the specied series name.
Go
Series name already
exists
?
Rev. 07
E.1428 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The calculation is terminated if the FOVand matrix size of linked images
are not identical.
A notice box or a notice in the footer of the function window is displayed.
Correct your selection so that the evaluation may continue.
A notice box or a notice in the footer of the function window is displayed
if the slice orientation or position of linked images is not identical.
Terminate the evaluation with Cancel or continue with Continue.
A notice is displayed in the footer of the function window if the number
of images for two operands is not the same.
The additional images from the larger of the two image ranges set are not
calculated.
Reusing new images
The new images which have been produced can be used for other
evaluation functions, in particular Mean/Curve (chapter E.12).
FOV or matrix size
not identical
?
Slice orientation or
position not identical
?
Number of images
not identical
?
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.15
Generating prole cuts
The Evaluate Prole function displays the distribution of grey
value information along a specic cut line as a diagram. The result
is an intensity curve across the area.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
Rev. 07
Evaluate Prole
E.152 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the Prole window to set the orientation of the cut lines and
the type of scaling for the Y axis, as well as to start the prole cut.
Ends the function and stores the parameters set for subsequent
function selection.
If you would like to call images that are already stored with their
corresponding cut line :
Only display cut lines added in the image via
File Copy Segment.
Please note: A new cut line drawn into the active segment is de-
leted.
Use the cut line currently drawn in the image and ignore
the stored lines.
Del All
Cancel
Exit
Image Call Up
with Graphics:
Yes
No
Generating prole cuts
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the parameters
Orientation: Set the orientation of the cut line.
Superimposes a horizontal line across the entire
width of the segment. The line can be
shifted upward and downward.
Superimposes a vertical line across the entire
height of the segment. The line can be
shifted to the left and to the right.
To draw a freely selectable line of any
orientation. You set the start and end points by
dragging the mouse.
To draw a irregular curve (freehand curve or
polygon.
Please note: If you selected Variable or Irregular, the start point of
the cut line always corresponds to the zero point of the X axis (refer
to next page).
Scaling: Enter the type of scaling for the Y axis.
Uses the full value range of image information
for scaling.
Uses the windowing values for scaling. If you
change these values the displayed prole cut is
immediately rescaled according to the new
values.
Horizontal
Vertical
Variable
Irregular
Full
Window
T I P
refer to the manual
chapter A.4 and
chapter A.5.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Prole
E.154 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Evaluating the prole cut
Start the prole cut.
Please note: The MR image and the prole cut are not related geo-
metrically.
Move the longer sampling line with the mouse.
The short sampling line will be displaced accordingly along the
cut line in the image and indicates the position being sampled.
When the long sampling line is moved, the current position and
corresponding image data are displayed:
O Upper value : local coordinates in cm
O Value in parentheses : pixel position within the image matrix
O Lower value : grey value
The cut line may subsequently be moved with the mouse, generat-
ing a new prole.
Please note: When paging through images in the active segment,
the diagrams are deleted.
Copies cut lines to another segment. Prerequisite: source andtarget
image belong to the same series. First, select the cut line. Then
press the Copy button. Finally, click the segment where you want
to copy.
Deletes the selected cut line.
Go
Horizontal cut line
Theprolecut is superimposed
over theimage. Ashort sampling
lineis superimposedover thecut
lineintheimage, andalonger
samplinglineissuperimposedover
theoutput curve.
Xaxis : local coordinates incm.
Y axis : greyvalues.
Copy
Delete
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.16
Cardiac evaluation
The Evaluate Cardiac function is used to evaluate images ob-
tained from cardiac imaging. Various ventricular and myocardial
parameters can be calculated.
Display an image of the patient to be evaluated in the rst
segment.
During the evaluation, the active image is always displayed in the
rst segment. The second segment is available for tables and dia-
grams.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Imageof thedesiredpatient
is in the active segment.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.162 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting cardiac series
After the function is called, the series list of the patient whose im-
age is displayed in the active segment appears. Select the desired
cardiac series (multiple choice possible). The series must be of the
same slice orientation. Conrm your selection by clicking Go.
Select Mode: To segment images. Generates inner and
outer cardiac wall contours (page E.164).
To calculate ventricular or myocardial
parameters (page E.1612).
The following markings may be next to the image number after
segmentation or calculation:
C contours have been generated
V ventricular volume has been calculated
S systolic volume has been calculated
D diastolic volume has been calculated
Thecardiac image list is
displayedinthesecondsegment.
Images of theselectedseries and
their imagenumbers are
displayedinthecolumns and
rows.
Rows : images acquiredinthe
same phase of the cardiac cycle
(i.e., at thesametime),
Columns : images withthesame
slice position.
Segmentation
Calculation
T I P
Shift the image list if
necessary.
To nd a particular image,
scroll the list horizontally or
vertically.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
To perform cardiac evaluation, you rst segment the selected im-
ages and then perform the desired calculations and evaluations.
Calls the cardiac image list if you previously exited from it.
Selects additional cardiac series from the series list.
Ends the function and saves the parameters set for subsequent
function selection.
O Generating contours automatically (page E.165),
O Generating contours manually (page E.167),
O Processing contours (page E.169).
Calculation Calculates ventricular volume (page E.1612).
Evaluation Displays results in tables and diagrams
(page E.1616).
Ima Matrix
Select Series
Exit
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.164 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Segmenting images
The inner and outer cardiac wall contours must be drawn prior to
calculating the ventricular volume and myocardial thickness of an
image.
Transverse axis images Transverse axis images are perpendicular to the cardiac axis.
Longitudinal axis images Longitudinal axis images are oriented to the cardiac axis, either
parallel or orthogonal to the ventricular septum.
Set the Select Mode switch in the cardiac image list to
Segmentation.
Axis Type Set the axis orientation.
To process transverse axis images.
To process longitudinal axis images.
Keep graphics Indicate whether contours drawn in the image should be
retained for subsequent images selected.
Retain contours.
Delete contours.
Please note: If you retain contours and load an image which has al-
ready been segmented, its contours will be overwritten and de-
leted. A notice box is displayed so that you can prevent
overwriting using Cancel.
Select the image to be segmented in the cardiac image list.
The image is displayed in the active segment.
Longitudinal cardiac axis
Apex of the heart
Aortic valve
Thecardiac measurement
differentiates betweenone
transverseandtwo longitudinal
orientations. Thelatter
orientations arebasedonthe
longitudinal cardiac axis, an
imaginarylinebetweentheaortic
valveandtheapexof theheart.
Segmentation
Short
Long
Yes
No
T I P
SwitchKeep graphics toYes if
sequential images are
anatomicallysimilar. Contours
are much easier to process
anddonot havetoberedrawn
for each image
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating contours automatically
Limitation: Only transverse axis images acquired using gradient
echo (that is, with a light ventricular lumen) can be segmented au-
tomatically.
Set an image point within the ventricle ; use this point as the start-
ing point of the calculation.
Activate the setting of the starting point.
Click in the center of the interior of the left ventricle.
The starting point is displayed as a cross in the image. The starting
point may be repositioned if necessary.
Automatic
Contour Creation
Int Point
Left ventricle
Left atrium
C H E C K L I S T
7 Transverse axis images
acquiredwithgradientecho
have been selected
7 Axis Type set to Short
7 Select Mode set to
Segmentation
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.166 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conrm the position of the starting point.
The inner and outer cardiac wall contours are automatically gen-
erated and superimposed on the image.
The contours may now be processed or deleted if necessary (page
E.169).
Conrm the contours.
A C is displayed before the corresponding image number in the
cardiac image list. The image has been segmented.
Select the next image you want to segment and generate the
contours.
Repeat this procedure for all images you want to segment.
Apply
Conrm
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Generating contours manually
Manual Contour Creation Contours are manually dened by drawing an irregular curve
with the mouse. For longitudinal axis images, the lines of the
curve begin and end in the valve plane and trace the contours of
the cardiac wall.
Contour Type Select the type of contour desired.
To draw an inner cardiac wall contour.
To draw an outer cardiac wall contour.
Drawing the contour
Activate draw mode.
Use the mouse to trace an irregular, open curve along the
contour.
Keep the curve open along the cardiac base line.
Complete tracing by double-clicking the mouse button.
The contour can be modied or deleted as necessary (page
E.169).
ventricle
myocard
Draw
T I P
Magnifythesegmentedimage
with theMagnify function
(chapter E.1).
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.168 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Closing the contour
Close the contour.
In longitudinal axis images, the two ends of the contour are con-
nected by a straight line (cardiac base line). At the same time the
cardiac axis is generated. The cardiac axis extends from the center
of the cardiac base line to the farthest point (at the apex) of the con-
tour.
Correcting the contour
It may be necessary to correct the cardiac axis for the volume cal-
culation (rotation of the axis during the calculation) by dragging
the mouse.
Correct the displayed contour if necessary.
Draw a new open polygon in the image. The existing contour is
automatically corrected. Complete the new contour by clicking
Close.
Conrming the contour
Conrm the contour.
A C is displayed before the appropriate image number in the car-
diac image list. The image has been segmented.
Close
Longitudinal axis
Cardiac base line
Apex of the heart
Correct
Conrm
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing contours
Contour Editing A generated contour may be subsequently modied or deleted.
Selecting contours
Activate Select mode, if necessary.
Position the mouse pointer at any point along the edge of the
contour and click the mouse button.
Eight grab handles along the contour indicate the graphic has
been selected.
Deleting contours
Deletes a selected contour.
Please note: The cardiac base line may not be deleted indepen-
dently. While it can be modied, the inner cardiac wall contour
must be deleted in order to delete the cardiac base line.
Deletes all contours and all other graphics in the image.
Select
C H E C K L I S T
7 Cardiac image is displayed
7 Contours generated
manually or automatically
Delete
Del All
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1610 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Moving contours
Move the contour to the desired position by dragging it with
the mouse.
Modifying contours
Set the Mode switch to Edit.
Position the pointer on the edge to be modied, click the
mouse button, and drag the edge in the desired direction.
Thecontour is shiftedinthedesired
direction.
Edit
Asinglecorner is pulledout of the
edge.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dividing contours
Set the Mode switch to Divide.
Click the mouse button at the two points where the polygon
should be divided.
Two open polygons with eight grab handles each are produced.
For example, you may now delete one of the open polygons and
complete the open contour by drawing and closing another open
polygon.
Rotating contours
Set the Mode switch to Rotate.
Select the contour.
The center of rotation is displayed within the contour.
Position the pointer on the edge of the contour, click the
mouse button, and rotate the contour in the desired direction.
The contour is rotated by the desired angle about the axis.
Div
Rot
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1612 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calculating the ventricular volume
When calculating the ventricular volume and other parameters,
select segmented images corresponding to various points of time
in the cardiac cycle. When the calculation is completed, the results
may be displayed as a table or diagram for additional analysis.
Set the Select Mode switch in the cardiac image list to
Calculation.
You may now select several images. All images must be seg-
mented (C is displayed before the image number).
Selecting images
Select the images to be used from the cardiac image list.
To calculate the volume for a specic time, select all images in the
corresponding row; for example, the rst row(time point 0) in the
end diastolic phase.
To select an entire row or column, click the corresponding time or
slice position display.
Calculation
T I P
If an image is missing or has
not beensegmented: youcan
take an image entry from a
neighboringlinewiththesame
slice position if the cardiac
contour only deviates slightly.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the computation method
All additional data is entered in the Calculation eld of the Car-
diac window.
Computation Method Select the method for calculating the ventricular volume.
3-D slice summation method (the only method which
may be used for transverse axis images).
Ventricular volume is calculated froma group of slices acquired at
the same time point (corresponds to one row of the cardiac image
list).
Area-Length Method (for longitudinal axis images
only).
The area-length method uses a rotation ellipsoid to describe the
area of the ventricle ; the longitudinal cardiac axis serves as the
axis of rotation. The volume is calculated fromthe area of the ven-
tricle and the length of the cardiac axis.
2-D slice summation method (for longitudinal axis
images only).
The ventricular volume is calculated froma group of rotated sym-
metrical slices.
Calculation eld
SSM 3D
ALM
SSM 2D
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1614 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selectingandcalculatingthecomputationtimepoint
Computation Time Point Select the time point in the cardiac cycle for calculating the ven-
tricular volume :
Calculate the diastolic volume with the images selected for
time point 0.
The result is displayed in the second results row in the Calcula-
tion eld.
Dias: Time Time point of the end diastole (in milliseconds)
EDV Volume of the end diastole (in milliliters)
EDMM Myocardial mass of the end diastole (in grams)
Calculate the ventricular volume for various time points
within the cardiac cycle.
The result is displayed in the second row of the eld.
Time Time point in milliseconds
Vol Ventricular volume in milliliters
MM Myocardial mass
Calculate the systolic volume.
The result is displayed in the third row of the eld.
Sys: Time Time point of the end systole (in milliseconds)
ESV Volume of the end systole (in milliliters)
ESMM Myocardial mass of the end systole (in grams)
dias
other
sys
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Computing the relative ejection fraction
The relative ejection fraction is the ratio between the ejection frac-
tion and the patient body surface. Both the diastolic and systolic
volume are required for the calculation. Additionally, the patients
height must be entered.
Start calculating the patient body surface.
Patient Height Enter the patients height in centimeters via the keyboard, or
use the arrows.
Perform the calculation with the value entered.
The patient body surface is calculated from the patients height
and the weight entered during registration. The patient body sur-
face value is displayed in square centimeters in the Patient Body
Surface text eld.
Exit the window.
The result is displayed in the Calculation eld:
SV Stroke volume in milliliters
EF Ejection fraction in percent
rel. EF Relative ejection fraction in percent per square meter of
patient body surface
P Height
Apply
Apply
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1616 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying the results of
the evaluation
Evaluation The Evaluate Cardiac function uses two evaluation methods :
O evaluation of time-dependent ventricular parameters and
O myocardial evaluation.
Ventricular parameters may also be evaluated for longitudinal
axis images.
The results are displayed as a table or graph in the top right seg-
ment using the Evaluation eld of the function window.
Tables The calculated ventricular parameters and the results of the time-
related and myocardial evaluations may be displayed in tables.
Curves The results of the time-related and myocardial evaluations may be
displayed as curves.
Output Youcan adapt the display of the results to your own requirements.
Modies the scale of axes in the curve diagram (page E.1622).
Pages up to the next table.
All tables and diagrams may be stored in the cardiac series being
used. You will be queried via a notice box.
Scaling
Next Table
T I P
The tables and diagrams are
displayed in the second
segment. For this reason,
closethecardiac imagelist so
that thesecondsegment is not
covered.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Tables
Displays a summary of the ventricular calculation
(page E.1618).
Evaluates time-dependent ventricular volume and ll rate
(change in the ventricular volume over time) (page E.1618).
Evaluates the myocardial wall thickness and signal intensity
(average grey scale).
Evaluates the relative movement and speed of the myocardium
between two time points.
Evaluates the ventricular parameters of a longitudinal axis image.
Graphs
Displays the ventricular volume over time (page E.1619).
Displays the ll rate (change in ventricular volume over time).
Displays the absolute myocardial thickness.
Displays the myocardial intensity (page E.1620).
Displays the myocardial contraction distance between two points
in time (page E.1621).
Displays the myocardial contraction velocity.
Displays the ventricular wall distance.
Displays the ventricular wall velocity.
Displays the distance between two myocardial walls.
Displays the velocity of two myocardial walls.
Summary
Time
Myo Region
Myo Dyna
Vent Param
Volume
Fill Rate
Myo Thk
Myo Int
MCD
MCV
VWD
VWV
MWD
MWV
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1618 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Examples of tables
The tables can display a maximum of 20 lines. If this is
insufcient :
Page up to the next page of the table.
Summary of the ventricular calculation
Display the summary.
Time-dependent ventricular volume and ll rate
Select several images from the cardiac image list.
Display the time-dependent parameters.
Next Table
Summary
TheCardiac Evaluation
Summary tableis displayed.
Thetabledisplays theresults
obtainedfromtheventricular
volumecalculation.
Time
TheTime Functions tableis
displayed.
If thetablecontains onlyone
ventricular volume, thell rate
cannot bedetermined. Thell rate
is thesameif two ventricular
volumesaredisplayed. Thell rates
varyif threeor moreventricular
volumes aredisplayed.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Examples of curves
Aminimumof ve values are required to display an evaluation as
a curve.
Ventricular volume
Display the results of the volume computation in a graph. Volume
TheTimeVolume diagramis
displayed.
Whenyouselect acurvewiththe
mouse, theintersectionwiththeX
andY axes is displayed. By
draggingthemouse, thehorizontal
lineis shiftedinthevertical
direction. Theprecisevalues are
displayednext to theaxes.
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1620 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Myocardial intensity
Display the myocardial intensity in a graph.
If there is more than one curve, a three-dimensional coordinate
system is displayed. The position of the myocardium is displayed
on the X axis, the myocardial intensity on the Y axis, and the vari-
ous slice positions or time points along the Z axis. The scale of the
Z axis may be modied with the mouse.
Myocardial intensity may also be displayed in one of the follow-
ing forms :
O as a function over time with a constant slice position: select a
column from the cardiac image list, or
O as a function over the slice position at a specic time : select a row
from the cardiac image list.
Myo Int
TheMyocardial Intensity
diagramdisplays therelativegrey
scaleof themyocardium.
Cardiac evaluation
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Myocardial contraction distance
The myocardial contraction distance between two points in time is
computed and displayed in a graph.
Select two images in the cardiac image list having the same
slice position.
Display the MCD in a graph.
The regions are dened as follows :
O Transverse axis : The center point is located in the center of the
contour (Center Line Method, as in angiography).
O Longitudinal axis : The center point is located in the middle of the
central axis.
MCD
TheMyocardial Contraction
Distance diagramis displayed.
401
2
3
10
20
30
1 2
3
20
30
Rev. 07
Evaluate Cardiac
E.1622 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scaling the axes
The axes for the curves are scaled using an upper and a lower
limit. The scale may be modied as desired.
Activate scaling.
Axis Limit Indicate which curve limit you want to change.
To change the lower limit.
To change the upper limit.
X-Axis Enter the new limits for the X axis.
Y-Axis Enter the new limits for the Y axis.
Legend Indicate where you want to position the legend of a curve in
the three-dimensional coordinate system.
Next to the intersection with the Z-axis.
At the right end of the curve.
You can cancel your settings, if necessary. (Prerequisite: Entries
have not been conrmed yet with Apply).
Reuse the default settings.
Conrm your input.
The scale on the displayed coordinate system is updated.
Exit the parameter window.
Scaling
min
max
left
right
Reset
Default
Apply
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.17
Flow quantication evaluation
The Evaluate Flow Quantication function allows you to ana-
lyze and evaluate the intensity of blood ow in phase-sensitive
owimages. The images are generated with 2-Dphase contrast or
RACE.
Load a ow image into the third segment and the
corresponding vascular localizer image into the rst
segment.
Please note: The terms phase difference image, phase image,
and ow image all have the same meaning.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Magnify. . .
Roam. . .
Distance. . .
Angle. . .
Grid. . .
MPR. . .
MIP. . .
Scroll . . .
Manipulate. . .
Label . . .
Statistics. . .
Mean/Curve. . .
Filter . . .
Dyn. Analysis . . .
Profile. . .
Cardiac. . .
Not MAGNETOM Open
C H E C K L I S T
7 Flow image and localizer
image have the same
FOV
Slice position
Slice orientation
7 Phasecontrastimage: ow
image and localizer image
arealso of thesamematrix
size
Rev. 07
Evaluate Flow Quantication
E.172 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The FlowQuantication window displays the following:
Patient Name: Name of the active patient
Image Type: Type of active image (2-D phase contrast or RACE;
otherwise, an error message is displayed).
To evaluate the ow images of another patient, select the patient
using Patient Select (chapter A.1). To select another series of the
active patient, select it with Series Select (chapter C.1).
Please note: A notice box is displayed if the localizer and ow im-
ages are from different series. This precaution ensures that the lo-
calizer and ow images belong to the same patient.
Ends the function. The parameters set are retained.
Correct and scale
the ow diagram
Delimit vessel
of interest
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Basic sequence of ow evaluation
Then start the evaluation.
To delimit the vessel of interest, drawan ROI in the owimage
to be evaluated.
Evaluate 2-D phase contrast
(page E.174)
Evaluate RACE
(page E.177)
If the generated output curve includes phase wraps, adjust the
displayed intensity range accordingly (page E.179)
Shift the baseline of the curve or correct it with a reference ROI
(page E.1710)
Scale the curve (page E.1711)
Superimpose the output curve on the MR image
(page E.1712)
C H E C K L I S T
7 Thethirdsegment contains
a ow image.
7 The rst segment contains
a localizer image (optional
for 2-D phase contrast)
Rev. 07
E.174 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Evaluating 2-D phase contrast
images
The selected images must fulll all prerequisites (page E.171).
Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
Limiting the image range
If necessary, the number of cardiac phases (the image range of the
ow image series) can be delimited.
Select the images to be used fromthe list (multiple selection
possible).
If you do not select images, the entire series will be used for the
evaluation.
Delimiting a cross-section of the vessel
To delimit the cross section of interest, draw an ROI in the local-
izer image in the rst segment. An ROI can also be drawn in the
phase contrast image in the third segment.
ROI Denition: Switch to evaluation ROI to calculate the
blood ow.
Draw: Set the type of ROI you want to draw into the image.
Draws a circular ROI.
Draws a freehand ROI.
Draw the ROI in the active image.
Ensure that the freehand graphics do not overlap or intersect. The
ROI will be closed automatically after you double-click the mouse.
The ROI should be no larger than the size of the vessel. The posi-
tion and size of the ROI may be subsequently corrected with the
mouse.
Please note: If you click one of the Draw buttons again, the ROI is
deleted.
Ima Sel...
Evaluation
Circle
Free
T I P
refer to the manual
chapter A.4 and
chapter A.5.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dynamically positioning the ROI
In the case of vessel close to the heart (e.g., aorta) the position of
the vessel in the image series can vary over the cardiac period. In
this case, you can shift the ROI image for image.
Dynamic ROI: O Click the checkbox
Draw: Drawthe desired ROI in the phase contrast image in the third
segment (circle or free hand curve).
Start dynamic positioning.
A small function window is displayed for shifting the ROI.
Use Next to display the next image of the series. If the ROI is no
longer aligned with the vessel, it can be shifted with the mouse.
Once the ROIs are positioned satisfactorily, conrm the positions
by clicking Complete.
Deleting an ROI
Graphics: Deletes the selected ROI.
Deletes all graphics in the image.
Go
Delete
Delete All
Rev. 07
E.176 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the evaluation 2-D PHASE CONTRAST
Start the evaluation for the respective ROI.
The output curve can be sampled. To limit the interval to be eval-
uated:
Use the mouse to drag the triangle superimposed on the
curve along the X axis.
The corresponding sampling lines and curve values (time and ve-
locity) are displayed for both axes. The evaluation results are cal-
culated and displayed for the new interval.
Phase correction page E.179
Correcting the baseline of the curve page E.1710
Scaling the curve page E.1711
Superimposing the output curve page E.1712
Go
Time
Flow
Flow direction
cranial (+)
Flow direction
caudal ()
velocity
Theoutput curveis displayedin
thesecond segment. Thecurve
indicates velocityover time: the
entirerangeof owvelocities (in
cm/s) for theevaluatedimages is
displayedalongtheY axis (after
thetrigger delaytimeinms along
theXaxis).
Intheoutput curveyoucan
determinethemeanvelocitywithin
thevessel as well as theactual ow
ratefor anentirecardiac cycle.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Evaluating RACE images
The selected images must fulll all prerequisites (page E.171).
Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
Drawing an ROI
ROI Denition: Switch to an Evaluation ROI for the ow
calculation.
Draw: Start drawing the ROI.
Use the mouse to select the position in the localizer image
containing the vessel.
A small rectangle is superimposed on the localizer image. The
rectangle is automatically enlarged to include the full height of the
segment (or in the case of reverse phase encoding, the complete
width of the segment). At the same time, a rectangular ROI is su-
perimposed on the RACE image. The rectangle covers the entire
time period measured.
Please note: If you click the Rectangle button again, the existing
ROI is deleted.
Limiting the time frame
To limit the number of cardiac cycles to be evaluated:
Select the 3rd (third) segment.
Limit the time frame for the evaluation as required.
The last ROI generated in the RACE image is automatically se-
lected. You can now drag the rectangle vertically (or horizontally
for phase swapping) via the grab handles.
Evaluation
Rectangle
Range
Rev. 07
E.178 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting the evaluation
Start the evaluation for the respective ROI.
Phase correction page E.179
Correcting the baseline of the curve page E.1710
Scaling the curve page E.1711
Superimposing the output curve page E.1712
Go
Time
Flow
Flow direction
cranial (+)
Flow direction
caudal ()
velocity
Limit the
time range
Theoutput curveis displayedin
thesecond segment. Thecurve
indicates velocityover time: the
entirerangeof owvelocities (in
cm/s) for theevaluatedimages is
displayedalongtheY axis. The
actual timerange(inms)
evaluatedis displayedalongtheX
axis.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Phase correction of the output curve
Measured phase differences of more than 180 degrees result in
ambiguities when interpreting the ow velocity. These PHASE
WRAPS in the output curve can be corrected without having to re-
peat the measurement using a different ow sensitivity.
Velocity Range: Set the velocity range along the Y axis. (Use the mouse to shift
the slide control in the desired direction.)
Apply the phase correction to the output curve.
Output curve
with phase wraps;
incorrect velocity displayed
Intheexampleaboveof cranial-
caudal ow, phasewraps affect
thepositivevelocityrange. Move
theslidecontrol totheleft toward
thenegativevalues (inthis case,
approx. 60cm/s).
Apply Corr
Corrected output curve
without phase wraps
Repeat theprocedureuntil you
obtainasatisfactoryresult.
Rev. 07
E.1710 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Correcting the curve
Shifting the baseline
To shift the baseline of the curve by a constant value:
Switch to Offset.
Enter the desired value in the numerical eld or click the arrows.
Apply the offset to the output curve.
The curve is shifted accordingly.
Correcting the baseline via a reference ROI
A reference ROI is facultative. The mean intensity of the reference
ROI is subtracted from the curve.
ROI Denition: Switches baseline correction to
Reference ROI.
Draw: Draw the reference ROI into the localizer image.
This is done in the same manner as for the evaluation ROI.
To differentiate it fromother ROIs, a reference ROI is marked Ref.
The marking can be moved or deleted if necessary.
Start the evaluation using the reference ROI.
The mean value for the ROI is calculated and stored internally.
The curve is modied accordingly.
Please note: A reference ROI can be drawn at the beginning of the
evaluation when you draw the evaluation ROI. In this case, the
evaluation only has to be started once.
Base Line Correction by: Offset
Apply Corr
Reference
Go
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Scaling the curve
You can limit or extend the axes of the displayed output curve.
Open the Curve Scaling window.
Axis Limit Indicate the axis limits you want to set.
Lower axis limits
Upper axis limits
Enter the desired value.
The slide control can be used only to limit the axes. Enter a value in
the numerical eld to extend the limit. Conrm your input by
pressing RETURN.
X-Axis Sets limits of the X axis.
Y-Axis Sets limits of the Y axis.
Conrm your input.
Resets changes made. The current limits are displayed.
Reuse the default settings.
Close the parameter window.
Scaling...
min
max
Apply
Reset
Default
Cancel
Rev. 07
E.1712 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Superimposing the curve on the
image
To document the evaluation results in a single image:
Activate the rst segment.
Superimpose the output curve on the active image.
This function can be performed as often as desired (refer to the g-
ure). For each additional ROI, perform the evaluation and super-
impose the output curve on the image as described.
You can delete individual curves and notes.
Select the element to be deleted with the mouse.
Results images that you want to retain must be explicitly stored
(page F.25).
Overlay
Delete
CopSeg
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
E.18
Cardiac evaluation (ARGUS)
The ARGUS program is used to evaluate images obtained from
cardiac imaging. Various ventricular and myocardial parameters
can be calculated.
ARGUS is accessed by the Numaris System Run function (chap-
ter K.2).
Please note: This option is not available for MAGNETOM Open.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.182 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
ARGUS image analysis platform
When RUN_ARGUS is executed from the SystemRun function a
Numaris-like database browser is displayed. The Cardiac Seg-
mentation menu is also displayed simultaneously, but remains
inactive until images are loaded via the database browser.
This window overlays the 4 image segments of the Numaris
screen. It does not overlay the Numaris right screen menu.
The top half of the ARGUS screen is used to display the image ma-
trix. Four rows and eight columns of images are displayed. Scroll
bars on the left side and bottom of the matrix can be used to pan
through the entire loaded image dataset.
RUN_ARGUS
Image
Magnied Display
Segment
Segment 1:
Image,
Segment 2:
Work Segment
or Output display
Active or
Work image
ARGUS menus
displayed here
ARGUS control panels
Matrix
ARGUS image analysis platform
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Any image in the matrix can be selected to be the active image by
moving the cursor to that image in the matrix and clicking the left
mouse button. The border of the currently active image is high-
lighted in the image matrix. The active image is displayed in the
lower left screen quadrant (Segment 1).
This quadrant is also used for:
O CINE display,
O manual contour drawing and editing,
O image window/center operations, and
O the display of output graphs.
The lower right screen quadrant is used to display the ARGUS
control panels, or a tabular report of myocardial thickening pa-
rameters.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.184 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Patient browser
Images to be analyzed are loaded into ARGUS directly from the
Numaris database through the database browser. The functional-
ity is similar, but not identical to the database browser in Numaris.
All ARGUS database browsers are displayed in the top half of the
ARGUS screen, overlaying the image matrix.
Initially the list of patients on the STORE device is displayed.
A single patient can be selected from this list by either a single left
mouse button click + Query, or by double clicking the left mouse
button on the patient name.
Selecting a patient causes the list of the series for that patient to be
displayed.
Exits ARGUS.
Query
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Series browser
Mode: These switches control the mode of operation of the series
browser.
Allows the user to select individual series from the list
by single left mouse button clicks, or by click-and-drag.
Will automatically select all of the series in the list.
Causes all of the images in the selected series to be loaded into the
ARGUS image matrix for analysis. The database browser is exited,
and the appropriate ARGUS window is activated.
Causes a list of images within all of the selected series to be dis-
played.
Takes the user back to the patient browser.
Select
All
Go
Query
Cancel
Rev. 07
Argus
E.186 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image browser
Mode: These switches control the mode of operation of the image
browser.
Allows the user to select individual images from the list
by single left mouse button clicks, or by click-and-drag.
Will automatically select all of the images in the list.
Causes all of the selected images to be loaded into the ARGUS im-
age matrix for analysis. The database browser is exited, and the
appropriate ARGUS window is activated. The loaded images
form the ARGUS working dataset.
Takes the user back to the patient browser.
Select
All
Go
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Cardiac Segmentation Menu
The Cardiac Segmentation Menu contains all of the functions
needed to manually or semi-automatically identify the myocar-
dial boundaries. Each of the sections of this menu will be de-
scribed individually in the following sections of this document.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.188 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
CINE Controls Menu Section
This menu section is common to all of the ARGUS work platforms.
It controls the CINE display of images in the working (lower left)
screen segment.
Begins CINE display of the row or column containing the cur-
rently active image. Once CINE is started, this button is converted
to a STOP button.
Slow Fast This slide bar controls the speed of the CINE display, from a slow-
est frame rate of 1 image per second, up to the fastest frame rate
that the hardware will allow.
Contours These four mutually exclusive switches control the display of my-
ocardial contours during the CINE display.
No contours are shown on the images in the CINE
display.
All available contours are shown on each image in the
CINE display.
Only the ED contours are shown during the CINE
display. This is used to help visualize the extent of
contraction of the myocardium from its ED position.
Only the ES contours are shown during the CINE
display. This is used to help visualize the extent of
relaxation of the myocardium from its ES position.
Temporal CINE
Circle mode
Spatial CINE
Yo-yo mode
START
Off
On
ED
ES
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Direction These two exclusive switches control the direction and mode of
the CINE display.
Temporal CINE will display all of the cardiac phases for the se-
lected slice position. The images will be displayed from the rst
cardiac phase to the last in order repetitively.
Spatial CINE will display all of the slice positions for the selected
cardiac phase. The images will be displayed from top to bottom,
then bottom to top, repetitively.
During CINE display, all of the controls within the CINE Controls
menu remain active and functional.
During CINE display, the user may select different rows or col-
umns to viewfromthe image matrix and the CINE display will be
updated accordingly.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1810 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Active Contour Menu Section
This section of the Cardiac Segmentation Menu is used to dene
the one active contour in the work image out of the three contours
which may exist. These three switches are mutually exclusive;
only one contour can be active at any time.
The active contour is displayed as white on a B&W monitor and
green on a color monitor. Inactive contours are black on a B&W
monitor and red on a color monitor.
The Tools functions of Draw, Edit, and Delete all refer to the active
contour only.
A double asterisk (**) next to the contour name indicates that the
contour currently exists in the active image.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Arrow Keys Menu Section
The arrowkeys are used to move through the image matrix in any
direction, one image at a time. A single mouse click on any arrow
button will change the active image to the one immediately adja-
cent to the currently active image, in the direction of the arrow. If
no image exists in the selected direction, no action is taken.
The border of the active image is highlighted in the image matrix
display.
The active image is always displayed in the work image sector; the
lower left quadrant of the ARGUS platform.
Single clicking the left mouse button on an image in the matrix to
activate it is equivalent to moving to the image using these arrow
buttons.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1812 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Tools Menu Section
This menu section appears in several ARGUS work menus. The
ve mutually exclusive switches control the tools for manipulat-
ing the contours, as well as selecting an image from the matrix,
and cropping (magnifying) the images.
When this switch is depressed, the user can select images fromthe
matrix by clicking directly on the desired image. Clicking on this
switch also serves to complete any of the other Tools functions.
The drawing tool is used to draw crude input contours for the au-
tomated segmentation, or to manually dene the myocardial
boundaries.
The user can draw, or redraw whichever contour is currently ac-
tive.
Contours can be drawn by clicking single points with the left
mouse button. These are automatically connected by straight line
segments. Curved-line contours are drawn by Click-and-drag
with the left mouse button.
The editing tool is used to nudge the currently active contour to
conform to the desired myocardial boundary. When selected, the
active contour color is lightened, and a circular cursor is dis-
played. Depressing the left mouse button and moving the cursor
near the active contour causes the contour to move away from the
cursor. Double clicking the left mouse button completes the edit-
ing action, causing the edited contour to replace the original con-
tour.
Select Image
Edit Contour
Crop Image
Draw Contour
Delete Contour
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deletes the active contour in the active image. If the deleted con-
tour had been previously saved, it can be recovered using Reload
Contours in the Update Display menu section. If the user deletes
contours, then saves contours without manually or automatically
replacing them, any previously saved contours are deleted from
the images.
Crops all of the images by a factor of two.
Cropping can be applied only once to the image dataset. If addi-
tional magnication is desired, the images should be magnied
with the Evaluate Magnify function (chapter E.1) prior to loading
them into ARGUS.
Cropping within ARGUS has no effect on the images stored in the
Numaris database.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1814 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Update Display Menu Section
Deletes the active contours from the set of images dened by the
Apply to: switches described below. The user is warned that con-
tours will be deleted by this action. This action has no effect on
contours currently saved on disk. Contours can be deleted from
the disk by rst deleting the working contours with this button,
then executing Save Contours.
Reloads previously stored contours for the set of images specied
by the Apply to: switches described below. This will replace any
contours which have not been saved since the previous load or re-
load. The user is warned that unsaved contours will be replaced.
Saves to disk any new contours, or any contours which have been
modied or created since the last save. This action applies only to
the set of images dened by the Apply to: switches described be-
low. The user is warned that previously saved contours will be re-
placed by this action.
Windowing of the work image is always active. The Window but-
ton serves to apply the window settings of the work image to the
set of images dened by the Apply to: switches described below.
Refreshes the screen display of images, contours, and sectors.
Apply to: Denes the set of images to be operated on by the switches: Re-
load Contours, Save Contours, Delete Contours, Window.
refer to the row and column of the currently
active image.
Delete Contours
Reload Contours
Save Contours
Window
Refresh
One Image
All Images
This Slice
This Phase
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Auto Segmentation Menu Section
This menu section is used to control the automated myocardial
boundary detection function. The term propagate refers to the use
of the myocardial boundaries fromone image as the inputs for the
boundary detection algorithm in the next image. Input contours
are used as the starting point for the automatic myocardial bound-
ary detection algorithm. If the selected propagation function will
overwrite any previously existing contours in the matrix, the user
is warned and given the option of keeping any existing contours
intact.
If input contours are present in the current active image, contours
are generated for that image. If no input contours exist for the ac-
tive image, the user is warned and no action is taken.
If at least one image has been contoured in the ED column, select-
ing this button will generate contours for all ED images. The user
will be prompted to either keep all existing ED contours, or to re-
contour all ED images. If there are no contours in any ED images,
the user is warned and no action is taken.
Selecting this button generates contours for the currently dened
ES phase. All ED images must have contours prior to using this
function as the ED contours. The input contours for each ES image
will be contracted versions of the ED contours for that row. The
ED contours may be created by hand drawing, by contouring each
ED image individually (using This Image), or by contouring one
ED image and using ED segmentation. If ES contours already ex-
ist in any row, the user is prompted to either keep these contours,
or re-contour all ES images.
Temporal propagation
ED segmentation
ES segmentation
Segment all images
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1816 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
If input contours are present for the active image, selecting this
button generates contours from left to right, working from the ac-
tive image to the end of the matrix row. Only images to the right of
the active image in the row containing the active image are con-
toured. If no input contours exist for the active image, the user is
warned and no action is taken. If the active image contains edited
contours, the user is prompted to either keep the edited contours,
or to re-contour the active image. If other contours already exist in
the rowto the right of the active image, the user is prompted to ei-
ther keep these contours, or re-contour all images. If the user
chooses to keep existing contours, these are used as input con-
tours to adjacent images.
Selecting this button generates contours across multiple rows
from left to right. At a minimum, all of the ED images must have
contours prior to using this function. Existing ED contours are not
affected by this function. ED contours may be created by hand
drawing, by contouring each ED image individually (using This
Image), or by contouring one ED image and using Spatial Propa-
gation. If other contours already exist in columns other than ED,
the user is prompted to either keep these contours, or re-contour
all images. If the user chooses to keep existing contours, these are
also used as input contours to adjacent images. For example, the
user may elect to rst segment all ED and all ES images and care-
fully edit these contours. ED and ES are the phases used to com-
pute most of the cardiac function and thickening parameters and
require careful attention. Once ED and ES segmentation is com-
plete, the user may elect to segment all of the images to generate
volume and volume rate of change curves. By keeping all of the
existing contours, the hand corrections of any ED and ES images
will be retained, and the cardiac function parameters based on
these phases will remain the same.
The program will contour either the Left Ventricle (LV) inner and
outer walls, or the Right Ventricle (RV) inner wall. These buttons
determine which ventricle is to be contoured. If LV inner and
outer wall input contours are provided by the user, both walls are
segmented. If only LV inner wall inputs are provided, only the in-
ner wall is segmented. Mass and thickness can not be computed if
only the inner wall is segmented.
LV
RV
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The program will generate contours for either bright blood or
dark blood images. This refers to the signal of the blood relative to
the myocardium. Most MR CINE techniques generate bright
blood images. However, dark blood spin echo, TurboFLASH, and
Turbo spin echo techniques are also commonly used for cardiac
imaging and may be segmented and analyzed. This button is used
to tell the automatic segmentation algorithm which type of im-
ages have been loaded.
After a Pause in the automatic segmentation, this button will
cause the segmentation process to continue. Segmentation will al-
ways proceed from the image it was working on when paused.
Image contours can be manually adjusted during the pause, and
these adjustments will remain intact after continuing.
Pauses the automatic myocardial boundary detection process.
This allows the user to make manual corrections to the bound-
aries, then to proceed again (Continue) with automatic segmenta-
tion.
Stops the automatic myocardial boundary detection process. All
contours which have been generated to that point are kept.
Bright Blood
Dark Blood
Continue
Pause
Stop
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1818 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Frame Identication Menu Section
This section of the Cardiac Segmentation Menu allows the user to
dene the temporal and spatial layout of the cardiac cine series in
the ARGUS image matrix. The numbers under Time (ED, ES,
ED2) refer to position along the rows of the image matrix, 0 being
the column furthest to the left. ED cannot be changed by the user;
it is xed as the leftmost column. The numbers under Space
(Base, Mid, Apex) refer to position along the columns of the im-
age matrix, 0 being the top. Ablank in any of the space parameters
indicates the parameter has not been dened by the user and will
not be used by the segmentation algorithm.
Time The Time parameters are used by the myocardial boundary detec-
tion algorithm to dene its search space. The myocardial bound-
aries are assumed to shrink from ED to ES, and expand from ES to
ED2. Prior to segmentation and volume computation, it is as-
sumed that ED is the rst time position, ES is equal to 40 % of the
number of images across a matrix row, and ED2 is the last time po-
sition.
The time parameters are also used in the computation of cardiac
function parameters such as End Diastolic Volume, Ejection Frac-
tion, and others which depend on the volume at specic time
points within the cardiac cycle. After computing volumes, the
user will be asked if ES should be dened as the minimumvolume
time frame, and ED2 as the maximum volume time frame which
follows ES.
Space The Space parameters are (optionally) used by the myocardial
boundary detection algorithmto dene its search space. The myo-
cardial boundaries are assumed to shrink from mid to apex. This
information is not used by the segmentation algorithm if the pa-
rameters are left blank.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Data Analysis Menu Section
This section of the Menu is used to initiate data analysis after the
myocardial boundaries have been identied.
Calls up the Cardiac Function Menu. This is the platformused to
compute and display cardiac function and mass parameters.
Calls up the Sectoring Menu. This is the platform used to com-
pute and display myocardial thickening parameters.
Series Management Menu Section
This menu section is common to all of the ARGUS work platforms.
It controls some high level operations of ARGUS.
Converts the ARGUS platform into an icon. ARGUS remains ac-
tive when closed, allowing the user to perform other Numaris op-
erations while ARGUS is processing images in the background.
Returns to the database browser.
Deletes all of the images in the currently active slice position from
the image matrix. This operation has no effect on the Numaris da-
tabase. The user is warned that the images will be removed from
the image matrix.
Exits ARGUS.
Function
Thickening
Close
The ARGUS icon:
New Series
Del Slice
Exit
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1820 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Cardiac Function Output Platform
LV Function
This platform serves as the LV Cardiac Function results table. The
user is required to provide the patients RR interval to compute
cardiac output. Height and weight are input to estimate the Body
Surface Area which is used to normalize the results. While most
function parameters can be computed based on ED and ES con-
tours alone, a volume curve must be computed to generate the ll-
ing and ejection rate parameters. All cardiac phases must be con-
toured to generate a volume curve.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The report form is automatically lled in with all parameters
which do not depend on RR and BSA. The compute button is
needed only if specic images are removed from the function
computation with the Del Image button (see below). Use of the
Del Image button clears the report form. Compute must be se-
lected to then recompute the parameters.
This function generates a time-volume curve if all cardiac phases
have been contoured. If a cubic spline curve t is applied to the
curve (see below), a volume rate of change curve is also plotted.
Filling and ejection rates are computed based on this curve.
Curve Fit Type: The user has three options: Raw Data, Default Cubic Spline, and
Manual Cubic Spline. Manual Cubic Spline allows the user to se-
lect a tting parameter. This parameter refers to the overall resid-
ual of the t in ml. The default is Cubic Spline with a 1 ml residual.
Increasing this parameter smooths the curve.
Chooses left ventricle function report form.
Chooses right ventricle function report form.
Generates a Numaris image from the function parameter table
and saves this new image to the patient database.
Permits the user to exclude specic images from the computation
of output parameters. The currently active image is deleted. The
contours are not displayed on images which have been deleted
from the volume computation. The images are labeled D:LV,
D:RV, or D:LVRV if LV, RV, or LV&RV contours are deleted from
computation respectively.
Pops back up to the Cardiac Segmentation Menu.
Compute
LV Curve
LV
RV
Save Results
Del Image
Menu Up
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1822 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
RV Function
This platform serves as the RV Cardiac Function results table. The
functionality is identical to the LV function platform, with the ex-
ception of myocardial mass parameters. RV mass cannot be com-
puted because only the RV inner wall can be contoured. Inner and
outer wall contours are required to estimate myocardial mass.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Sectoring Menu
This menu is displayed by clicking on the Thickening button in
the Data Analysis section of the Cardiac Segmentation menu.
Two sections of this menu differ from the Cardiac Segmentation
menu; Sector Denition and Conrm Sectoring. The function-
ality of all other menu sections is identical to that described above
in the subsections of the Cardiac Segmentation menu.
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1824 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Sector Denition
This section of the Sectoring Menu is used to dene the radial sec-
tors which are to be used for wall thickness analysis.
# of Sectors: Denes the number of radial sectors to divide the myocardium.
The valid range is from 4 to 40.
ED & ES / All Phases Determines whether sectors are dened just for EDand ES phases,
or for all time frames.
Single Slice / All Slices Determines whether sectors are dened for the active slice only, or
for all slices.
Applies a smoothing algorithmto the endocardial boundary to re-
move the papillary muscles. Papillary muscles should not be in-
cluded in a thickening evaluation.
Displays the sectors in the image matrix and work image as de-
ned by the buttons above.
A single sector is displayed in the work image. This is the refer-
ence sector which is positioned by the user to line up with an an-
atomical landmark, typically the anterior attachment of the RV
wall to the septum.
Propagate Reference Redenes the reference sector for all images in the currently active
column or rowto match the reference sector in the currently active
image.
Smooth Contours
Initialize Sectors
Edit Reference Sector
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Conrm Sectoring Menu Section
Conrms the denition of sectors specied in the Sector Deni-
tion menu described above. Sectors must be conrmed to enable
the Compute Results button.
Brings up a Bulls-eye plot of Thickening (the difference in thick-
ness between the ED phase and the current phase), and a Table of
thickening parameters corresponding to the currently active im-
age. This button is inactive until sectors are conrmed.
Conrm Sectoring
Compute Results
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1826 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Thickening Table of Results
The Table of Thickening Results is displayed in the lower right
screen quadrant.
The table of thickening results will list each of the three computed
thickening parameters for the currently active slice level. Up to
forty radial sectors can be dened and listed in the table.
Sector 0 in the table always corresponds to the sector immediately
to the right of the reference line which is positioned by the user.
The remaining sectors are numbered in a clockwise fashion
around the heart.
Thickening parameters are always computed for the active slice
position between the phase dened as ED, and the currently ac-
tive phase at the time of computation. If sectors have been dened
for all phases, changing the selection of active phase in the matrix
automatically updates both the table and the bulls-eye plot to re-
ect the thickening between ED and the current phase.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
If sectors have been dened for all slices, changing the selection of
active slice in the matrix causes the bulls-eye plot and table to be
automatically updated. The table can also be updated to list data
for different slice levels by clicking on a different slice level in the
bulls-eye plot.
This button closes the bulls-eye plot and table and takes the user
back to the sectoring menu.
This button is used to save the currently displayed table of thick-
ening data to the store device as a Numaris image le. The bulls-
eye plot is not saved with this button. A separate button is pro-
vided on the bulls-eye plot itself (page E.1829).
Menu Up
Save Results
Rev. 07
Argus
E.1828 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Bulls-eye Output Platform
The tabular thickening results show all three parameters for a sin-
gle slice position. The bulls-eye plot displays a single thickening
parameter for all slice levels simultaneously. The thickening pa-
rameter of interest is mapped to the gray-level of each sector. Slice
levels are displayed as concentric rings. The gray-scale is dened
to span all of the values of the displayed parameter linearly from
black (minimum) to white (maximum).
The parameter to be displayed can be chosen using the three mu-
tually exclusive switches at the bottom of the bulls-eye plot.
Thickening and %thickening parameters are always computed
between the phase dened as ED, and the currently active phase
at the time of computation. Changing the selection of active phase
in the matrix causes the bulls-eye plot and table to be automati-
cally updated.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The reference line is labeled in the Bulls-eye plot and will always
appear as a vertical line at the top of the plot, regardless of its ori-
entation in the images. Radial sectors are numbered consecutively
clockwise from the reference line. Sector lines and labels can op-
tionally be removed from the display by clicking off the Separat-
ing lines checkbox.
Clicking the left mouse button on any sector in the bulls-eye plot
will automatically update the thickening table to show results for
the selected slice level.
This button is used to save the current bulls-eye plot to the store
device as a Numaris image le.
Please note: A limited number of contours can be saved on the
hard disk. Save the contours for either the myocardial wall thick-
ness or for the volume measurement.
Save Plot
Rev. 07
Argus
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
F File
File
F2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of le functions
The le functions allow you to manage all les created during
measurements or subsequent evaluations.
In addition, the File menu provides functions for support for spe-
cial storage media.
File functions in background
With respect to le functions which can run in background (ar-
chive, copy, delete), function buttons and/or messages can appear
in the message eld of the control area.
Examples:
Provides more detailed information regarding the messages
displayed.
Interrupts le functions which run in background.
File
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Archive. . .
Copy . . .
Mark . . .
Delete. . .
Message eld
Details
Pause
NUMARIS REFERENCE F3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
File operations
Archive
Archiving les ................................................................................... F.1
Copy
Copying les...................................................................................... F.2
Mark
Marking image les for further processing .................................. F.3
Delete
Deleting les...................................................................................... F.4
Rev. 07
File
F4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Files and storage media
Files A le contains all data compiled for a patient, a series, or an im-
age.
Storage media Storage media are devices to which les can be stored and read
from. Each medium has its own special features.
STORE : The hard disk is known as STORE. All les generated by
the system are initially stored to the hard disk. Because of its lim-
ited capacity, data which is not currently required should be ar-
chived and then deleted from the hard disk.
Removable storage media In contrast to STORE, the data carriers listed below can be re-
moved. These storage media are used for le transfers and ar-
chiving.
OD: Data may only be written to the optical disk; that is, les
written to the optical disk cannot be deleted.
MOD: Data can be written and rewritten to the magneto-optical
disk.
Networks Networks enable computers to communicate with one another
and transfer les.
SIENET is a network used for transferring medical image and pa-
tient data.
For DICOM refer to the next page for a detailed description.
Notice
Use the File Copy function chapter F.2,
to send images to another system, or
to receive images sent from another system.
T I P
For transfer problems withthe
net, go to System Run and
select the DisplayNetlog
program (page K.210).
NUMARIS REFERENCE F5
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
DICOM
DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine) is a
standard for the electronic transfer of data from medical images.
This standard allows you to transfer digital medical images and
their associated information independent of the devices or manu-
facturer used. Additionally, DICOM provides an interface to sys-
tems in the hospital that are based on different standards (e.g.
chapter A.6, Patient Worklist).
Other DICOM functionalities described in this handbook are:
O DICOM inputs for patient registration (page A.36)
O Presetting DICOM-compatible cameras (page G.27),
O Providing/terminating access privileges to the patient list of your
MR system (page K.221),
O Setting the type of DICOM link (page K.221).
Please note: Raw data (e.g. from spectroscopy) cannot be trans-
ferred via DICOM. In this case, please use SIENET, a MOD or one of
the export functions of spectroscopy.
T I P
Siemens DICOMConformance
Statement:
http://www.siemens.de/med/
e/dicom
Rev. 07
File
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
NUMARIS REFERENCE F.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
F.1
Archiving les
Files on the hard disk STORE are transferred to the selected ar-
chiving medium using the File Archive function.
The following types of les may be archived:
O all les for one or more patient(s),
O complete series or
O individual images or groups of images.
Multiple-choice is possible.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Archive. . .
Copy . . .
Mark . . .
Delete. . .
Rev. 07
File Archive
F.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting archive parameters
The Archive window contains the data of the image in the active
segment as the default. If the active segment is empty, the input
elds are empty.
Terminates the Archive function.
Ends the Archive function. The settings selected are retained.
Keyboard functions
Esc key If you press the Esc key on the keyboard, the patient name and im-
age number of the active image will be taken over into the func-
tion window.
Tab key If you press the tab key, you will select all patients of the corre-
sponding patient list. An asterisk * will appear next to the Pa-
tient input eld.
The function windowmust be active. If it is not, click the header of
the window.
Cancel
Exit
Archiving les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the type of data
Archive: Indicate the les you want to archive.
Archives image les.
Archives raw data (for service purposes only).
Archives images marked via File Mark
(chapter F.3).
The switches Images and RawDatacan be used together, but Marked
can only be selected individually.
Selecting the archiving medium
Click on the triangle with the MENU mouse button.
To: Indicate the archiving medium to which the les will be
transferred in the window menu.
You can archive to an optical disk or magneto-
optical disk.
The menu contains only archiving media which are actually avail-
able on the system.
In general : A storage medium may be connected but may not be
operational, because no disk has been inserted (chapter K.6). In
this case, the corresponding displays are dimmed and cannot be
selected. In addition, the name of the storage mediumis displayed
in a double set of brackets, e. g., <<OD1_1>>.
If the function cannot be executed for a storage medium con-
nected via SIENET, the name of the storage medium is dimmed,
however, it does not appear in brackets.
Images
Raw Data
Marked
MENU button
OD
Rev. 07
File Archive
F.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Actual archiving
Archiving patients
Patient : Enter the patient name or patient number.
You can also leave out letters and use asterisks * as wildcard
characters.
Start the archiving procedure.
You can follow the procedure in the control area.
If the patient identication number is not unique, a list of patients
will be displayed. The list contains all patients whose numbers
fulll the search criteria (Working with Numaris page B.34). Select
the patient desired from the list.
As an alternative
Select one or more patients from the list.
(Abbreviated procedure for a single patient : double-click)
Archiving series
Select a patient by clicking once.
Select one or more series.
(Abbreviated procedure for a single series : double-click)
All series selected and their images are archived.
Go
Query
Go
Query
Query
Go
Archiving les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Archiving images
After entering the patient identication:
Image: Enter an image number or a range of numbers.
Example: 62
5772
86,97
You may also combine any of the above : e. g., 11,12,1572.
The images selected are copied to the pre-set archiving medium.
As an alternative
Select the series by clicking once.
Select one or more images.
(Abbreviated procedure for a single image : double-click)
Storage medium is full
Open the Archive: Detail Message window.
For more information on the contents of the window, page F.26.
Go
Query
Query
Query
Go
Details
Rev. 07
File Archive
F.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Interrupting the archiving process
The current archiving procedure can be interrupted with the
Pause button in the message eld of the control area.
Interrupt the archiving process.
The Pause window appears. It contains various information re-
garding the current archiving process.
Continuing the archiving process
Continues the archiving process. The Pause window closes.
Terminating the archiving process
Terminates the archiving procedure.
You cannot continue the archiving process after using this func-
tion. Only the data archived up to the pause have been saved on
the archiving medium.
Pause
Continue
Abort
Archiving les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Image number already present
If you would like to archive the images or series of a patient which
are already present on the archive medium, the Details button ap-
pears in the control area of the message eld.
Open the notice window.
Checks images for DICOM consistency prior to archiving.
Example: Images will be archived to the same series only if the
series ID matches.
Example: The image will not be stored if the archive already
contains an image with the same ID. The message
exists appears in the control area.
Archives only non-affected images. Affected images are ignored.
Details
Detail Check
No Copy
Rev. 07
File Archive
F.18 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Archiving to magneto-optical disk
(MOD)
Initialize Numaris initializes a new MOD; that is, it writes the name of
the hospital, the date, etc., to the disk.
Load Each optical disk must be ready for use (load). An MODwritten
on your system is loaded automatically.
MOD with images from Numaris 3, version B31C/D
To initialize older MOD's:
Clear both sides of the MOD with File Delete (chapter F.4).
Archiving les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
New MOD or from a different system
(not in Numaris 3 format)
The message MOD new or disk type unknown appears in the
message eld of the control area.
In this case, click the Details button in the message eld.
Initializes the new MOD.
Interrupts the process.
Details
Yes
Caution:
One entire side of an MOD not in Numaris 3 format
will be deleted.
No
Rev. 07
File Archive
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
F.2
Copying les
Use the File Copy function to copy les fromone storage medium
to another, or, in the case of a network, from one system to another.
You can also copy the contents of the active segment to a le.
The following may be copied:
O all les of one or more patient(s),
O complete series or
O individual images and groups of images.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Archive. . .
Copy . . .
Mark . . .
Delete. . .
Rev. 07
File Copy
F.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Copy window contains the data from the image in the active
elds are empty.
Terminates the Copy function.
Ends the Copy function. The settings selected are retained.
Keyboard functions
tion window.
tient input eld.
the window.
Cancel
Exit
Copying les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Copy: Select the type of data.
Copies images.
Copies raw data (for service purposes only).
Copies images selected by using the function
File Mark. When copying via a network: All
images are copied (system does not differentiate
between marked and unmarked images).
The Images and RawDataswitches can be used together, but Marked
Selecting the copy source
From: Indicate the source device in the window menu.
Hard disk.
Optical disk or magneto-optical disk.
Stores the active segment (page F.25).
Selecting the destination
To: Select the destination device of the copy procedure in the
window menu
Hard disk.
Optical disk or magneto-optical disk.
Please note: The copy source and destination must be different de-
vices. Not all combinations are possible. Those that are not avail-
able will be dimmed. You can only copy data to the network from
STORE, not from the OD.
When a system is connected to the network, the name of the sys-
tem appears under To in the menu and can be selected.
Images
Raw Data
Marked
MENU button
STORE
OD
Segment
STORE
OD
Rev. 07
File Copy
F.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Actual copying procedure
Copying patients
Patient : Enter the patient name or patient identication number.
Example: Demo
18347180
You can leave out letters and use asterisks * as wildcard charac-
ters.
Start the copying procedure.
All images for the patient (if set as type of data) are copied to the
storage medium selected.
If the patient identication number is not unique, a list of patients
will be displayed whose numbers fulll the search criteria (Work-
ing with Numaris page B.34). Select the patient desired from the
list.
As an alternative
Select one or more patients.
Copying series
The series selected will be copied to the storage mediumspecied.
Go
Query
Go
Query
Query
Go
Copying les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Copying images
After you have entered the patient identication number :
Image: Enter the image number or a range of numbers.
You may also combine different forms of entries : e. g., 11,12,1572.
The selected images are copied to the storage medium specied.
As an alternative
Select a series by clicking once.
If you would like to copy the images or series of a patient which are
already present on the storage medium, the Detail Check button
appears in the control area of the message eld.
For details refer to page F.17.
Copying the active segment
Set the source switch to Segment.
Verify that the active segment contains the desired image.
The contents of the active segment are copied to the hard disk. A
new image le is created and appended at the end of the current
series.
You can also perform this function via the function button in the
control area.
Go
Query
Query
Go
Image number
already present
?
Segment
Go
CopSeg
Rev. 07
File Copy
F.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Storage medium full
Please note: You can use the function System Info to see how
many images of a particular size can still be copied to the storage
medium in question (chapter K.6).
If there is insufcient space on the destination copy medium, the
copy procedure will not be executed. The function button Details
will appear in the message eld of the control area.
Open the Copy: Detail Message window.
Closes the Copy window.
Change the storage medium and repeat the copy procedure.
Details
Cancel
Copying les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Interrupting the copy procedure
The copy procedure can be interrupted with the Pause button in
the message eld of the control area.
Interrupt the copying procedure.
The Pause window appears. It contains various information re-
garding the copy procedure.
Continuing the copy procedure
Continues the copy procedure. The window is closed.
Terminating the copy procedure
Terminates the copy procedure.
The procedure cannot be resumed at this point. Only the data cop-
ied up to the pause have been stored to the archiving device.
Pause
Continue
Abort
Rev. 07
File Copy
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
F.3
Markingimageles for further
processing
Use the File Mark function to mark the active image for subse-
quent processing. The function simplies archiving, copying or
deleting image les on the hard disk STORE.
The les remain marked until the marking is explicitly removed.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Archive. . .
Copy . . .
Mark . . .
Delete. . .
Rev. 07
File Mark
F.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Marking images
Display the image to be marked in the active segment.
Set the marking.
Marking is indicated by an m in the image text eld and the im-
age list.
Removing the marking
If an image is marked, the Reset function button is displayed in-
stead of the Set button.
Display the marked image in the active segment.
Remove the image marking.
The m in the image text eld and image list disappears.
You can also simultaneously remove the markings in all images of
the active view patient.
Removes the marking of all images.
Ends the Mark function.
Set
Reset
Reset All
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
F.4
Deleting les
Use the File Delete function to delete stored les.
Prior to the delete procedure, the program checks whether the
les are being processed by other functions. If yes, the les cannot
be deleted. As for instance jobs which are still contained in a job
list (exposure or print jobs).
Hard disk The following types of data may be deleted from STORE :
O all les of one or more patients,
O complete series,
O individual images or groups of images.
Magneto-optical disk One entire side of the magneto-optical disk is deleted during each
delete procedure.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Archive. . .
Copy . . .
Mark . . .
Delete. . .
Rev. 07
File Delete
F.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Delete window contains the data of the image in the active
elds are empty.
Terminates the Delete function.
Ends the Delete function. The settings selected are retained.
Keyboard functions
tion window.
tient input eld.
the window.
Cancel
Exit
Deleting les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Delete: Select the type of data.
To delete images.
To delete raw data.
To delete marked les (chapter F.3).
The Images and RawDataswitches can be used together, but Marked
Selecting the storage medium
From: In the window menu, select the storage medium from which
les should be deleted.
Hard disk.
Magneto-optical disk; the only option is to delete
all les, therefore, there is no list from which to
select.
Please note: Generally speaking, an OD cannot be deleted.
Images
Raw Data
Marked
MENU button
STORE
OD
T I P
To delete a registered patient
with no images : Select both
Images and Raw Data when
selecting the type of data.
Rev. 07
File Delete
F.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Performing the delete procedure
Deleting patients
Patient : Enter the patient name or patient identication number.
You can also leave out letters and use asterisks * as wildcard
characters.
Start the delete procedure.
Anotice box is displayed. You must conrmthe deletion of the pa-
tient selected.
Conrm deletion in the notice box.
Otherwise, terminate the delete procedure in the notice box.
If the patient identication is not unique, a patient list will be dis-
played. The list contains all patients whose identication informa-
tion fulll the search criteria (Working with Numaris page B.34).
Select the patient desired from the list.
As an alternative
Select one or more patients
All images of the selected patient are deleted.
Go
Query
Go
Notice
The entire contents of the storage medium will be deleted
if you select all patients.
Deleting les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting series
(Abbreviated procedure for a single series : double-click)
All selected series and their corresponding images are deleted.
Deleting individual images
After you have entered the patient identication:
Image: Enter the image number or range of numbers.
You may also combine different forms of entries : e. g., 11,12,1572.
The selected images are deleted.
If the images have not been completely archived, a notice box will
appear. Make sure that you really want to delete the selected im-
ages.
Query
Go
If you do not enter specic image numbers,
all images for the patient will be considered selected and
deleted when Go is clicked.
Go
Rev. 07
File Delete
F.46 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
As an alternative
Select a series from the series list by clicking the mouse
once; do not click Go!
Query
Clicking Go will delete the entire series.
Query
Go
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
G Exposure
Exposure
G2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of exposure functions
You can use the Exposure functions to expose images together
with texts and graphics on lm.
Interactive
Selecting images and lming ......................................................... G.1
Setting
Presetting exposure parameters .................................................... G.2
J obctr
Processing exposure jobs ................................................................ G.3
You set the parameters for the camera with the System Camera
function (chapter K.8).
Exposure
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
NUMARIS REFERENCE G3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Denitions
Film sheet When images are lmed, they are transferred to lm sheets. The
camera head used determines the size of the lm sheet (chapter
G.2).
Film segment Each sheet of lm is sub-divided into segments, similar to the di-
vision of the monitor. Individual images can be allocated to the
lm segments.
Job list You document images by starting exposure jobs. All jobs are ar-
ranged in a job list and are subsequently processed in sequence.
Please note: The camera congured with the system determines
the command options available within the Exposure functions.
Rev. 07
Exposure
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
NUMARIS REFERENCE G.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
G.1
Selecting images and lming
With Exposure Interactive, you can select images fromthe screen
or the image list and lm them. You can correct the selection and
arrangement of the images on the lmsheets. Then start the expo-
sure job.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
ExpInt
Rev. 07
Exposure Interactive
G.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The window Exposure Interactive contains one or two simu-
lated lm sheets divided into lm segments. The active lm seg-
ment has a white edge; you can add a new image to this segment.
Select from the Series List
(page G.110).
Sets the exposure parameters
(chapter G.2).
Processes the exposure jobs
(chapter G.3).
Please note: You can open all the lming function windows next to
each other and store them as icons.
Example:
Icondisplayof lmsegments
(pageG.16)
ShowList
Settings
J ob Contr
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview:
Filming the screen
Checking the settings
Copies: Enter the number of copies or click the arrows.
The maximum number depends on your systems conguration.
The number of copies affects all newexposure jobs generated with
Exposure Interactive.
To set the default number of copies for all exposure jobs, use the
Exposure Setting function (chapter G.2).
Film size: Displays the lm size (in our example 14 17). You can dene
the lm size and format using Exposure Setting (chapter G.2).
Settings Transfer images Correct lm sheet Release
exposure
Rev. 07
G.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Transferring images
Transferring an individual image segment
Click a lm segment in the function window.
The lm segment becomes the active lm segment.
Transfer the active image segment to the active lmsegment.
The image you selected is displayed on the lm sheet. Any previ-
ously existing images are overwritten. The next segment now be-
comes the active lm segment.
Transferring all image segments
Transfer all images from the screen to the active lm
segment.
The function is either ended, without performing the exposure job.
Or the lm segments are allocated via ExpSeg or ExpScr in the func-
tion eld of the control area.
Using the function buttons of the control area
Instead of using Segment and Screen, you can also use the func-
tion buttons ExpSeg and ExpScr which are located in the control
area.
Transfer the active image segment to the next available lm seg-
ment.
Transfer all images from the screen to the next available segment.
These functions are processed in the background. No messages are
displayed in the control area. When the lm sheet is full, the next
lm sheet will be lled, starting with the rst segment.
Segment
Screen
Film segments
already allocated?
ExpSeg
ExpScr
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Transferring all images of a series
Click a lm segment in the function window.
Transfer all images of the current series, one after the other,
to the lm sheet(s).
Each image is allocated to a lm segment. You can select the order
for transferring the images. You can switch the function of the but-
ton to one of the following:
Transfer with ascending image number.
Transfer with descending image number.
Series All
Ascending
Descending
Rev. 07
G.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying lm sheets
You can ll multiple lm sheets with images; use Prev Sheet and
Next Sheet to display them. The number of lm sheets used, and
the number of the current lm sheet are displayed below the lm
sheet on the screen.
Display the previous lm sheet.
Display the next lm sheet.
These buttons are disabled if the rst or last lmsheet has already
been displayed.
Display two lm sheets at the same time.
The lm sheet with the active segment and the following lm
sheet are displayed. The function button is now1 Sheet.
Changing the display of the lm segments
You change the display of the lm segments in the Exposure In-
teractive window. Depending on the display selected, the label
on the function key changes accordingly.
You can select the following:
Icon display
Icon and image number display
Image number display
Prev Sheet
Next Sheet
2 Sheet
Icons
Icons, No
Number
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Including the localizer and slice
positions on the lm segment
For easy reference, you can lm a localizer image that shows the
slice positions associated with the other images on the lm.
Display the image you would like to use as the localizer in the
active segment.
Superimpose the slice positions using the Series Display
function (chapter C.6).
Transfer the active image segment to the active lmsegment. Segment
Rev. 07
G.18 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Correcting the lm sheet
Deleting lm segments
Click the lm segment to be deleted.
Delete the contents of the active lm segment.
Deleting lm sheets
Delete the contents of the current lm sheet.
Moving images onto the lm sheet
Select the images you would like to move.
Drag and Drop Keep the left mouse button pressed down, and drag the
mouse until the pointer is located in the lm segment you
want to move. Release the mouse button.
Any previously existing images are overwritten. The original lm
segment is now empty.
Closing gaps
Arrange the images on the lm sheets.
If there are any empty lmsegments between occupied segments,
they will be lled in. The images move closer together.
Cancel last action.
ClearSeg
ClearSheet
Repack
Undo
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Releasing exposures
Once you have lled the lm sheets:
Send the lm sheets to the camera.
The job is either sent to the job list or started immediately (chapter
G.3). The exposure display on the monitor is cleared.
Film segments which were not allocated will be black on the re-
sulting hardcopy.
Please note: When a exposure job is being processed, you cannot
display images via a video recorder at the same time (page D.23).
End Exposure Interactive.
If you did not use Go to send the prepared lm sheets to the cam-
era, the layout and contents will be saved until until the next ses-
sion (page G.14 Film segments already allocated?).
Go
Exit
Rev. 07
G.110 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview:
Filming from the series list
Opening series list alternative1
Open the Exposure Series List.
The Exposure Series List window will contain the active pa-
tients. The images in a series are in a row. For double and multiple
echoes, one row per echo will be displayed. Combined series (Se-
ries Arrange, chapter C.3) are displayed according to the sorting
criteria. You can page horizontally and vertically.
Data that cannot be displayed in the series list (e.g. spectroscopy
raw data), are shown as black images identied by the symbol for
lightning.
Please note: If no patient is active, the patient list will be opened
instead of the Series List.
Settings Select images Correct lm sheet Release
exposure Manipulate images
Transfer images
ShowList
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Please note: The Exposure Series List window for analog cam-
eras looks slightly different.
The following control elements are not available:
and
Selecting patients alternative2
In the windowExposure Interactive:
Select a patient (single or double click).
The windowExposure Series List containing the list of new pa-
tients is opened. The patient list is closed.
Accept Changes
Patient
Rev. 07
G.112 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting images from the series list
Mark the images that you want to lm:
Left mouse button: lm images without manipulation
images have a black frame
right mouse button: manipulate images rst, then lm
images have a white frame
Marking images
Use the left or right mouse button to select the desired
images.
If you want to lm images in a series that are adjacent to each
other:
Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the pointer over
the desired area.
Marking all images in a series
Use the left or right mouse button to click on the eld that has
the desired series name.
Undo selection
Click again on the marked images or the eld labeled with the
series name.
The black and white frames disappear.
Undo all markings. Deselect All
T I P
WiththeShowList buttonin
theExposure Interactive
window, you can update the
Series List. This is useful if a
measurement is running in
background.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Manipulatingimages intheseries list
You can use the following functions to manipulate all images in
one series which you have marked with the right mouse button
(white).
O Windowing (Working with Numaris chapter A.2)
O Magnify (chapter E.1),
O Distance (chapter E.3),
O Scroll (chapter E.8),
O Inverting (page E.910),
O Label (chapter E.10).
Please note: These manipulations are not possible with an analog
camera.
Double click (left mouse button) on one of the marked images
(white) to display it on the screen.
Performthe manipulation in the active segment of the screen.
These manipulations affect all images in the series that are marked
with white. Changes are visible on-screen only.
Conrming manipulations
Conrm the manipulations for the white marked images of
the series list.
In the series list, manipulated images are marked with an excla-
mation point.
These changes apply only to lm.
Please note: If you have manipulated images without rst calling
them up from the Exposure Series List, the message changes
not accepted appears in the footer.
The manipulated images can be saved with CopSeg.
Accept Changes
!
Rev. 07
G.114 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Checking and undoing manipulations
Checking With the middle mouse button, click on of the images in the
series list that is marked with an exclamation point.
The selected and manipulated image is displayed in the active
segment of the screen.
Undoing With the left mouse button, click on this image in the series
list.
The image now appears in its original condition (before manipu-
lation) in the active segment of the screen.
Undo the manipulations in the entire series.
Performing several manipulations
You can perform several manipulations in consecutive order (e.g.
magnifying images and subsequently annotating them).
After you completed the rst manipulation and conrmed it with
Accept Changes:
For additional manipulations, either select new image or the
previous images used.
With the middle mouse button, click on of the images in the
series list that is marked with an exclamation point.
The selected and manipulated image is displayed in the active
segment of the screen.
Perform the next manipulation in the active segment of the
screen.
Conrm the manipulations for the white marked images of
the series list.
ShowList
Accept Changes
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Windowing in the series list
In the series list, you can windowmultiple images of a series at the
same time. The type of marking determines which images will be
windowed.
Images that are not marked, or are marked with black:
The windowing is performed on one image, and is applied to all
following images in the series.
Images marked with white:
The windowing is performed on one image, and is applied to all
images in the series that are marked with white.
Please note: The screen displays the image that you selected (mid-
dle mouse button) for windowing.
Windowing on the screen
Window an image in the active segment of the screen
Conrm the windowing for all marked images in a series.
You can also see the results in the small images of the series list.
Accept Changes
Rev. 07
G.116 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Transferring images from the series
list to lm sheets
Select whether one or two images should be allocated to
each lm segment.
one image per lm segment
two images on top of each other per lm segment
two images next to each other per lm segment
Transfer the marked images to the lm sheets.
In the windowExposure Interactive:
The rst image is transferred to the active lmsegment. Any exist-
ing images will be overwritten.
If you have transferred an uneven number of images in 2-on-1 mode, half
lm segments may be blank.
These gaps cannot be closed with Repack.
Correcting lm sheets (page G.18)
Release exposure (page G.19)
In the windowExposure Series List:
The windowExposure Series List is closed.
Exposure Series List and Exposure Interactive are closed.
Add to Film
Half lm segments
blank?
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
G.2
Presetting exposure
parameters
Use the Exposure Setting function to enter lm, and text param-
eters. The number of these parameters depends on the installed
camera.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
Rev. 07
Exposure Setting
G.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Exposure Settings window offers various parameters.
Terminates the Exposure Setting function.
Changes are not carried over.
Ends the Exposure Setting function. The settings selected are re-
tained.
Cancel
Exit
Presetting exposure parameters
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displayed Text : Select the information which should appear on the lmusing
the check boxes.
Installation O type of system
Patient Name O
Patient ID O patient number
Birth Date O
Image Number O image number and series number
Date O date of measurement
Time O time of measurement
Meas. Parameter O
Acquisition O acquisition time
Patient Pos. O patient position and view direction
Matrix, FOV, CE O matrix, area of reconstruction, center of
reconstruction (CT images)
Comment O space for two comment lines
Minimize Text O The rst image contains the complete
text, all subsequent images contain only
text which differs from that in the rst
image.
Display Text On/Off Display or hide text
The text information displayed in the Exposure Settings win-
dow depends on the conguration of your particular system.
Please note: If you have deselected text display in the image seg-
ment, the text information set will still be exposed with the seg-
ment.
To expose any available evaluation text on lm, superimpose the
text via the Display Text function (page J.24).
Rev. 07
Exposure Setting
G.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Copies: Enter the number of copies or click the arrows.
Film size / Division: Select the lm size and segmentation in the list.
For example, 14" 17" / 6 means a 14" 17" lm size and a 6 on 1
lm segmentation. Several cameras provide special lm segmenta-
tion, for example :
2+1/4 Two segments in the rst row, four segments next to one
segment in the second row.
2+8 Two segments in the rst row, eight segments in the
second row.
1+3 One segment in the rst row, three segments in the
second row.
Please note: If the selected format does not correspond to the lm
sheets of the camera, processing the job will stop during lming.
You can change the format and continue the job with Continue
(page G.34). An error message provided by the camera manufac-
turer may appear.
2+1/4 2+8 1+3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Segment lines: The appearance of the segment lines depends on the camera se-
lected.
Displays the segment lines.
The individual lm segments are more visible.
Does not display the segment lines.
With a DICOM camera, double lines may be displayed.
Displays simple segment lines.
Display double segment lines.
yes
no
yes
no
Rev. 07
Exposure Setting
G.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Parameters for the digital camera
There are additional, camera-specic switches for digital cameras.
Please note: All of the switches are listed below even though ac-
tual number of switches depends on the installation.
Graduation: Set the lm graduation.
Exposure with soft contrast.
Exposure with normal contrast.
Exposure with high contrast.
Borders: Set the lm border.
Exposure with black background.
Exposure with white background.
Polarity: Set the polarity.
Exposure with positive grey tones (as displayed on-
screen).
Exposure with negative grey tones (inverted).
Film annotation: Indicate whether additional text generated by the camera
should be exposed on the lm.
For example, the text may specify the date and time of the expo-
sure.
smt
med
sharp
black
clear
pos.
neg.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Presetting the DICOM camera
Selected Camera: Select one of the DICOM cameras.
Click with the MENU button on the function button marked with
a triangle.
Select the respective DICOM camera with the MENU button.
The camera is connected as soon as you selected it. The connection
remains until you:
O select a new camera,
O close the Exposure Settings window or
O the connection is interrupted.
Please note: When the connection is interrupted, you are not able
to receive messages from the camera in the message eld of the
control area.
MENU button
Rev. 07
Exposure Setting
G.28 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
To set the camera-specic parameters at newly installed DICOM
camera:
Under the function System Run (chapter K.2), start the
program DICOMBasicPrintConguration.
Select the desired camera.
Open the window Exposure: Conguration of DICOM Printer.
Terminates presetting.
Ends presetting. Selected values are retained.
Please note: The settings in the Exposure Settings window will
be overwritten.
Filmsize: Select the size of the lmsheet.
ORIENT: Select the print format.
appears as P in the list.
appears as L in the list.
Density: Set the density.
Open File
List of existing
conguration
Selected DICOM camera
Cancel
Exit
Portrait
Landscape
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the format
Format: Enter the desired format (max. 12 characters).
Allowed are:
numbers, spaces and a number of special characters (|, +, x).
However, you cannot mix formats, e.g. 2x3|1.
Selecting the Lookup table (LUT)
The LUT allows you to improve the image impression, that is, the
density level of the background and the contrast.
Lookup Table: Set the desired Lookup table.
Siemens has 10 predened tables:
O LUT 1: Standard MR LUT
O LUT 29: Derivatives of LUT 1
O LUT 10: linear LUT
In case you entered a table which is not available:
The program automatically selects LUT 10.
After you have completed all settings:
Adds the new conguration to the list.
The conguration is appended at the end of the list. If you return
to the Exposure settings window after completing the DICOM
settings, the sort will be according to the lm size.
2x3 1|3|2 2 +3 Examples
1 2
3 4
5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2
3 4 5
For additional examples refer to
pageG.24
The table selected is
not available
?
Add
Rev. 07
Exposure Setting
G.210 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting the conguration
Filmsize / Format Select the entry to be deleted from the list.
Delete the selected entry.
The entry will be deleted.
Delete
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
G.3
Processing exposure jobs
Use the Exposure Job Control function to open the exposure job
list. You can modify the order of the jobs as well as stop, reactivate,
or delete them.
The job list is continually updated.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
Rev. 07
Exposure Job Control
G.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
In the Exposure Job Control window, you can select the job to be
processed. Subsequently, it is highlighted in grey. You can scroll
the list, if necessary.
Ends the Exposure Job Control function. Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Patient Name The name of the patient.
Multiple is entered if images of more than one
patient are included in the job.
State Current status of the jobs :
Active: the job is currently being processed.
Inactive: the job is in the job list and is waiting
for processing.
Suspended: the job was being processed, but
was stopped due to an error or user intervention.
Done: the job is completed.
Station Camera which carries out the job.
Please note: After the system end, processing of the job list is
stopped. If you restart the system, the job list will automatically
continue processing.
Rev. 07
G.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing jobs
Please note: If you delete or stop an active job, processing of the job
list will stop.
Deleting a job
The job must be selected.
Delete the job from the list.
A notice box will be displayed requesting conrmation.
You can activate the next job in the list with Continue.
Suspending the job list
Stop the job list.
Please note: When you suspend the job list, the entire job list is
stopped. The active job is ended.
Resuming jobs
If the job list has been stopped (by deleting or stopping the active
job) :
Resume processing of the exposure job list.
The rst job in the job list is resumed and assigned Active status.
Delete
Stop
Continue
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Assigning a priority to a job
Stop the active job.
Click the job desired.
Assign rst priority to this job.
The selected job is appended on top of the list (right after the pro-
cessed jobs).
Resume processing of the job list.
Processing a job after the active job
If you do not want to interrupt the active job :
Click the job required.
The selected job is appended after the active job.
The job selected will be processed automatically after the active
job has been completed.
Reactivating a completed job
The job must be selected (status: done).
Activate the job.
The job is appended at the end of the list and will be processed
again.
Stop
Priority
Continue
Priority
Recover
Rev. 07
G.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Showing information
about the job
You can display information about a job selected in the list.
Open the Exposure job show window.
If the job is Inactive, Suspended, or Done the number of copies
can be changed.
Please note: The values set for Copies apply only to the exposure
job displayed.
All other parameters do not allow for user intervention.
Closes the window.
Show
Series number
Image number
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Paging through lm sheets
If the job contains multiple lm sheets:
Displays the next lm sheet.
Displays the previous lm sheet.
Viewing the image
You can select a lmsegment and viewthe image in the active seg-
ment on the monitor screen.
Select the lm segment desired in the Exposure job show
window.
Display the selected lm segment in the active segment
shown on the monitor screen.
If several images are allocated to the lm segment (e.g. with
Screen), it will contain a + sign. In this case, only the rst image
will be displayed.
Please note: The contents of a manipulated image can be dis-
played only if the image was stored prior to initiating an exposure
job. Otherwise, the exposed image will not match the displayed
image.
Windowing the image
Prior to lming, you can window the image in the active lm seg-
ment.
Conrm the new windowing values.
Windowing applies only to the lm job.
Sheet +
Sheet -
View
Accept Changes
Rev. 07
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H Printer
(not for single console systems MAGNETOM Open, Open viva and
Impact with host processor Sparc 2)
Printer
H2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of the print functions
You use the print functions to print screen segments, regions of in-
terest from the monitor, windows, or lists.
Printer type The printer must be an HPCL3 or PostScript printer.
Print segment You can divide a page into four print segments in order to print
screen segments.
Job list You print by starting print jobs. The jobs are arranged in a job list.
The jobs are processed according to their order in the list.
Printing lists
You can also print the patient, series, and image lists directly with-
out selecting Printer from the menu (chapter A.1).
* not for single console systems MAGNETOM Open, Open viva and
Impact with host processor Sparc 2
menu
Printer
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Snapshot . . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . . MAGNETOM Vision only
*
Notice
Do not use the print-outs for diagnostic purposes.
NUMARIS REFERENCE H3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Interactive
Printing images ................................................................................H.1
Snapshot
Creating snapshots ..........................................................................H.2
Setting
Presetting the print parameters .....................................................H.3
J obctr
Processing the list of print jobs......................................................H.4
Rev. 07
Printer
H4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Possible problems when printing
If there are still old jobs to be processed when a print function is
called, the following message will be displayed in the message
eld of the control area :
Old job control list found
In this case, you must start the job list (page H.44).
Please note: Prior to being executed, a print job is loaded into the
memory of the printer. At this point, it will be indicated as pro-
cessed in the job list , despite the fact that it may not have been
printed yet. This will occur when the printer is out of paper. If you
switch the printer off, its memory will be erased and this print job
is lost.
Image text The print-outs showless text than images displayed on the screen,
because the printed text is written in a larger font to provide for
better legibility.
If the printer cannot process the print job, a message will appear in
the message eld of the control area indicating that the time has
been exceeded. Check the following:
O Is there still paper in the printer magazine ?
O Is the printer switched on and on-line ?
O Is there a paper jam?
O Are the printer cables connected properly?
When the time has been exceeded, the job list is stopped. You will
have to re-start the list (page H.44).
Printer does not print
?
Notice
In case you are using a Sony printer,
do not switch off the printer while it is printing.
The entire processor may hang if you do.
NUMARIS REFERENCE H.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H.1
Printing images
Use the Printer Interactive function to print images directly from
the monitor. You can print single screen segments or the entire im-
age area on a single hardcopy.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Snapshot . . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
*
Rev. 07
Printer Interactive
H.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Printer Interactive windowcontains a simulated page which
can be divided into four print segments. The active print segment
(the segment to which a new screen segment will be allocated) is
shown in bold lines. A page which is not divided comprises only
one print segment.
Processes the list of print jobs
(chapter H.4).
Presets the parameter values
(chapter H.3).
Selects images from the series list
(page H.16).
All commands except for Clear can be reversed with Undo, even
Undo itself.
Ends the Printer Interactive function.
J ob contr
Settings
Show list
Undo
Exit
Printing images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Options available with the function
You may allocate any or all screen segments to the print segments
(page H.14). The selected images are assigned specic positions
on the page.
You can correct selections or allocations, or you can delete/over-
write segments allocated to the page. The print job is started only
when segment selection is complete and allocation is satisfactory
(page H.15).
The Printer Interactive function was ended without starting the print
job.
In this case, delete the entire content of the page.
Click the Clear button.
Print segments
which are already
allocated
?
Clear
Rev. 07
Printer Interactive
H.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Allocating screen segments
Copies: Enter the number of copies or click the arrow keys.
The number of copies affects all new print jobs generated with
Printer Interactive.
To set the default number of copies for all print jobs, use the
Printer Setting function (chapter H.3).
Paper size: Displays the paper size (the default is set with the Printer Setting
function chapter H.3).
Allocating an individual segment
Click the print segment in the function window.
The segment becomes the active print segment.
Allocate the active screen segment to the active print
segment.
The series and image numbers will be entered in the print seg-
ment. An existing print segment will be overwritten. If you have
divided the page into print segments, the next empty print seg-
ment becomes the active print segment.
Transferring the entire image area
The command is available only when the page contains not more
than one print segment.
Allocate all screen segments to the page.
Series and image numbers of images in the rst screen segment
are displayed on the page. The letter Gis superimposed, when the
segment does not contain an MR-image, but graphics only (e.g. ta-
bles). A+ sign indicates that the page contains multiple images.
Segment
Screen
Printing images
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Deleting the print segment
Click the print segment to be deleted in the function window.
Delete the content of the active print segments.
Deleting the page
Deletes the entire content of the page.
New segments can be allocated to the page.
Printing the page
After you have allocated images to the page :
Send the page as a print job.
The job is either sent to the job list or started immediately (chapter
H.4). The page display on the monitor is cleared.
If the job list is full, the job cannot be performed as indicated by a mes-
sage.
The contents of the page are retained, allowing you to resend it as soon
as it can be inserted in the job list (i.e., after an older job is processed).
Empty
Clear
Go
Job list is full
?
Rev. 07
Printer Interactive
H.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting images
Open the series list of the active view patient.
The print series list contains all series and images in a matrix.
W Images with stored windowing values
C Images created by being copied (page F.25).
You can scroll the list if necessary.
Click an image in the list.
The selected image is displayed in the active segment and can
now be allocated to the page.
If you merely want to review the images :
Drag the mouse in the list across the desired image entries.
The images will be displayed in sequence in the active segment.
Closes the series list.
Show list
Cancel
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H.2
Creating snapshots
Use the Printer Snapshot function to create snapshots of the
screen. The function enables you to print function windows and
ROI's of the screen.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Snapshot . . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
*
Rev. 07
Printer Snapshot
H.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Presets the parameter values, e. g., magnication factor and print
format. The Printer setting window is displayed (page H.32).
Prints a function window
(page H.23).
Prints an ROI
(page H.24).
Exits the function. ROIs are not stored.
Settings
Platform
ROI
Exit
T I P
If necessary, move the
Snapshot functionwindowso
that the screen ROI to be
printed is not covered.
Creating snapshots
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Printing a function window
Open the function window you want to print.
Click the platform button.
Activate the function window you want to print.
Click the mouse in the header of the window.
Print the window.
Platform
Example:
Toprint thepatient list andnot the
Deletefunctionwindow:
Click
Go
T I P
To ensure that the snapshot
ts on the paper:
Check whether the correct
magnication or reduction
factor has been set
(page H.35).
Rev. 07
Printer Snapshot
H.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Printing a screen ROI
Click the ROI button.
Use the mouse to drag a rectangle over the screen ROI to be
printed.
A black rectangle (ROI) is displayed on the monitor while you
drag the mouse.
Print the screen ROI.
ROI
Go
T I P
To ensure that the snapshot
ts on the paper:
Check whether the correct
magnication or reduction
factor has been set
(page H.35).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H.3
Presetting the print
parameters
Use the Printer Setting function to set the parameters for the print
function.
Please note: Jobs already in the printer job list are not affected by
this function. However, modied parameters do apply to reacti-
vated print jobs (chapter H.4).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Snapshot . . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
*
Rev. 07
Printer Setting
H.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Printer setting window displays the various parameters
which may be set.
Enables you to generate or process a master page
(page H.36).
Exits the Printer setting window and stores the parameters set.
Terminates the function. The system only retains the setting for
the Message Output parameter.
Masterpage
Exit
Cancel
Presetting the print parameters
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Displaying printer messages
Message Output : The display of printer messages can be switched on and off.
Displays messages in the message eld of the control
area.
This parameter may only be set to Noif it is set to Yes for
at least one console.
Using the current master page
A master page comprises freely-selectable text to be used in the
header or footer of the page.
Masterpage: Switch on the current master page to display this text in the hard-
copy.
Applies the master page
Does not apply the master page
Creating a master page page H.36.
Yes
No
ON
OFF
Rev. 07
Printer Setting
H.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Activating defaults
Selecting text to be printed
These following parameters only apply to print jobs started with
the Printer Interactive function (chapter H.1).
Displayed Text : Select the information which should appear on the hardcopy.
Click the respective check boxes
Installation O
Patient Name O
Patient ID O
Age / Sex O (depending on the system
conguration)
Image Number O series and image number
Date O date of measurement
Time O time of measurement
Meas. Parameter O
Acquisition O acquisition time
Patient Pos. O patient position
Matrix, FOV, CE O matrix, area or reconstruction,
center of reconstruction
(CT images)
Comment O
Please note: Even if you have switched off text display in the im-
age segment, the text selected in this function is displayed in the
hardcopy.
To print any available evaluation text with the image, superim-
pose the evaluation text on the screen using the Display Text
function (page J.24).
Paper size / Division: Select the page size and page segmentation (number of print
segments) from the list.
Example: DIN A4 / 1 One print segment on DIN A4 paper
DIN A4 / 4 Four print segments on DIN A4 paper
Please note: This setting can be changed only if the print segment
has been deleted with Clear (page H.15).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the format and number of copies
Copies: Enter the number of copies or click the arrow keys.
Orientation: Select the print format :
portrait format
landscape format
This switch may not be available with every printer.
Scale factor for snapshots
This parameter only applies to the Printer Snapshot function
(chapter H.2).
Snapshot scale factor : Use the slide control to set the magnication or reduction
factor.
Example: 0.2 Reduction by a factor of 5
1.0 Original size
5.0 Magnication by a factor of 5
Threshold value for display of text and graphics
This parameter only applies to the Printer Interactive function
(chapter H.1).
Set the threshold value. Superimposed text and graphics with
grey values above the threshold are displayed as white or black.
Interactive threshold: Use the slide control.
Example: 0 All text and graphics black
128 below the value: black; above the value: white
255 All text and graphics white
por
lan
Rev. 07
Printer Setting
H.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Creating a new master page
Multiple master pages can be created to be used for various appli-
cations.
Open the Printer Masterpage window.
Resets all parameters in the current master page to their original
settings.
Prints the current master page so it can be checked.
Exits the window.
Exits the window. A new master page must be stored. Only then
can it be used for print jobs.
Masterpage
Clear
Print
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Labeling headers and footers
Select the position of the text to be displayed.
Header Lines The three sets of switches refer to the three text lines in the header
of the master page.
Text is left-justied
Text is center-justied
Text is right-justied
Footer Line Position of text in the footer, same as described above.
A highlighted switch means the position has already been allo-
cated.
Textinput : Enter the corresponding text in the input eld.
Font : Select the font desired from the menu with the mouse.
The fonts and type sizes available depend on your printer.
Example: Courier Times Helvetica AvantGarde
NewCenturySchoolbook Palatino
Font Size: Select the type size desired from the menu with the mouse.
Example: 10 12 14 (in points)
Storing the master page
Masterpage: Enter a name for the master page.
Store the new master page.
The name of the new master page is displayed in the list.
The new master page immediately becomes available; i.e., it can
be used for print jobs (page H.33).
Left
Center
Right
Store
Notice
If a master page already exists with the same name, its
parameters will be overwritten by the new master page.
Rev. 07
Printer Setting
H.38 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing master pages
Masterpage: The name of the current master page is displayed in the Printer
Masterpage window.
Selectinganother master pageas thecurrent master
page
List of Masterpage The list contains the names of stored master pages. The list can be
scrolled, if necessary.
Select the desired master page from the list.
The selected master page becomes the current master page and can
be used for printing. (page H.33)
Modifying the master page
List of Masterpage Select the master page to be modied.
Modify the header or footer by selecting the respective position
and correcting the corresponding text (page H.37).
All entries made in the current master page can be reversed.
Store the modied master page.
Deleting a master page
If the master page to be deleted is not the current master page :
List of Masterpage : Select the master page to be deleted from the list.
Delete the selected master page.
Clear
Store
Delete
Important
You cannot reverse a delete procedure.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
H.4
Processingthelist of print jobs
Use the Printer Job Control function to open the list of print jobs.
You can modify the order of jobs, stop jobs in progress, continue
jobs, or delete them.
The job list is continually updated.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Interactive. . .
Snapshot . . .
Setting. . .
Jobctr . . .
*
Rev. 07
Printer Job Control
H.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
In the Printer job control windowyou can select the job to be pro-
cessed. The job is highlighted in the list. The job can
O be deleted, stopped, continued (page H.44)
O have its priority changed, be reactivated (page H.45)
O be displayed (page H.46)
Ends the function. Exit
Processing the list of print jobs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Meaning of entries in the job list
Type Interactive The print job is started via the Printer
Interactive function.
Snapshot The print job is started via the Printer Snapshot
function.
Master The print job is started via the Printer
Masterpage window.
Table The print job is started via the Patient Select functions.
Unix The print job is started via the operating system.
Patient NameName of the patient whose images are included in the print job.
multiple if the job contains images from several patients.
graphic if the job cannot be allocated to any patient.
patient list, series list, image list
The print job was created with the Patient Select function.
platform, ROI The print job was started via the Printer
Snapshot function.
Name of a master page
the print job was started via the Printer Masterpage
window.
Name of a UNIX print job
print job was started via the operating system.
State Active the job is currently being processed.
Inactive the job is in the job list and is awaiting processing.
Preparing the job is being prepared.
Ready the job is prepared.
Suspended The job was being processed, but was stopped.
Done The job is completed.
Station Species the console where the job was started.
Rev. 07
Printer Job Control
H.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing jobs
Jobs can be deleted, stopped, and continued, and their order in the
list can be changed.
Deleting the job
The job must be selected.
Delete the job from the list.
A notice box is displayed and you must conrm your actions.
If you delete the active job, processing of the next job in the job list
begins immediately.
Suspending the job list
Stop the job list.
Please note: When you suspend the job list, the entire job list is
stopped. The active print job is ended.
Resuming the job list
If the job list has been stopped (by stopping the active job):
Resume processing the job list.
The rst job in the job list is restarted and is assigned Active sta-
tus.
Delete
Stop
Continue
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Processing a job immediately
Stop the active job.
Click the desired job with the mouse.
The selected job is appended on top of the list (right after the pro-
cessed jobs).
Resume processing the job list.
Processing a job after the active job
If you do not want to suspend the active job :
Click the job required.
The selected job is appended after the active job.
The job selected will be processed automatically after the active
job has been completed.
Reactivating a completed job
The job must be selected (status: Done).
Activate the job.
The job is appended at the end of the list and will be processed
again.
Stop
Priority
Continue
Priority
Recover
Rev. 07
Printer Job Control
H.46 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Showing information
about the job
You can display information about a job selected in the job list.
Open the Printer job show window.
Please note: Print jobs for master pages cannot be displayed.
Copies: If the job is assigned the Inactive or Suspended status (page
H.43), you can change the number of copies. You can make a
maximum of 4 copies. All other parameters do not allow for user
intervention.
Please note: The setting for the Copies function affects the dis-
played job only.
Closes the window.
Show
Example:
Interactive job type
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Viewing the image
You can select a print segment and display its contents in the ac-
tive segment.
Select the desired print segment in the Printer job show
window.
Display the contents of the selected print segment in the
active segment.
Please note: An image containing graphics, as well as magnied or
reduced images, can only be displayed correctly if stored prior to
being printed. Otherwise, the printed image and displayed image
will not be identical.
View
Rev. 07
Printer Job Control
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J Display
Display
J2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of the display functions
Use the display functions to control screen division, display of im-
age text, and medical windowing. Additionally, you can set the
color of the function windows.
Screen
Modifying the screen display...........................................................J.1
Text
Displaying the image text.................................................................J.2
Window
Medical windowing...........................................................................J.3
Color
Changing the color display for the function window..................J.4
Auto Display
Displaying measured images automatically..................................J.5
Display
menu
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
not on MAGNETOM Open
NUMARIS REFERENCE J.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .1
Modifying the screen display
The Display Screen function allows you to dene the number
and order of image segments displayed on the monitor. For exam-
ple, a single segment may ll the entire screen, or the screen may
be divided into 16 segments.
The parameters are retained until you modify them, even after
you end Numaris.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
Rev. 07
Display Screen
J.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing the display mode
Clears the image in the active segment.
Clears the contents displayed on the monitor.
The image les are retained. To delete image les from a storage
medium chapter F.4.
Ends the Display Screen function and stores the parameters set.
Control area
In many cases, the switches in the control area provide the quick-
est possible access to the various functions (Working with Numaris
page B.214).
Clr Seg
Clr Scr
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Display Mode Select the switch corresponding to the desired mode.
Single Image Mode : full-frame display
4 Segments
9 segments
16 segments
2 vertical stripes
2 horizontal stripes
The selected setting takes immediate effect.
Please note: When you switch fromsingle image mode, 4 segment,
9 segment, or 16 segment display to a stripe mode, all evaluation
text in the image is deleted.
In addition, images are modied when you switch from a stripe
mode to a mode with square segments :
O When switching fromthe mode two vertical stripes, the images
are scrolled to the left.
O When switching from the mode two horizontal stripes, the
images are scrolled upward.
Rev. 07
Display Screen
J.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
What happens whenyouchangethe
segment display?
There are three different ways to change the display mode :
1. There are more segments than before
In this case, the old segments are copied in sequence. The remain-
ing segments in the new mode are empty.
2. The number of segments remains the same
In this case too, the contents of the segments are copied in se-
quence to the new segment.
3. There are fewer segments than previously
Please note that surplus images in the old mode disappear in the
new mode.
C
C A B D
E F
B
D E
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing segments
Change of Segments : Set the type of segment change-over desired.
When an image is called, it is displayed in the
next segment.
New images are displayed in the active
segment ; that is, the new image replaces the
previous one.
What happens when you change to serial display
When images are called one after the other, each image is allocated
to a new segment, regardless of its previous contents. This means
that the arrangement of the segments dened by the display mode
also determines the active segment for the next image called.
Serial
Fixed
T I P
Switch to Serial if you are
primarily working with the
same patient in all segments.
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Image +
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Image +
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Pat. 1
Ima. 4
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Image +
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 1
Ima. 5
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Pat. 1
Ima. 4
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Pat. 1
Ima. 4
Rev. 07
Display Screen
J.16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
If Serial mode has been selected, the active segment automatically
advances to the next position before the image is displayed. If you
change the active segment manually, the next image will be dis-
played in this segment. (This is true regardless of whether Fixed
or Serial has been selected.) For all subsequent images, the active
segment will be advanced automatically.
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 9
Image +
Pat. 5
Ima.10
Pat. 5
Ima. 9
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Image +
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 9
Change of the
active segment
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
What happens when you change to xed display
You may change the active segment at any time. Existing parame-
ters for the active segment are used for the subsequent image.
T I P
Switch to Fixed if you are
primarily working with
different patients.
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 3
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Change of the active
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 9
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 8
Pat. 1
Ima. 2
Pat. 5
Ima. 9
Error message
Change of the active
segment to empty
segment to a lled
Active segment
not changed
Image +
Image +
Image +
segment
segment
Rev. 07
Display Screen
J.18 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Other settings
Default image callup: Set the default parameter for image display.
When images are selected, the rst image of the
series is displayed.
When images are selected, the center image of
the series is displayed (applies only to series
generated via the measurement).
Please note: The setting will not affect localizer images with their
different slice orientations.
In the case of images copied from the optical disk or via the Sys-
tem External Data function, the rst image of the series is auto-
matically called.
Default image walk in: Select the parameter for paging through images via Ima or
Ima+.
Paging is restricted to the active series.
Paging is performed in all series of the active
view patient.
Full display: O Enlarges the active segment to full frame. When you switch off the
check box, the previous screen display is restored.
First
Center
Series
Patient
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .2
Displaying the image text
Every image le contains text which is generated either automati-
cally or by you. The Display Text function helps you to determine
the scope of the text data in the image. The parameters apply to all
segments.
Use the switch in the control area to quickly switch text on or off in
the active segment.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
Rev. 07
Display Text
J.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Switching text on and off
As soon as you click a check box in the Text window, the active
segment reects the change in parameters. In the other segments,
the settings selected will be applied only after you change the ac-
tive segment (exception: evaluation text).
The check boxes allow all combinations, regardless of the other
text elements set.
Ends the function and stores the parameters selected.
At the MRC only
Exit
Displaying the image text
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Switching global text on/off
Screen Text Display: Superimposes the text in the image segment
(Working with Numaris page B.47).
Switching standard text on/off
The text in the image text eld is called standard text. Generated
during measurement or image reconstruction, the standard text is
contained in every image le.
Standard Text : O Superimposes or blanks out standard text in the image segment.
Switching individual text information on/off
Installation: O Displays the name and type of installation, patient orientation,
and software version.
Patient Name: O Displays patient name.
Patient Number : O Displays patient number and date of birth.
Series, Image No. : O Displays series and image number.
Date and Time: O Displays time and date of scan.
Meas. Param. : O Displays measurement parameters : type of measurement, inver-
sion time, presaturation slabs, repetition time, echo time, and slice
thickness.
Acquisition Time: O Displays acquisition time.
Patient Position: O Displays patient position and view direction, including slice posi-
tions and slice orientations 1 and 2.
Matrix, FoV, MF: O Displays matrix, Field of View, and magnifying factor.
Comment : O Displays comments 1 and 2.
Rev. 07
Display Text
J.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Switching evaluation text on/off
Text generated by an evaluation function is called evaluation text.
You can store this text in the image le using the CopSeg function
button (chapter F.2). If the text is not explicitly stored, the image
will not include evaluation text.
Evaluation Text : O Superimposes or blanks out any evaluation text in the image seg-
ments.
Switching the hospital name on/off
Hospital Name 1, 2, 3: O Select hospital name 1, 2 or 3.
The hospital name is assigned during system installation. The In-
stallation check box lets you superimpose or blank out the hospi-
tal name in the image segment.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .3
Medical windowing
Windowing values are always part of a medical image le. The
Display Window function allows you to set the parameters as
well as the mouse sensitivity for medical windowing.
Using the mouse, you can window quickly and easily. The func-
tion window provides additional functions which can be set.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
Rev. 07
Display Window
J.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the windowing parameters
You can set the windowing values as well as other parameters in
the Window function window. These values,
O W windowing width and
O C windowing center
are displayed in the bottom right corner of a segment.
Ends the function and stores the parameters set. Exit
Medical windowing
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the windowing speed
Speed Control : The windowing speed is the rate at which the mouse movement is
translated into a change in windowing values (mouse sensitivity).
This setting affects all images, however, it becomes visible only
when the next image is called up.
Slow Slowwindowing (mouse must be dragged a lot).
Fast Fast windowing (mouse movement is kept to a
minimum).
With the Fast switch in the switch eld of the control area, you can
toggle between slow and fast windowing. When the switch is not
activated, the slow windowing speed is selected.
Setting the windowing modality
This setting affects all images, however, it becomes visible only af-
ter a segment becomes active.
Each image is windowed using the values
previously stored.
Subsequent images called obtain the windowing
values from the image in the active segment.
The values for Width and Center are calculated
automatically from the image le. However,
optimal windowing can only be obtained
manually.
Fast
Window Modality
for Image Call up:
Stored
Hold
Auto
Rev. 07
Display Window
J.34 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Windowing
The following setting affects the active segment only. The Width
and Center elds contain the current windowing values for the ac-
tive segment.
Width: Enter the windowing width.
Center : Enter the windowing center.
If your input exceeds the valid value range, either the minimum
or maximum value will be displayed in the input eld.
Fine adjustment : Click the arrow. The windowing width will in-
crease or decrease in increments of 2 and the windowing center in
increments of 1.
Storing windowing values
Stores the current values for Center and Width in the image le.
The values are stored in raw data les if the data originates from
STORE. If the image in the active segment originates from the last
measurement of the current patient, the windowing values are
stored for subsequent measurements.
You may also use the function button in the control area.
Store
WinSto
Medical windowing
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Windowing with original values
Windows the image in the active segment using the values in its
image le. The current windowing values are overwritten, but
graphics and pixels remain unchanged.
Auto and Hold in Window Modality for Image Call up do not af-
fect image display in this case. However, their functionality is re-
tained for subsequent image selection.
Copying windowing values
Copies windowing values and windowing mode of the active seg-
ment to another segment.
Click Copy and the destination segment desired.
Windowing automatically
Automatically calculates the windowing values of the active im-
age from its image data. For optimal windowing, these values
must be adjusted manually.
You may also use the function button in the control area.
Original
Copy
Auto
WinAut
T I P
First window automatically
with Auto, then window
manually with the mouse.
Rev. 07
Display Window
J.36 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Multi-windowing
Several images may be windowed simultaneously. Only the rela-
tive windowing values of the selected images are changed. If you
want to transfer the values to another segment, you must copy
them (page J.35).
Consolidating images into groups
Multi Window: Set the multi-windowing switch to On.
Click the windowing values in the images desired.
The selected windowing values are identied by a frame. Subse-
quently, the images are consolidated into groups.
Windowing images in groups
Move the mouse pointer to one of the images in the group.
Click and hold the WINDOWING button while you drag the
mouse.
The windowing pointer appears in all images consolidated into
groups. The windowing values are changed simultaneously.
Dissolving grouped images
Click the windowing values of the images consolidated into
groups.
The frame disappears. The images are no longer grouped to-
gether.
Please note: Grouped images are automatically dissolved when
you change the screen display mode.
On
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .4
Changingthecolor displayfor
the function window
Prerequisite : A color monitor is congured with the system. The
Display Color function allows you to set the color setting for the
function window. You have a choice of 16 different colors.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
Rev. 07
Display Color
J.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the desired color
The Color Setting window has a palette of 16 colors.
Cancels the function. The original color of the windows remains
valid.
Setting the color
Select the color desired from the palette.
Click the corresponding color eld.
End the color setting function.
The new color is now valid, but is not displayed.
Displaying the color
To display the function window with the new color:
End Numaris without a restart.
Set the software switch to Application and the mode switch to No
Restart.
The login: prompt will appear.
Re-start Numaris.
Enter mr (RETURN).
Numaris will be re-started. The function windows will be dis-
played in the selected color.
The complete procedure takes only a few minutes.
Cancel
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
J .5
Displaying measured images
automatically
During the measurement, the patients images are displayed auto-
matically on the monitor. With the Display Auto Display func-
tion, you can switch automatic image display and other settings
on and off again.
The advantages of automatic image display include:
O Interventional MRI: for biopsies or catheterization
O Interactive measurements such as real-time MRI: for monitoring
physiological movements and examinations of blood vessels and
ow.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Screen. . .
Text . . .
Window. . .
Color . . .
Auto Display ...
T I P
Usethe"ada"macro to activate
thefunction morequicklypage
J .57.
Rev. 10
Display Auto Display
J.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overview of the automatic image
display function
Retains old settings or interrupts the function.
Accepts settings for subsequent measurements and ends the
function.
Image text
The image text of the automatically displayed images contains no
patient information. In place of the patient name, the text line
Auto Displayed Image is displayed. This indicates that the im-
age was called up via the Auto Display function.
When you change the active segment to a segment with an auto-
matically displayed image, the image text is updated.
Current
screen display
Cancel
Exit
Displaying measured images automatically
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Switching the Auto Display function
on/off
Auto Display: You can set whether the acquired images should be
displayed automatically.
Switches Auto Display ON. During the subsequent
scans, the images are displayed automatically (only if
you end the function with Exit).
Switches Auto Display OFF.
Shortcut:
With the AutoD switch in the switch eld of the control area, you
can also select and deselect the Auto Display function. When the
switch is dimmed, the image display function is deselected.
Please note: If you deselected the Auto Display function in the
function window, the AutoD switch cannot be selected.
Possible reasons:
The segment for which Auto Display was selected is the active seg-
ment (page J.54).
The current screen display was changed (chapter J.1)
The segment for Auto Display was already assigned to another func-
tion (such as MPR or MIP).
The segment for Auto Display is required for another function.
In these cases, the Auto Display function is deselected and must be
selected again.
On
Off
AutoD
Image is not
displayed
automatically
?
Rev. 10
J.54 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting segments
Segments: Select the segment for image display.
When Auto Display is selected for one segment, the last image is
continuously replaced by the new image in this segment (xed).
If you would like to apply Auto Display to All slices (page J.56),
several segments may be selected. The next image will appear in
the segment following the last image (serial).
Skipping the active segment
Allows you to skip the active segment during Auto Display. Skip Active Segment
Auto
Switchis selected
Segment 1is selected
for Auto Display
Display No display/
Switchis selected
for Auto Display
Active
segment/
AutoD
Auto
Display
Active
segment
AutoD AutoD
Auto
Display
Active
segment/
AutoD
Switchis deselected
for Auto Display
AutoD
Automatic image display
switches off
If the active segment
is occupied by another function,
the function will be interrupted
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting windowing modality
Window Values: Set the windowing modality for Auto Display.
Calculates the values for Width and Center
automatically from the image data. Optimal
windowing can be achieved only manually,
however.
Automatically displayed images take on the
windowing values of the image displayed in the
respective segment.
Please note: If the automatically displayed image appears in an
empty segment, the image is windowed automatically.
If you window All slices manually (page J.56), the window val-
ues will be applied to the images subsequently displayed auto-
matically.
Auto
Hold
Rev. 10
J.56 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the slice to be displayed
Slice to Display: Select the slice to be displayed automatically.
Displays only the rst slice.
Displays only the middle slice.
Displays only the last slice.
This is useful for repeated survey scans for
rapidly nding an optimal orientation in complex anatomical
structures (for example, the heart or a few joints).
Displays all slices, one after the other, in
anatomical order after the scan. If you selected
several segments for Auto Display, the display mode
automatically switches to serial.
For 3-D scans
If you subsequently perform a 3- scan:
The settings First, Middle, and Last refer to the partitions. In a
3-Dsequence with several slabs or echoes, the settings refer to the
rst slab or the rst echo.
First
Middle
Last
All All
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Working with macros
Macro A macro is an abbreviation for a series of keystrokes and/or
mouse movements. Macros let you automate tasks that are re-
peated often.
ada The fastest way to activate automatic image display is to use the
"ada" macro. Assign this macro to a function key (chapter K.4),
and you only need to press the key once to activate the Display
Auto Display function with the desired settings.
Default settings
The default for "ada" performs the following settings:
Auto Display: d
Segments: 4 segment mode, use segment 2 for image display.
No
Window Values:
Slice to Display:
Optional settings
You can also customize the macro via the following options:
1 use segment 1 for image display
3 use segment 3 for image displayy
sp set the macro speed (default is 0.3).
On
Skip Active Segment
Auto
All
Rev. 10
J.58 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Possible settings for the function keys
The following table illustrates some examples of function key set-
tings.
Functionkeyassignment Function
SystemRunada activatefunctionwithstandard
settings
SystemRunada1 usesegment 1for imagedisplay
SystemRunada1sp3.0 slowmacro speed
SystemRunadasp0.0 maximummacro speed
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K System
System
K2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Summary of system functions
The system functions in the System menu are used to check the
standard and non-standard functions of Numaris.
menu
System
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
NUMARIS REFERENCE K3
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Report
Logbook report................................................................................. K.1
Run
Starting programs............................................................................ K.2
End
Ending the software ........................................................................ K.3
Keys
Programming the function keys.................................................... K.4
Imprint
Retrieving system data ................................................................... K.5
Info
Listing device data........................................................................... K.6
External Data
Transferring image les .................................................................. K.7
Camera
Setting up the camera...................................................................... K.8
Printer (not on MAGNETOM Open)
Setting and checking the printer ................................................... K.9
Refresh
Resetting the workspace............................................................... K.10
Standby
System standby.............................................................................. K.11
Remote diagnosis
Remote diagnostics........................................................................ K.12
Rev. 07
System
K4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
QA
Quality assurance .......................................................................... K.13
Service
Service functions ............................................................................ K.14
Reload all
Resetting the measurement system............................................. K.15
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
NUMARIS REFERENCE K.11
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.1
Logbook report
The Numaris logbook contains messages generated during sys-
tem operation, e. g. error messages, warnings, etc. You can access
these messages with the SystemReport function.
In addition, you can display messages from previous days.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Report
K.12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
After you have called the function, the Report window rst dis-
plays only a small excerpt from the logbook for the day shown in
the header. The messages are listed chronologically, with the most
recent message at the top.
Terminates the report function.
Ends the report function. The settings are retained.
No Console number (local or satellite)
Time Clock time of message
Symbol Symbol representing the message
Message Text of the message
Explanation Explanation of the message
Please note: Inputs in the logbook may be selected individually for
service purposes.
Cancel
Exit
Logbook report
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Selecting the type of message
Scope: Set the desired type of message (you may enter more than
one type).
Internal error requiring expert support.
General error message indicating incorrect
system operation by the user.
System warnings.
When you change the switch position, the messages applicable to
it will be displayed in the logbook after a short delay.
Paging
Displays the messages of the day prior to the date of the messages
shown in the window.
Displays todays messages.
Displays the messages of the day after the date of the messages
shown in the window.
Pages down in the logbook.
Pages up in the logbook.
Storing messages
Stores the messages of the date displayed to a le.
Stores the entire logbook to a le.
Fatal
Error
Warnings
Day
Today
Day +
Page
Page +
Save
Save All
Rev. 07
System Report
K.14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Searching for messages
Selecting the console
Source: From the menu, select the console whose messages you
want to display.
Display messages fromthe console at which you
are working (MRC or MRSC).
Display messages from another console
(MRC or MRSC).
Display messages from all connected consoles
(MRC and MRSC).
Once you have selected another console, you must conrm your
selection.
Displays the messages for the console selected.
Entering the search string
Proceed as follows if you remember one of the terms used in the
message you are looking for :
String: Enter the search string for the messages to be displayed.
Example: MAXICAM conguration
Conclude the input with RETURN. All messages of the date dis-
played containing the search string MAXICAM conguration
will be shown. If the program cannot locate the search string en-
tered, no messages will be shown.
LOCAL
REMOTE
SYSTEM
Today
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.2
Starting programs
Additional, executable programs are stored in their own directory
under the UNIX operating system. These programs can be called
in Numaris with the SystemRun function.
Depending on the particular program, you can continue working
with Numaris functions while running one of the programs.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 11
System Run
K.22 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
You select the program in the Run window which lists all pro-
grams available.
Select a program from the list.
Start the selected program.
A special shell tool window is displayed for dialog-driven interac-
tions with the program. The messages and the types of acceptable
inputs are a function of the program selected.
After the program has been started, the function window remains
on-screen so that you can run additional programs in sequence.
Close the program list.
Aprogramstarted previously continues to run. The shell tool win-
dow remains on-screen until the program is ended.
Several programs are
reservedfor service
only.
Go
Exit
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing defaults
Changing the language used by Numaris:
0 English
1 German
Subsequently, end the system using System End (chapter K.3).
Set the switch to System and Restart. Nowthe language selected
will be used.
The entries in the patient list can be sorted according to different
criteria. Enter the appropriate number (RETURN).
1 Sorted according to the date of registration or
2 Sorted in alphanumeric order.
0 Terminates the program.
Sets the mouse for left-handed use. The left mouse button be-
comes the MENU button and the right mouse button becomes the
SELECT button. Allocation of the center mouse button is not
changed.
Sets the mouse for right-handed use. Resets the original mouse
button allocations.
Modies the grey scale (background) on black-and-white moni-
tors. Eight different grey scales are available. After you have en-
tered the new value: End the system using System End (chapter
K.3). Set the switch to System and Restart.
SetSystemLanguage
SortPatients
LeftHandMouse
RightHandMouse
set_window_color
Rev. 11
System Run
K.24 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing settings for mobile MR systems
(use only at the MRC)
You can use this program to change the hospital name (in the im-
age text) and the settings for the camera installed. Conrm each
entry with RETURN.
Please note: After the program is ended, Numaris will be restarted
automatically. The settings modied will be accepted.
General Installation Name of Institution Hospital name desired,
max. 26 characters
(e.g. Dr. Millers practice)
Station ID If multiple MR systems are present:
more specic designation for the MR
system used, max. 8 characters
(e.g. MR_Mobil)
Camera Installation Enter the number desired here.
Birthdate / Age On the lm sheet:
(Birthdate/[Age]) Date of birth or age of the patient
(0 = date of birth, 1 = age)
Localizer Localizer image on the lm sheet:
([First]/All/None) (0 = on the rst lm sheet,
1 = on all sheets of lm,
2 = no survey image)
Maximum Number Number of copies possible
of Copies (Recommendation: 9)
Number of local (0 = no cameras connected)
cameras connected to
system
Camera connected to Camera connected to the main or
console satellite console (0 = MRC, 1 = MRSC)
VCR for MAXICAM Video standard for digital camera
(0 = PAL, 1 = NTSC)
camera name Display of all cameras supported
connected camera
Mobile_Update
T I P
If you do not wish to modify
the existing setting, press
RETURN to move to the next
item.
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Delete protection for patient
During processing, patient data or images are protected by a num-
ber of functions against accidental deletion. The programs listed
belowallowyou to display the delete protection or cancel it. In ad-
dition, you as the user can protect a patient against deletion.
Lists the protected patient including name and number. The pro-
tective functions, howoften they have been called, and fromwhat
console, are displayed.
Example: pat_name : DEMO PATIENT
pat_id: 4711
pat_uid: 123456
COPY(51) 1 time(s) on mrc(1)
EXPOSURE(61) 1 time(s) on mrc(1)
DISPLAY(66) 1 time(s) on mrc(1)
Cancels patient protection for all patients. Consult with Siemens
Customer Service before implementation. Enter:
A Remove delete protection from all patients.
S Remove delete protection from individual patients.
Enter the pat_uid corresponding to the patient.
RETURN Terminates the program.
Protects individual patients against accidental deletion. You have
to use the same program to cancel protection. RemovePatient-
Protections is not effective in this case.
Enter a 0 after the program is started. The list of patients available
is displayed. Enter the pat_uid for the desired patient; it is the rst
entry in the list. Further input :
0 delete protection for the patient remains
1 delete protection is cancelled
1 the program is terminated
The patient protection set by you is identied as USER PRO-
TECTED in the list shown under ShowPatientProtections.
ShowPatientProtections
RemovePatientProtections
ProtectPatientByUser
Rev. 11
System Run
K.26 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Numaris database
While Numaris is running, you can manipulate the Numaris data-
base.
Numaris database The Numaris database contains:
O File systems with image les and
O Files for patient management.
Repairing the database
The data help program DB Repair enables you to execute a num-
ber of actions (7 options) in the Numaris database.
Enter the appropriate number after you started the program.
DB_Repair
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Options 1 and 7 are harmless and can be used by anyone (page
K.28). For the other options, please call your Siemens Service be-
fore you proceed.
Recreate whole database The entire database is recreated.
Caution: The old database is deleted!
Reload missing patients Patient data is updated.
Caution: The old patient data is deleted!
Reload one pat_uid One patient is updated.
All patients without images are deleted from the database.
Please note: This includes all preregistered patients.
Merges identical patient data.
Notice
Apply the options (2, 3, 4, 5, and 6) described below
only after consulting your local Siemens Service.
Remove patients without
images
Merge identical patients
together
Rev. 11
System Run
K.28 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Analyzer Checks the database for consistency. All image data is checked
against the database.
The asterisks * provide you with the results of the consistency
check. The meaning of the asterisks is explained at the end of the
table.
Filesystem directory Creates a directory that provides the les in which the images are
stored.
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Purging the database
Checks the image les and veries their validity.
Invalid data will be deleted after the check.
Notice
Use this program only after consultation
with your Siemens Service.
Garbage_Collection
Rev. 11
System Run
K.210 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Calling the log le
If there are problems with the net (e.g. net failure during data
transfer), you can check the log le for an overview of the pa-
tients/images that have been transferred.
Enter the desired UID after you started the program.
Enter the type of log le (in case there are several):
O S send log le
O R receive log le
DisplayNetlog
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The time, the network protocol used, the image number, and the
node name are displayed.
Elapsed O Send log le: duration of transmitting time
O Receive log le: Time that elapsed between receiving the le and
appending it in the Numaris database
Rev. 11
System Run
K.212 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Automatic data transfer
This programallows you to automatically transfer data to dened
network nodes at regular intervals.
Only images that were newly measured or that were generated
via post-processing will be transferred.
Please note: This function is possible only at the main console
(MRC).
The data transfer report appears as a label in the patient and im-
age list (page A.15 and page D.13). The following labels may
appear:
At least one image:
c copied to the network node
All images:
A archived to OD/MOD
C copied to the network node
F An error occurred during transfer.
If this occurs, you can retrieve more detailed information with
DisplayNetlog (page K.210).
AutosendConguration
Notice
Some post-processing functions, such as Magnify or Scroll
allow overwriting of the original images.
In this case, the image number remains unchanged.
However, if images are transferred via the network,
the original image and the manipulated image may be saved
as separate les with two different generation dates.
In this case, both les will be transferred.
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting up the data transfer
Destination node: Enter the name of the network node that you want to
copy/archive to.
Cycle time in minutes: Enter the time interval between two transmissions.
If an error occurs during the transmission, you can set the number
of times the system will retry the transmission in this screen.
No. of repetitions: Enter the number of tries.
Start automatic data transfer.
Stops automatic data transfer. If you are transferring les with the
Archive (chapter F.1) or Copy (chapter F.2) functions, additional
transfers will be attempted in case an error occurs.
Interrupts automatic data transfer. No further transfers will be at-
tempted.
Restores default settings.
Interrupts data transfer.
Ends data transfer. The selected settings will be retained for the
next transfer.
Excludes the selected patient from the automatic transfer.
Start
Stop
Pause
Init
Cancel
Exit
AutosendExclusion
Rev. 11
System Run
K.214 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Eliminating errors
In case of errors, functions can be ended and started again without
having to reboot Numaris. Optional, error diagnoses can be stored
for Siemens Customer Service.
Enter the abbreviations for the respective functions
(is not upper or lower-case sensitive).
RMEA End and restart measurement functions.
RDIS End and restart display functions.
RFIL End and restart le functions.
REXP End and restart exposure functions.
RPRI End and restart print functions.
RSIN Restore connection to network (SIENET, DICOM).
RHC For systems with two consoles (MRC and MRSC): If one of the
consoles is hung up, Numaris can be ended at the blocked console.
SGDI Stores error diagnoses for subsequent use by Siemens Customer
Service (chapter K.12).
SAIM Stores active image.
EX Ends the program.
TroubleReset
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Entering image numbers
alpha-numerically
This program allows you to alpha-numerically select one of the
images of the active patient.
Start the program.
You will see a small input window in the lower right corner of the
control area. The window can be moved or enlarged.
Enter the respective image number.
End each input with RETURN.
Example: Image number 2 is displayed in the active segment.
1. Enter the number: 10
Image number 10 is shown in the active segment.
2. Enter the number: +5
3. Enter the number: -2
Invoking the help screen
To get a list of acceptable inputs:
Magnify the window.
Enter: help
Ima=
Rev. 11
System Run
K.216 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Working with copy jobs on the
network
If you want to copy data via the network, you can use this pro-
gram to edit and display copy jobs.
The jobs will remain in the queue, even if you close the network
connection via TroubleReset RSIN (page K.214) or if you have
to restart.
Enter the desired option after program start (e.g. 3)
Type Source of the copy job:
Copy Function File Copy (chapter F.2),
AS ProgramAutosendConguration (page K.212)
Q/R DICOM Query/Retrieve
(ProgramEnableQueryRetrieveSCP page K.221)
NetCopyControl
T I P
In case there are errors (State
Error), youcanviewthedetails
viaDisplayNetlog
(page K.210).
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Possible options
Pause Pauses jobs; the current job will be completed.
Continue Continues jobs.
List of jobs Displays a list of jobs.
Recover job Reactivates jobs that have an Error status. You need to enter the
Job ID to do this.
Cancel job Deletes selected job. You need to enter the Job ID to do this.
Remove all jobs Deletes jobs; the current job will be completed.
Switch system on/off
When the system is switched off, all jobs that have an Error status
will automatically be deleted.
Jobs that were paused (Pause) will continue after the system is
switched on again.
Rev. 11
System Run
K.218 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing Passwords/FTP access
This programallows you to change the passwords and FTP access
privileges for the existing users of your MR system
After starting the program, enter the desired user.
Complete each entry by pressing RETURN.
Changing passwords
Select the desired function.
For this purpose, enter p.
Enter password: Enter a password.
Repeat password: Conrm the password by entering it a second time.
If you want to delete an existing password, simply enter RETURN.
ChangePasswords
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changing FTP access authorization
Prerequisite: The user has a password.
Change the access authorization.
To do this, enter f.
Depending on the current status, FTP access is either permitted
(enabled) or prohibited (disabled).
prohibited The user does not have a password.
Changing the FTP access authorization is ineffective
in this case.
Rev. 11
System Run
K.220 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Editing the list of body parts
The list fromwhich you can select the body part to be examined is
displayed under the patient functions Patient Register, Patient
Preregister and Patient Renew.
You can edit the list of body parts with the program described be-
low.
Please note: Use this program only if you are familiar with the
UNIX text editor.
Enter the new body part.
The program is not cap-sensitive.
Store your changes.
The modied list is now available under the above patient func-
tions.
EditBodyParts
File
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Additional programs
Corrects the position of the acquisition window (cardiac series).
Checks the status of one or all network nodes.
Patient series can be freely combined (part of the mammo evalua-
tion program).
You can keep the network to the DICOM cameras in the perma-
nent association on status or you can select the permanent asso-
ciation off status if the network is to be connected only until the
lm jobs are processed.
Recommendation: If more systems are connected to the net than the
number of inputs available at the DICOM camera, select perma-
nent association off. However, please note that it is not possible
to start a lm job if all camera inputs are connected.
Adjusts the size of the transfer matrix and presets DICOM camera
(page G.27).
Set the type of DICOM link between different Numaris versions
and other modalities (e.g. MagicView).
The following two programs let you decide whether a worksta-
tion can have access to the patient list (from STORE) of your MR
system.
Provide access privileges.
Remove access privileges.
Restrict external access for selected patients from the patient list
(from STORE).
3dnavwin
CheckNodeStatus
Combine_1
DBPAssociation
DICOMBasicPrintConguration
DICOMMergeAdapter
EnableQueryRetrieveSCP
DisableQueryRetrieveSCP
QueryRetrieveSecurity
Rev. 11
System Run
K.222 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Switches on and off the display of messages in the message eld.
This parameter may only be set to Off if it is set to On for at least
another console.
Provides information regarding the active segment.
BOLD-imaging post processing (for more details, refer to the Ap-
plications Guide).
Initializes MOD to follow to be read on previous MR or CT sys-
tems.
Prerequisites: MR-system with satellite console (MRSC).
When the local disks of the main console (MRC) are full, you can
store the data to the disks of the MRSC(1 MB corresponds to 7 im-
ages in 256 256 matrix) as an alternative to deleting the data.
In the case of internal system errors, the system copies the current
process to the memory. This copy (core dump) can take up a signif-
icant amount of memory capacity, therefore, it should be deleted
on a regular basis. The removeAllCores program searches all di-
rectories for such copies and deletes them.
Evaluates cardiac series (chapter E.18)
(not with Sparc 2).
Transfers windowvalues of the active segment to all images of the
same series. You can program one of the function keys accord-
ingly (chapter K.4).
Recommendation: Window the images with the function key prior
to transferring MIP or MPR-generated images to one of the work-
stations via DICOM. Otherwise the images will be transferred to
the workstation without windowing (or completely black) be-
cause they do not have any automatic window values.
ExposureMessageOutput
GetImageFilename
mripp
MOD_Old_Format
RelocateImages2MRSC
removeAllCores
RUN_ARGUS
SaveWindowValues
Starting programs
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Changes the SAR limits. Refer to chapter B.13 and to the System
Guide, chapter D.2 (not on MAGNETOM Open).
Switching on/off the DICOM consistency check (chapter C.2 and
chapter C.4).
The following two program allows you to set the algorithm to be
used for the Evaluate Magnify (chapter E.1) function.
Sets the algorithm from the previous software version. Increases
the contrast of the contours on the magnied images.
Sets the standard algorithm. The contours of the magnied im-
ages will appear softer.
Subsequently, end the system using System End (chapter K.3).
Set the switch to Application and Restart. Now the new algo-
rithm will be applied.
Calls up information for printing with UNIX. With this program
you can print out individual les on the UNIX level.
Displays physiological stimulation values. Refer to chapter B.16
(MAGNETOM Vision only).
Programs for service
The following programs are reserved for Service only:
O DirExtended
O NetworkInstallation
O ShowCMSInteractive
Sar_set
Series_CreMod_Behaviour
SetMagnifySharp
SetMagnifySmooth
show_printer_info
StimulationMonitor
Rev. 11
System Run
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.3
Ending the software
Depending on the parameter set, the SystemEnd function allows
you to either end working in the application software (Numaris)
or the operating system. In addition, you can indicate whether the
system should be restarted immediately.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System End
K.32 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the mode
Specify the software you want to end and the steps involved in the
End window.
Software: Either end Numaris only or bring down the operating system as
well.
Numaris is ended, however, the operating
system remains booted. You can log on again
immediately.
Numaris is ended together with the operating
system. The entire system is now shut down.
Mode: Indicate whether the systemshould be restarted after the End pro-
cedure is completed.
Software is ended without restart.
Software is automatically restarted after having
been ended.
Ends the function.
End Numaris only or bring down the operating system as well
(Working with Numaris chapter B.1).
Application
System
No Restart
Restart
Cancel
T I P
ShouldNumarishangduring
any procedure, restart it with
Application-Restart.
End
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.4
Programming the function
keys
The keyboard includes 15 function keys F1 to F15 which can be
programmed with frequently used commands via the System
Keys function.
By programming the keys accordingly, you can access frequently-
used functions with the touch of a button:
Special keys To increase the number of programmable commands, the function
keys can be combined with the special keys SHIFT and CON-
TROL.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Keys
K.42 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Each function key is assigned a text input eld in the Key Pro-
gramming window. You can enter or edit the command in the text
input eld.
Terminates the key programming function. The programmed key
remains as is. The function is terminated, and the function win-
dow is cleared from the screen.
Whenyouusethekey, thetext line
indicates thecommand
programmedto it.
Cancel
Programming the function keys
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Programming the keys
Key Level : Select the combination of keys you want to use for calling the
programmed command.
Command is called via the function key alone.
Command is called when the SHIFT key is
simultaneously pressed with the function key.
Command is called when the CONTROL key is
simultaneously pressed with the function key.
Command is called when the SHIFT and
CONTROL keys are pressed simultaneously
with the function key.
When you switch to another key combination, the input elds are
lled with the previously entered commands.
F115: Enter the newcommand for a function key into the respective
input eld.
Enter the Numaris function identical to its listing in the menu. For
example :
Example: Patient Register
System Refresh
As compared to menu-driven function selection, you have to enter
an underscore in place of a blank, if the function name consists of
several words.
Example: System External_Data
When entering function names containing abbreviations, replace
the dot with an underscore.
Example: Evaluate Dyn_Analysis
Complete every input with RETURN.
Normal
Shift
Control
Shft/Ctrl
Rev. 07
System Keys
K.44 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Checking inputs
Check the commands entered for errors.
If you made a mistake, the text caret jumps to the corresponding line.
Remove the error and allow the program to check the entry again.
Ending the programming function
Ends the key programming function.
The new programming for the function keys is stored if correct. If
not, an audible tone is heard and a notice box is displayed. You
must then indicate whether you want to leave the function or stay
in it to correct the error.
Using the function keys
To call the programmed command, press the allocated function
key alone or in combination with one or both special keys.
Function key F1, for example, may have been programmed as
follows :
O Just F1 : Patient Register
O Combination SHIFT F1 : Patient Preregister
O Combination CONTROL F1 : Patient Renew
O Combination SHIFT CONTROL F1 : Patient Modify
In this manner you can programup to 60 commands (4 per key) to
the 15 function keys.
Check
In case of errors
?
Exit
T I P
Allocate theRefresh function
to a function key;
for example, F12
(chapter K.10).
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.5
Retrieving system data
Use the SystemImprint function to display data regarding the in-
stalled system and available components.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Imprint
K.52 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Data provided by Imprint
System System name
Serial Number Serial number of the system
Software Software name (Numaris 3)
Version Software version (for example, VB33A)
Archive Version Archived information regarding the software
Console Name of the active and connected consoles
Hardware Options Installed hardware components
Networking Available networks
Implemented coils All coils supported by the current software version
Software Options Applications packages present
Closes the window.
Opens the patent list. The list shows all software patent that apply
to Numaris.
Example
of data
Exit
Patent ...
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.6
Listing device data
The System Info function provides information about storage
media and networks.
The data listed depend on the device specied by you (storage
medium or network).
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Info
K.62 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Dataon storagemediaand networks
Scope: Storage media are the default.
Logical Name Name of the storage medium as it appears in the
function window.
Phys. Name Name given by the operating system (partition of the hard
disk).
Hostname Console to which the storage medium is connected.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the storage medium.
Device Status Current status of the storage medium.
Free Indicates the remaining capacity for images in
256 or 512 matrix format.
Scope: Switches to network.
Node Name Name of the network as it appears in the function
window. The name is provided during installation.
Node Type Type of network used.
Node Address Specic address of a node connected to the network. The
address is provided during installation.
PACS PLA Address of a node connected to the network.
DICOM AE Provided during installation.
Host Type Type of computer to which the network is connected.
Node Status
Storage
Net
T I P
We recommend that you do
not use the entire remaining
storage capacity,
but rather keep 10 % of it as
free disk space.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.7
Transferring image les
The patient images of Numaris are stored in a specic format to
the database. You can either import or export patient images with
the SystemExternal Data function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera . . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Use this function only if you are thoroughly familiar with the
UNIX operating system.
Rev. 10
System External Data
K.72 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Go into the External Data window and select whether you want
to import or export image les. Subsequently, enter the source or
destination path or name into the respective text eld. If the entire
text cannot be displayed, scroll the line.
Ends the function. The parameters set are retained for subsequent
function selection.
Advantages : Under UNIX, data les are transferred to various sys-
tems via a simple copy procedure. The les can also be transferred
into an intermediate storage that does not contain a Numaris data-
base.
Cancel
Exit
Transferring image les
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Exporting images
Export : Switch to image export.
Source Patient Name : Enter the name of the patient whose images are to be
exported.
Source Image No. : Enter the image numbers of the images to be exported.
Destination Path Name : Enter the complete UNIX path name of the image les to be
generated.
The path name has to end with the directory name and must be
present in the UNIX le system.
Example: /usr/appl/export
After the les have been copied, they are automatically stored in
this directory under UNIX which assigns a name using the follow-
ing format :
Patient name Day and Time of the copy procedure.
Example: Miller1991081517212701
1994 August 15th 17:21 27.01 seconds
File Format: Select the desired le format.
Start the image export.
The images specied are copied to the destination path. The im-
age text is retained. The program allows for easy allocation of the
copied images to the respective patients.
If not specied previously, the patient IDand destination path can
now be entered retroactively.
When the destination les do already exist or the destination di-
rectory does not exist, the copy procedure is terminated with an
error message.
Numaris UNIX
Export
Exit Go
Rev. 10
System External Data
K.74 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Importing image les
Import : Switch to image import.
Source Path Name : Enter the complete UNIX path name and the name of the le
to be imported.
Example: /usr/appl/external/test.ima
Only le test.ima in directory path /usr/appl/external will be im-
ported.
When wild cards are used in the le name, all applicable les are
imported.
Example: /usr/appl/external/*.ima
All les ending in .ima in the directory path /usr/appl/external
are imported.
Destination Patient Name : Enter the name of the destination patient to whomthe images
will be allocated.
Example: ANGIO 63 ICV
File Format: Select the desired le format.
Start the image import.
The image les specied are copied to the Numaris database of
the destination patient. A new series will be created.
If the patient ID of the image les to be imported differs from that of the
destination patient, a notice box is displayed. You can terminate image
import with Cancel this task or Cancel all tasks.
Continue image import with Change name in image. The images are
assigned the identication of the destination patient.
Numaris UNIX
Import
Exit Go
Different patient
identication
?
T I P
Look in the series list of the
destination patient to
determine whether the copy
procedure was successful.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.8
Setting up the camera
With System Camera you can make settings for the camera in-
stalled.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
C H E C K L I S T
7 Function was called at the
main operating console
only.
7 J ob list is stopped
Rev. 07
System Camera
K.82 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Use the System Camera window to set various parameters for
the installed camera, as well as to display parameter information.
Please note: The operating elements available depend on the cam-
era installed.
Ends the function. The set parameters are retained.
Example
Cancel
Exit
Setting up the camera
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Camera settings
Displays current parameters of the camera in the input elds.
Various parameters are displayed depending on the installed
camera. Enter the values for subsequent exposure jobs via the key-
board or arrows.
Contrast
Density
Brightness
Lookup table
Filmtype
Send new parameters to the camera.
Camera information
Display camera information in the Camera Information eld.
For service only.
For service only.
For service only.
Aself-test is performed if there are problems with the camera. Not
supported by all cameras.
Get parameters
Set parameters
These parameters can have a signicant inuence
on image quality.
Check status
Start Trace
Stop Trace
History
Selftest
Rev. 07
System Camera
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.9
Setting and checking the
printer
Prerequisite: A Sony UP-D7000 is connected.
You set and display the parameters for the printer with the Sys-
tem Printer function. In addition, the function lets you check the
printer.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
C H E C K L I S T
7 Function was called at the
main operating console
only.
7 Printer job list is stopped
Notice
Do not use the print-outs for diagnostic purposes.
Rev. 07
System Printer
K.92 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The Printer Service window shows the print parameters.
Ends the function. The parameters entered are retained.
Stops the list of printer jobs.
Cancel
End
Stop
Setting and checking the printer
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Setting the density
Display the current print density.
It is displayed in the elds Light and Dark.
Light (+/7): Enter the new print density, or click the arrows.
Example: 7
0
+7
Conrm the new density.
Checking the print quality
Print a test pattern.
Check the print quality of the test pattern.
Determining the source of print errors
Display the printer status.
Status List: Some of the data provided are relevant for service only. The fol-
lowing are the most important, user-specic messages:
Paper Tray Out: Insert the paper tray
Ribbon Cassette Out: Insert the ribbon cassette
Paper End: Printer is out of paper. Add paper.
Ribbon End: Printer needs a new ribbon
Jamming: Paper jam.
Refer to the operating manual of your printer for additional infor-
mation.
Get Parameters
Set Parameters
Selftest
Check Status
T I P
Tryout different densities until
youndthemost optimal one
for requirements.
Rev. 07
System Printer
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.10
Resetting the workspace
In case of problems, reset the console with the System Refresh
function.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
T I P
Allocate theRefresh function
to a function key
(chapter K.4).
Rev. 07
System Refresh
K.102 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Example: Part of a previously deleted graphics remains displayed
in the image.
Example: Two function windows overlap on-screen. When the
upper window is closed, part of the lower window may
not be displayed.
Use Refresh in each case. The screen display is recongured im-
mediately. All MR images, function windows, and operating ele-
ments are retained.
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.11
System standby
Sometimes the system is not used for a while but not long enough
to justify a shutdown. With System Standby you can switch the
system to stand by in readiness or re-activate it. The System
Standby mode allows you to save energy as well as increase the
operating life of the system.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Standby
K.112 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
The standby mode is switched on or off in the function window.
RFPA current state: Status of RF system:
Standby or
Power On.
GPA current state: Status of gradient system:
Standby or
Power On.
The function button changes according to the status (may take a
few moments).
Sets gradient and RF system to standby mode.
Switches on gradient and RF system.
Ends the function.
RFPA/GPA Standby
RFPA/GPA Power On
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.12
Remote diagnostics
With SystemRemote you can utilize remote diagnostics to main-
tain the quality of your system. Siemens Customer Service ac-
cesses your system directly and performs remote diagnostics.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Remote
K.122 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Enabling full access
The access rights for Siemens Customer Service are set in the func-
tion windowRemote Diagnostics Access Control.
The two function buttons with the triangle offer several selection
options.
Always click on the triangle with the MENU mouse button.
Select the entry with the MENU mouse button.
Set full access rights for Siemens Customer Service.
You will now be informed that additional examinations may not
be performed.
Conrm the Full Access in the notice box with Continue.
Siemens Customer Service can now access your system and per-
formremote diagnostics. The access rights remain in effect for two
hours. If access is not established within this time frame, the ac-
cess rights are automatically rescinded.
MENU button
Access Control
Full Access
Inthis case, themousepointer
is held inthefunction
window. Whenyourescind
access privileges, themouse
pointer canbemovedagain.
Remote diagnostics
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Enabling limited access
When limited access is enabled, you can continue to use your sys-
tem. If Siemens Customer Service has not accessed your system
within two hours, the access rights will be canceled automatically
Set limited access rights for Siemens Customer Service.
Access Control
Limited Access
Rev. 07
System Remote
K.124 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Enabling permanent limited access
You can still continue to use your systemwhen permanent limited
access is enabled. In this case, Customer Service can access your
system at any time and access will not be canceled automatically.
Set permanent limited access rights for Siemens Customer
Service.
Ends or terminates remote diagnosis. This is possible only if the
access rights have been enabled.
Closes the Remote Diagnostics Access Control window. This is
possible only if Full Access has not been enabled.
During limited access control
If you click on the triangle in the header of the function window,
the window will be displayed as an icon on the screen.
As long as Customer Service is accessing your system, the icon
will display a phone with the receiver off the hook.
As soon as remote diagnosis is completed, the icon changes back
to a phone with the receiver hung up.
Access Control
Permanent Limited Access
Disable Access
Exit
Remote diagnostics
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Messages regarding remote diagnostics in progress
For information on the status of the remote diagnostics procedure:
Open the logbook.
The logbook is added to the function window.
Close the logbook.
Data security
The following security measures have been implemented to pre-
vent misuse of data :
O You are the only person who can provide access rights to Siemens
Customer Service.
O If you are required to transmit an MR image, the patient name is
deleted and replaced with your systems serial number.
O All actions taken by Siemens Customer Service are maintained in
the logbook.
Logle
Show Logle
Messages regarding
remote diagnostics
Hide Logle
Rev. 07
System Remote
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.13
Quality assurance
The SystemQAfunction allows you to evaluate criteria for image
quality, the artifacts (body and head coil) and signaltonoise ratio
(all coils).
For detailed quality measurement refer to Working with Numaris
chapter C.5.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System QA
K.132 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Overwiew of the quality assurance
Measures the signal-to-noise ratio (S/N).
Measures artifacts.
Help function.
Slice Orientation: QA_CalcAR window: Selects slice orientation.
Starts the measurement(s).
QA_SN_DIP window: Evaluates the signaltonoise ratio of the
active image (it is not necessary to select one fromthe quality mea-
surement data).
QA_CalcAR window: Pages through the measured images.
Stores the measured values (pending).
QA_SN_DIPwindow: Stores the values of the StandardReference
Measurement (SRM) (pending).
Terminates measurement.
Passes control back to the QA window.
Ends the SystemQA function.
UsetheQA windowto measure
signaltonoiseratio or artifact
characteristics.
QA_SN_DIP...
QA_CalcAr...
Help
Coil identication
(in this case: body coil
MAGNETOM Impact Expert)
Measurement protocol
ExampleQA_SN_DIP window
Go
Eval
Cont
Save SN
Save SN SRM
Abort
Apply
Exit
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.14
Service functions
The functions for service and maintenance are selected with Sys-
temService.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Notice
All service functions are reserved
for service personnel only.
Rev. 07
System Service
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
K.15
Resetting the measurement
system
If errors occur during the measurement, which may have been
caused by a malfunction in the measurement system, reset the
measurement system to initial status with SystemReload All.
You can obtain information regarding errors during the measure-
ment from messages in the control area, or by reviewing the log-
book using the SystemReport function (chapter K.1).
The measurement can be continued once the message Measure-
ment System ready is displayed in the control area.
Main Menu
Patient
Measurement
Series
Image
Evaluate
File
Exposure
Printer
Display
System
Spectroscopy...
Report . . .
Run. . .
End. . .
Keys . . .
Imprint. . .
Info. . .
External Data. . .
Camera. . .
Printer . . .
Refresh
Standby . . .
Remote . . .
QA . . .
Service. . .
Reload All
Rev. 07
System Reload All
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
NUMARIS REFERENCE INDEX1
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Index
Entries marked with an asterisk "*" do not
apply to MAGNETOM Open.
Entries marked with two asterisks "**" only
apply to MAGNETOM Vision.
A
Access rights
Full K.122
Limited K.123, K.124
Acquisitions
Changing the number B.321
Active Contour (ARGUS) E.1810
Active segment A.11
Copying F.25
Active Series C.11
Active view patient A.11
Adjust B.141
Adjustment B.141
Anatomical sort C.35
Angle
Measuring with respect to horizontal
line E.35
Modifying E.44
Angle E.41
Angle measurement E.41
Applications software
Patent display K.52
Archive F.11
Archiving F.11
Images F.15
Interrupting and continuing F.16
Patients F.14
Performing F.14
Selecting the archiving medium F.13
Selecting the type of data F.13
Series F.14
Area (statistics) E.114, E.127
ARGUS E.181
Active Contour E.1810
Arrow Keys E.1811
Auto Segmentation E.1815
Bulls-eye Output E.1828
Cardiac Function Output E.1820
Cardiac Segmentation E.187
CINE Controls E.188
Conrm Sectoring E.1825
Data Analysis E.1819
Frame Identication E.1818
Image analysis platform E.182
Image browser E.186
Patient browser E.184
Sector Denition E.1824
Sectoring E.1823
Series browser E.185
Series Management E.1819
Thickening Table E.1826
Tools E.1812
Arrange C.31
Array coils
Conguring B.332
Arrow Keys (ARGUS) E.1811
Ascending slice series B.312
Auto Display J.51
Auto Segmentation (ARGUS) E.1815
Automatic adjustment B.336
Automatic slice positioning B.24
Autoscout B.123
B
Body parts
Editing the list K.220
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX2 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Bodyscout B.335
BOLD images
Generating E.1424
Bulls-eye Output (ARGUS) E.1828
C
Calculation protocols (MPR, MIP) E.625,
E.725
Deleting E.626
Loading E.626
Storing E.627
Camera
Changing installation K.24
DICOM G.27
Digital G.26
Information K.83
Parameters G.22
Setting up K.81
Camera K.81
Cardiac E.161
Cardiac evaluation E.161
Calculating the body surface E.1615
Calculating the ventricular volume E.1612
Curves E.1619
Displaying the results E.1616
Fill rate E.1618
Generating contours automatically E.165
Generating contours manually E.167
Graphs E.1617
Longitudinal axis images E.164
Myocardial contraction distance E.1621
Myocardial intensity E.1620
Processing contours E.169
Relative ejection fraction E.1615
Scaling the axes E.1622
Tables E.1617, E.1618
Transverse axis images E.164, E.165
Cardiac evaluation (ARGUS) E.181
Cardiac Function Output (ARGUS) E.1820
Change B.31
Changed protocol
After software update B.18
Chapter xxii
Chronological sort C.35
CINE Controls (ARGUS) E.188
Cine mode D.26
CISS E.1412
Coil
Conguring * B.331
Coil list B.12
Color * J.41
Combination
Array coils B.334
Conrm Sectoring (ARGUS) E.1825
Contours (cardiac)
Closing E.168
Correcting E.168
Dividing E.1611
Drawing E.167
Generating automatically E.165
Generating manually E.167
Modifying E.1610
Moving E.1610
Processing E.169
Rotating E.1611
Selecting E.169
Contrast agent B.324
Coordinate system E.54
Copy F.21
Copying F.21
Active segment F.25
Images F.25
Interrupting and continuing F.27
Patients F.24
Performing F.24
Selecting the copy source F.23
Selecting the destination F.23
Series F.24
Coronal slices B.39
Create C.21
Current A.21
Current patient A.21
Curved cuts
Drawing the curve E.612
Moving evaluation section along a
curve E.613
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Moving the curve in parallel E.613
Positioning E.612
Rotating the curve E.613
Cuts
Calculation protocols E.625
Curved cuts E.612
Double-oblique positioning E.610
Oblique positioning E.68
Orthogonal positioning E.66
Parallel curved cuts E.619
Parallel series E.617
Planar cuts E.66
Rotated series E.614
Starting reconstruction E.622
Thick slices E.621
D
Data Analysis (ARGUS) E.1819
Date of birth
Entering A.33
Delay time B.322
Changing * B.36
Delete F.41
Delete protection for patient K.25, K.218
Deleting F.41
Images F.45
Patients F.44
Performing F.44
Selecting the storage medium F.43
Series F.45
Descending slice series B.312
Device data
Listing K.61
Diagnosis entry A.15
DICOM F4
DICOM camera
Presetting G.27
DICOM data A.36
Differentiation E.1419
Digital camera
Parameters G.26
Direct selection A.12
Display
Auto Display J.51
Color * J.41
Screen J.11
Text J.21
Window J.31
Display functions J2
Distance E.31
Distance lines
Creating E.33
Drawing and measuring E.34
Distance measurement E.31
Measuring angle with respect to horizontal
line E.35
Double oblique cuts
Selecting the reference image E.610
Double-oblique cuts
Moving the cut in parallel E.610
Rotating the cut E.611
Double-oblique positioning E.610
Double-oblique slices B.39
Generating B.311
Tilt angle B.311
Dynamic D.21
Dynamic Analysis E.141
Dynamic evaluation E.141
Adding grey values E.1410
Basic operating steps E.143
BOLD images E.1424
Differentiation E.1419
Dividing grey values E.1411
First operand E.143
Functional images (BOLD) E.1424
Integration E.1419
Logarithm E.1418
Mean value E.1423
Multiple operands E.142
Multiplying grey values E.1411
Possible links E.146
Prescaling the result E.1425
Regression line E.1422
Second operand E.143
Selecting linking E.144
Standard deviation E.1423
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX4 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Starting E.1427
Subtracting grey values E.1410
T1 calculation E.1414
With multiple series E.1420
Dynamic image display D.21
Dynamic image numbering A.39
E
ECG signal B.113
ECG triggering B.327
Echo time
Changing B.36
Effective slice thickness
Changing B.37
Eliminating K.214
End K.31
Entries
Image list D.13
Series list C.13
Evaluate
Angle E.41
Cardiac E.161
Distance E.31
Dynamic Analysis E.141
Filter E.131
Flow Quantication * E.171
Grid E.51
Label E.101
Magnify E.11
Manipulate E.91
Mean/Curve E.121
MIP E.71
MPR E.61
Prole E.151
Roam E.21
Scroll E.81
Statistics E.111
Evaluation text E.114
Displaying J.24
Export K.73
Exposure
All images of a series G.15
All segments G.14
Camera parameters G.22
DICOM camera G.27
Individual segment G.14
Interactive G.11
Parameters for digital camera G.26
Presetting parameters G.21
Releasing G.19
Series list G.110
Transferring images G.14
Exposure
Interactive G.11
Job Control G.31
Setting G.21
Exposure functions G2
Exposure jobs
Deleting G.34
Displaying G.36
Processing G.31
Resuming G.34
Suspending G.34
External Data K.71
External signal triggering * B.327
External signal * B.113
F
Field of View
Changing B.320
Rectangular B.320
File
Archive F.11
Copy F.21
Delete F.41
Mark F.31
File functions F2
Keyboard procedures F.12, F.22, F.42
Files F4
Archiving F.11
Copying F.21
Deleting F.41
Marking F.31
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Fill rate E.1618
Film annotation G.26
Film segment G3, G.12
Viewing G.37
Film sheet G3, G.12
Borders G.26
Correcting G.18
Displaying G.16
Graduation G.26
Paging G.37
Polarity G.26
Segment lines G.25
Size and division G.24
Text information G.23
Filter
Image data lter B.329
Normalization lter B.330
Refer to Filtering images
Setting B.328
Filter E.131
Filter groups E.137
Filter sharpness
Allocating values E.137
Filtering images E.131
Conguring the lter E.136
Deleting lter jobs E.1310
Deleting the lter E.138
Processing lter jobs E.1310
Selecting images and lter
sharpness E.134
Selecting the lter E.138
Storing the lter E.138
Working with lter jobs E.139
First operand E.143
Fixed J.17
Flow Quantication * E.171
Flow quantication * E.171
Phase correction E.179
Phase wraps E.179
RACE images E.177
Scaling the curve E.1711
2-D phase contrast images E.174
FOV
Refer to Field of View
Frame Identication (ARGUS) E.1818
FTP access
Changing K.218
Full-frame display J.13, J.18
Function keys
Checking inputs K.44
Entering a command K.43
Programming K.41
Selecting key combinations K.43
Using K.44
Function window
Printing H.23
Setting the color * J.41
Functional images
Evaluating (BOLD) E.1424
G
Global shim B.143
Setting gradient offset currents B.144
Gradient offset currents
Setting B.144
Graph E.127
Sampling E.127
Graphics E.101
Grey values E.115
Adding E.1410
Distribution E.114
Dividing E.1411
Multiplying E.1411
Obtaining the logarithm E.1418
Offsetting E.99
Subtracting E.1410
Grid E.51
Determining the coordinates of
points E.54
Displaying grid points E.53
Scaling E.53
Superimposing the coordinate
system E.54
Grid E.51
Grid points
Determining the coordinates E.54
Displaying E.53
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX6 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Group list B.12
H
Half-Fourier matrix B.319
Hard disk A.13, F4, F.41
HIS A.61
Histogram E.115, E.1425
Sampling E.115
History B.41
Hospital
Changing name K.24
I
Image
Dynamic D.21
Image D.31
Image+ D.31
Select D.11
Image browser (ARGUS) E.186
Image calculation E5
Image data lter B.329
Image les
Exporting K.73
Importing K.74
Marking F.31
Transferring K.71
Image functions D2
Image list D.12
Entries D.13
Selecting an image D.14
Selecting images C.25
Image manipulation E.91
Adding images E.96
Averaging images E.94
In background E.911
Inverting images E.910
Mirroring images E.98
Offsetting grey values E.99
Rotating images E.97
Selecting the type E.93
Starting E.912
Subtracting images E.96
Image measurement E4
Image movement with the mouse (MIP) E.712
Rotating the image E.713
Shifting the image E.715
Undoing E.715
Zooming the image E.714
Image numbering
Dynamic A.39
Image numbers
Alphanumeric input K.215
Image post-processing E3
Image reconstruction E4
Image text J.21
Switching on and off J.22
Switching on globally J.23
Images
Adding E.96
Archiving F.15
Automatic display B.123
Averaging E.94
Copying F.25
Deleting F.45
Displaying automatically J.51
Displaying automatically (with
macro) J.57
Displaying dynamically D.21
Exporting K.73
Exposing G2
Fast Paging D.24
Filming G.11
Filter groups E.137
Filtering E.131
From other systems E6
Generating prole cuts E.151
Importing K.74
Inverting E.910
Magnifying sections E.11
Marking and labelling details E.101
Measuring angles in the image E.41
Measuring distances E.31
MIP projections E.71
Mirroring E.98
Modifying image values E.91
Number A.15
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Offsetting grey values E.99
Paging D.31, J.18
Paging down D.32
Paging up D.33
Printing H.11
Reconstructing images E.61
Rotating E.97
Scrolling E.81
Segmenting E.164
Selecting C.25, D.11
Statistical comparison E.121
Statistical evaluation E.111
Subtracting E.96
Superimposing a grid E.51
Windowing J.31
Zooming and roaming E.21
Imprint K.51
Info K.61
Integration E.1419
Interactive G.11, H.11
Interactive shim * B.151
Setting the shim currents B.152
Interference in steady state E.1412
Interleaved slice series B.312
Interpolation B.324
Inversion time
Changing B.36
J
Job Control G.31, H.41
Job list
Exposure G.36
Printing H2, H.46
Job list (exposure) G3
K
Keyboard procedures F.12, F.22, F.42
Keys K.41
Keywords xxi
L
Label A.15
Label E.101
List selection A.12
Load B.71
Localizer image
Displaying image positions C.61
Log le K.210
Logbook K.11
Longitudinal axis images (cardiac) E.164
Longitudinal cardiac axis E.164
M
macro J.57
Magneto-optical disk
Deleting F.41
Magnication E.11
Changing size of ROI E.14
Displaying the original image E.15
Individual images E.13
Moving the ROI E.14
Range of images E.16
Starting E.16
Magnify E.11
Mandatory inputs A.33
Mandatory settings A.34
Manipulate E.91
MAP-Shim
Refer to Global shim B.143
Mark F.31
Marking F.31
Removing F.32
Setting F.32
Master page
Creating H.36
Deleting H.38
Modifying H.37
Storing H.37
Matrix size
Interpolating B.324
Maximum intensity projections
Refer to MIP
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX8 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Mean value E.1423
Mean value (statistics)
Of multiple images E.127
Of one image E.114
Mean/Curve E.121
Measure B.61
Measurement
Modifying parameters B.31
Performing B.61
Procedure B3
Starting B.12, B.91
Terminating B.12, B.101
Measurement
Adjust B.141
Change B.31
History B.41
Load B.71
Measure B.61
Monitoring B.111
Position B.21
Protocols B.11
Queue B.51
SAR * B.131
Set B.121
Shim * B.151
Show Loaded B.81
Start B.91
Stop B.101
Measurement data acquisition B.318
Measurement functions B2
Presetting parameters B.121
Measurement group B.11
Creating new group B.16
Deleting B.15
Measurement history
Displaying B.43
Verication window B.44
Measurement interval B.322
Measurement job
Deleting B.55
Processing B.51
Repeating B.54
Stopping B.55
Measurement parameters
Displaying B.48, B.82
Modifying B.31
Measurement procedure B3
Measurement protocol B.11
After software update B.18
Copying B.13
Creating comments B.17
Deleting B.15
Displaying B.81
General information B.34
Loading B.71
Managing B.14
Modifying sort mode B.15
Reactivating B.41
Selecting B.11, B.13, B.34
Storing B.15
Testing the consistency B.47
Measurement system
Resetting K.151
Medical windowing J.31
Messages
From a remote console K.14
Of the local console K.14
Refer also to Logbook
Searching K.14
Searching with search string K.14
Storing K.13
MIP
Dening view directions E.716
From multislice series E.71
Image movement with the mouse E.712
In background E.722
In foreground E.721
Loading base images E.73
Managing calculation protocols E.725
Selecting base images E.72
Starting the calculation E.721
Storing projections E.724
Superimposing the VOI E.78
3-D pointer E.76
MIP E.71
Mobile MR systems K.24
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
MOD
Refer to Magneto-optical disk
Modify
Patient A.71
Series C.41
Monitoring B.111
Mouse
For left-handed use K.23
For right-handed use K.23
MPR
From multislice series E.61
From 3-D series E.61
In background E.623
In foreground E.622
Loading base images E.63
Selecting base images E.62
Starting reconstruction E.622
3-D pointer E.66
MPR E.61
Multiplanar Reconstruction
Refer to MPR
Multiple operands E.142
Multi-windowing J.36
Myocardial contraction distance E.1621
Myocardial intensity E.1620
N
Network
DICOM F4
SIENET F4
Normalization lter B.330
Numaris
Changing language K.23
Logbook K.11
Numaris database K.26
Number of pixels E.115
O
Oblique cuts
Moving the cut in parallel E.68
Rotating the cut E.69
Oblique positioning E.68
Oblique slices B.39
Generating B.310
Tilt angle B.310
OD
Refer to optical disk
Operating system K.71
Optical disk A.13, F4
Original image E.15
Orthogonal cuts
Moving a cut plane in parallel E.67
Orthogonal positioning E.66
Oversampling B.38, B.319
P
Paging
Cine mode D.26
Down through images D.32
Down through series C.52
Fast image paging D.24
Individually through images D.31
Up through images D.33
Up through series C.53
Parallel presaturation slabs B.214
Parallel series
Changing the distribution of cuts E.618
Dening cuts E.617
Generating E.617
Part xxii
Partitions
Password
Changing K.218
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX10 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Patient
Active view A.11
Archiving F.14
Copying F.24
Current A.21
Deleting F.44
Modifying data A.71
Preregistering A.41
Registering A.31
Renewing registered patient A.51
Selecting A.21
Selecting directly A.17
Selecting next A.83
Selecting previous A.82
Patient
Current A.21
Modify A.71
Patient A.81
Patient+ A.81
Preregister A.41
Register A.31
Renew A.51
Select A.11
Worklist A.61
Patient browser (ARGUS) E.184
Patient data
Entering A.32, A.42
Modifying A.71
Renewing A.54
Patient functions A2
Patient identication
Deleting E.128
Patient list A.14
Displaying a patient A.16
Opening A.13
Paging through list A.81
Sorting K.23
Patient name A.15
Entering A.33, A.42
Patient number A.15
Entering A.33, A.42
Patient A.81
Patient+ A.81
Phase correction * E.179
Phase images B.325
Phase wraps * E.179
Phase-encoding direction B.38, B.315, B.319
Physiological signal
Setting B.111
Physiological stimulation **
Displaying values B.164
Limits B.162
Monitoring B.161
Physiological triggering
Setting B.326
Planar cuts E.66
Position B.21
Positioning parameters
Reusing B.46
Preregister A.41
Preregistration A.41
Presaturation parameters
Reusing B.45
Presaturation slab parameters
Reusing B.46
Presaturation slabs
Changing the type B.317
Free positioning B.316
Parallel B.214
Processing B.218
Selecting the pulses B.317
Separate B.213
Setting B.211
Tracking B.214
Viewing B.211
Print functions H2
Print jobs H2
Deleting H.44
Displaying H.46
Processing H.41
Resuming H.44
Starting H.15
Suspending H.44
Print segment H2, H.12
Viewing H.47
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Print sheet
Portrait/Landscape H.35
Size and division H.34
Printer
Interactive H.11
Job Control H.41
Setting H.31
Snapshot H.21
Printer *
Displaying parameters K.91
Setting parameters K.91
Printer * K.91
Printing H2
All segments H.14
Allocating screen segments H.14
Function window H.23
Images H.11
Individual segment H.14
Master page H.36
Presetting the parameters H.31
Processing jobs H.41
Screen ROI H.24
Selecting images H.16
Starting jobs H.15
Text information H.34
Prole E.151
Prole cuts E.151
Evaluating E.154
Grey values E.154
Local coordinates E.154
Sampling E.154
Scaling the Y axis E.153
Setting the cut line orientation E.153
Starting E.154
Programs
Changing defaults K.23
Changing FTP access K.218
Changing language K.23
Changing passwords K.218
Changing SAR limits * K.223
Changing settings for mobile MR
systems K.24
Changing the screen background K.23
Delete protection for patient K.25, K.218
Eliminating errors K.214
For service K.223
Left-hand mouse K.23
Right-hand mouse K.23
Sorting the patient list K.23
Starting K.21
Protocol list B.12
Protocol (measurement)
Refer to Measurement protocol
Protocols B.11
Pulse parameters B.36
Pulse sequence
Selecting B.35
Pulse signal B.113
Pulse triggering B.327
Q
QA K.131
Quality assurance K.131
Quality patient
Registering K.132
Queue
Changing job sequence B.56
Deleting jobs B.55
Pausing B.55
Repeating job B.54
Stopping job B.55
Queue B.51
R
RACE images * E.177
Raw data matrix
Reduced B.318
Read-out direction B.38, B.315, B.319
Reconstruction parameters B.324
Rectangular Field of View B.320
Refresh K.101
Region of Interest
Refer to ROI
Register A.31
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX12 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Registration A.31
DICOM data A.36
Ending A.38
Mandatory inputs A.33
Mandatory settings A.34
Registration date A.15
Registration form A.32
Regression line E.1422
Relative ejection fraction E.1615
Reload All K.151
Remote K.121
Remote diagnostics
Full access rights K.122
Limited access rights K.123
Messages K.125
Permanent limited access rights K.124
Removable storage medium F4
Renew A.51
Repetition time
Changing B.36
Report K.11
Respiratory signal * B.113
Respiratory triggering * B.327
RIS A.61
Roam E.21
Image under the segment E.24
Roam E.21
ROI E2
Changing the size E.14
Drawing E.114
Managing E.116, E.129
Moving E.14
Reusing E.116, E.129
Storing E.116, E.129
ROI list E.116, E.129
Deleting an entry E.117, E.1210
Rotated series
Changing the distribution of cuts E.616
Dening cuts E.615
Equally distributing cuts E.616
Establishing the axis of rotation E.614
Generating E.614
Run K.21
S
Sagittal slices B.39
Sampling line E.115, E.127, E.154
SAR
Weight of the patient A.33
SAR *
Refer also to Specic absorption rate
SAR * B.131
Saturation pulses B.317
Scaling the axes E.1622
Scaling the X axis E.124
Scaling the Y axis E.124, E.153
Screen
Changing the background K.23
Screen J.11
Screen display
Image text J.21
Modifying J.11
Setting parameter for paging J.18
Setting the segment change-over J.15
Screen ROI
Printing H.24
Scroll E.81
Individual images E.83
Range of images E.85
Returning to previous status E.84
Scrolling a reference image E.85
Selecting direction E.83
Scroll E.81
Second localizer B.210
Virtual center slice B.210
Second operand E.143
Sector Denition (ARGUS) E.1824
Sectoring (ARGUS) E.1823
Segment
Active A.11
Exposing G.14
Printing H.14
Segment change-over J.15
Fixed J.17
Serial J.15
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Segment display
Changing J.14
Full-frame J.13
4 segments J.13
Segmenting (cardiac images) E.164
Select
Image D.11
Patient A.11
Series C.11
Selection lists
Coil list B.12
Group list B.12
Image list D.12
Patient list A.14
Printing A.19
Protocol list B.12
Series list C.12
Separate presaturation slabs B.213
Sequence le B.35
Serial J.15
Series
Active C.11
Archiving F.14
Combining C.34
Copying F.24
Creating new series C.21
Deleting F.45
Displaying on localizer image C.61
Modifying C.41
Paging C.51
Paging down C.52
Paging up C.53
Selecting C.11, C.23
Sorting images C.31
Series
Arrange C.31
Create C.21
Display C.61
Modify C.41
Select C.11
Series C.51
Series+ C.51
Series C.51
Series browser (ARGUS) E.185
Series functions C2
Series list C.12
Entries C.13
Exposure G.110
Selecting a series C.14, C.23
Series Management (ARGUS) E.1819
Series name C.23
Series+ C.51
Service K.141
Service functions K.141
Set B.121
Setting G.21, H.31
Shell tool window K.22
Shim
Global B.143
Shim adjustment B.336
Shim currents *
Setting B.152
Shim *
Interactive B.151
Shim * B.151
Show Loaded B.81
SIENET F4
Signaltonoise ratio B.34
Improving E.131
Sinc interpolation B.324
Slab distance B.313
Slab groups
Changing the distance B.29
Slab parameters
Displaying B.48
Slab selection direction B.38
Slab thickness
Changing B.37
Slabs
Changing the number of partitions B.38
Changing the thickness B.37
Slice distance B.313
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX14 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Slice groups
Changing the number of members B.29
Setting B.28
Slice offcenter B.315
Slice orientation
Changing B.39
Coronal B.39
Double-oblique B.39
Oblique B.39
Sagittal B.39
Transverse B.39
Slice parameters
Reusing B.45
Setting B.37
Slice positioning
Automatic B.24
Slice series
Ascending B.312
Descending B.312
Interleaved B.312
Selecting free B.313
Slice thickness
Changing B.37
Slices
Changing the offcenter B.315
Changing the orientation B.39
Changing the thickness B.37
Deleting B.219, B.315
Generating double-oblique slices B.311
Generating oblique slices B.310
Modifying the order B.312
Positioning B.21
Selecting free series B.313
Shifting B.37
Shifting the midpoint B.26
Visible B.24
Slice/slab groups B.28
Creating B.212
Rotating B.215
Shifting B.217
Snapshot H.21
Software
Eliminating errors K.214
Ending K.31
Sort C.31
Cancelling C.38
Performing C.36
Sort mode
Anatomical C.35
Chronological C.35
Setting C.34
Sort criteria C.35
Spatial encoding
Swapping B.323
Special keys K.41
Specic absorption rate *
Changing the limits K.223
Checking B.131
Standard deviation (statistics) E.114, E.127
Standard image A.16
Standard text
Displaying J.23
Standby K.111
Start B.91
START key B.91
Statistical comparison of images E.121
Area E.127
Checking the image range E.123
Drawing the ROI E.126
Dynamically modifying the ROI E.123
Graph E.127
Managing ROI's E.129
Mean value E.127
Performing the evaluation E.126
Scaling the X axis E.124
Scaling the Y axis E.124
Selecting calculation parameters E.124
Value table E.128
INDEX
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Statistical evaluation E.111
Area E.114
Calculating grey value distribution E.114
Drawing ROI's E.114
Evaluation text E.114
Histogram E.115
Managing ROI's E.116
Mean value E.114
Selecting the calculation E.113
Selecting the limit values E.113
Statistics E.111
Stop B.101
Storage device
Selecting A.13
Storage medium F4
Hard disk F4
Magneto-optical disk
Optical disk F4
Removable F4
STORE
Refer to hard disk
Summary chapter xxii
Survey measurement
Automatic B.123
With body coil * B.335
System
Resetting K.151
System
Camera K.81
End K.31
External Data K.71
Imprint K.51
Info K.61
Keys K.41
Printer * K.91
QA K.131
Refresh K.101
Reload All K.151
Remote K.121
Report K.11
Run K.21
Service K.141
Standby K.111
System data
Retrieving K.51
System functions K2
System standby K.111
T
Text J.21
Thickening Table (ARGUS) E.1826
Tilt angle B.310, B.311
Tools (ARGUS) E.1812
Tracking presaturation slabs B.214
Transverse axis images (cardiac) E.164, E.165
Transverse slices B.39
Triggering
Setting B.326
U
UNIX K.71
V
Value table E.128
Ventricular volume
Area-Length Method E.1613
Calculating E.1612
Computation method E.1613
Computation time point E.1614
Diastolic volume E.1614
Graph E.1619
Summary of calculation E.1618
Systolic volume E.1614
3-D slice summation method E.1613
Verication window B.44
Switching on B.123
View direction (MIP) E.716
Dening directly with the keyboard E.719
Dening directly with the mouse E.719
Dening via arrows E.717
Freely dened (Trace) E.720
Virtual center slice B.210
Rev. 11
INDEX
INDEX16 MAGNETOM
Not OK
Date .............. Signature .................
Not OK
F
o
r

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

u
s
e

o
n
l
y
Visible slices B.24
W
Weight
Entering A.33
Weight of patient A.33
Window J.31
Windowing J.31
Automatically J.35
Modality J.33
Multi-windowing J.36
Setting the parameters J.32
Speed J.33
Windowing center J.32
Windowing values
Entering J.34
Storing J.34
Windowing width J.32
Worklist A.61
Workspace
Resetting K.101
Z
Zoom E.21
Difference from magnication E.22
Step-by-step procedure E.23
Zooming the image E.23
Zoom factor E.23
2-D phase contrast images * E.174
3-D pointer E.66, E.76
4-segment display J.13

Numaris Reference VB33G PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Numaris Reference VB33G PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

S Y S T E M T E S T R E V I E W

S-ar putea să vă placă și